Rules of Play

1
 GAME PIECE KEY
Light Infantry Weapon (Light Machine Gun) Personnel Unit (squad) Heavy Crew Served Weapon (AT Gun)
Unit ID Rate of Fire (if >1) Number of 21 Unit ID Carrying Class
figures used for (H = Heavy)
Carrying Class Stacking Value
Gunfire Factors (L = Light) (e.g., value = 3) Weapon Type
Unit ID# (AT = AT Gun)
Weapon Type Gun Size Range Limit (only
Range (MG = Machine Morale Level
Gunfire Factors one number listed
Gun) Range Gun Class = maximum range)
Medium Crew Served Weapon (Medium Mortar) Personnel Unit (Officer) Rate of Fire (if >1)
Unit ID Number of 9 Armored Fighting Vehicle (AFV)
Carrying Class figures used for
(M = Medium) Unit ID Cross Country
Range Limit Stacking Value Movement |
(minimum- Weapon Type (e.g., value = 1) Unit ID# Assault
Gun Size
maximum) (MTR = Mortar) Movement
Morale Level Turret DRM (dashed
Gun Size Gun Class Gunfire Factors circle = +2 for first BMG
Range hexspine facing
Light Anti-Tank Weapon (Panzerfaust) Personnel Unit (crew) change) CMG
Number of 4
Unit ID Carrying Class figures used for Transport Vehicle
(L = Light) Stacking Value Unit ID Cross Country
Range Limit (e.g., value = 2)
(year of scenario: Unit ID# Movement |
Weapon Type Assault
maximum) (AT = Anti-Tank) Cover State of
Morale Level Movement
Gunfire Factors passengers
Gun Size * = Special Gun Class (listed on (S = Stationary)
Range
Ammo Table as Panzerfaust)
BAR Gunner
Passenger Capacity
Light Infantry Weapon (Flamethrower) Range (in Stacking Points)
Unit ID Carrying Class Number of 9 Watercraft (WC) Water
(L = Light) figures used for Unit ID Movement
Range Limit Stacking Value
(maximum) Weapon Type (e.g., value = 1) Morale Level
(FT = Flamethrower) Cover State of Carrying Class
passengers (M = Medium)
Casualty Table GF 1 = Flamethrower Range Rate of Fire (S = Stationary)
Gunfire Factors
Equivalent = 30
Passenger Capacity
Heavy Crew Served Weapon (AA Gun) Armored Fighting Vehicle (AFV) (in Stacking Points)
Unit ID Carrying Class Unit ID Cross Country
(H = Heavy) Movement | Aircraft (Stuka)
Fast Traverse Assault Unit ID
Weapon Type (cut to indicate Movement
(AA = AA Gun) no TCA to rear
Gun Size allowed)
Anti-Aircraft
360 gun traverse Fire value (= 8) 30 FT in
circle (solid = Gun Class turret AAMG Bomb value
CMG
FAST) BMG
Rate of Fire (= 3) Range =
2 for FT (5 = ROF/number of
Small bombs ALL bombs; thus 1 x
500 + 4 x 50)

THE AFV CARDS

Machine Guns available: Ammunition types available:
Turret
modifiers for Bow (BMG)
Name Coaxial (CMG)
changing High Explosive Values
turret facing: Antiaircraft (AAMG) (HE Penetration vs. vehicles) | HE Fragmentation
1st hexspine Factors (vs. personnel)
| 2nd and
subsequent Rate of Fire of Main Armament (50C)
Turret Information (Close Top | Turreted)
Movement
Factors: Main Armament Type (50C gun; circle denotes turreted)
Cross Morale Level of vehicle crew
Country |
Assault Target Size Modifier for Hit Probability Table
Movement Classification
Armor
Factors at Penetration Numbers at Ranges 0-2 through
different 60 hexes for each Armor Piercing ammunition
facings and type available to that AFV
aspects

2

1.0 INTRODUCTION
The ADVANCED TOBRUK SYSTEM (ATS)
recreates tactical-level combat in a detailed
and realistic manner. The ATS game sys-
tem was launched in 2002 with the release
of “Advanced Tobruk”, a remake of the ear-
lier AH classic board wargame. These rules
a r e i n t e n d e d f o r u s e w i t h ADVANCED
TOBRUK and ALL subsequent ATS games.
A copy of this rulebook is provided with each
complete ATS game. This edition of the ATS
rulebook is version 3.07 and replaces all
previous versions. Visit www.criticalhit.com
for a download version of the latest edition
of these rules.
ATS scenarios recreate historical small-unit
actions that depict two or more combatants
conducting combat operations until time
runs out or one side meets specified vic-
tory conditions.
Basic Game Rules—To assist you in get-
ting into the game quickly, a separate BA-
SIC GAME rulebook and training mapsheet
are provided in all boxed ATS games. New
players should begin with the Basic Game
before delving into the main rulebook. Ba-
sic Game concepts work directly with the
main game. The Basic Game is especially
useful for understanding Line-of-Sight prin-
ciples.
2.0 GAME SCALE AND TERMS
2.1 PERSONNEL, VEHICLES, TIME AND
DISTANCE
Each weapon or vehicle counter represents
one weapon or vehicle. Personnel units vary,
representing squads, crews, artillery for -
ward observers, BAR gunners, noncommis-
sioned officers and officers. NCOs and of-
ficers are referred to as LEADERS in the
game. Each game turn represents about
ninety seconds of real time. Each hex rep-
resents 50 yards of terrain.
2.2 GAME TERMS AND ACRONYMS
These rules use a number of acronyms. The
full word is spelled out at the first use of an
acronym, followed with the acronym in pa-
rentheses. Refer to Appendix B for a com-
plete list of acronyms.
3.0 COMPONENTS
3.1 MAPS
The game maps depict historical battlefields.
Labels for street and building names are
occasionally affixed to add historical flavor.
Each map hex has a unique coordinate iden-
tifier, and a center (or sighting) dot used for
tracing Line-of-Sight (LOS). Half hexes are
in play and treated as full hexes for all pur -
poses. Some scenarios use only a portion
of the map. Others use more than one map.
When laying out maps for play, orient them
in keeping with the ‘Map Layout’ for that
scenario, and note any limitations on the
playing area listed in the ‘Map Configura-
tion’ section on each scenario card.
3.1.1 Topography
ATS maps use colored topography LEVELS
to represent 3D land-forms on a 2D map
surface.
3.1.11 Levels—Unless marked otherwise,
all hexes on desert maps have a ‘height’ value
of Level ‘0’. Terrain and Levels rise in rela-
tive heights to Levels +5, +10, +20, etc.
and fall, to Levels -5, -10, -20, and so on.
Non-desert maps have topographic height
notations printed on them. All terrain of the side receives 8 x 7|6|8 squads. When the
same color is treated as on the same level Fog of War (FOW) side of a counter is shown
in game terms. in an OOB, that combatant sets up the indi-
3.1.12 Terrain types—Most hexes depict a cated quantity of dummies of the specified
single, particular type of terrain, for example, type (vehicle or gun).
Woods. Some hexes combine two or more 3.4.11 Units and Markers not pictured—
types of terrain, for instance, a Road through Before beginning play, add the following
Woods. The terrain rules outline the effects units to the printed OOB:
of each type of terrain. a) One 2|3|8 Crew counter for each Me-
3.1.13 Hex Locations—Most hexes show a dium and Heavy weapon;
single ‘Location’—units in that hex are all in b) ONLY if NO weapons pits are provided in
the same physical place. Some hexes have any portion of that side’s OOB, players may,
more than one location. A building may have at their option, add one Weapons Pit for each
a ‘ground level’ at Level 0, and ‘upstairs’ Heavy weapon that begins a NON-DESER T
levels at Levels +10 and +20. Each of these scenario on map.
levels are separate locations, although they c) Also note that other weapons may be used
are all in the same hex. Units in them may that are not depicted on a scenario card
have different Lines-of-Sight (LOS) and in such as Smoke Grenades (6.4.72), and
some cases different stacking limits (e.g., Flares (only during night Spotting Condi-
Steeples), and are be targeted separately tions, see 6.9.6) during a scenario although
by direct fire. In the case of Linear Depres- not pictured in a side’s OOB.
sions (LD) and Emplacements, different po- 3.4.2 Set Up Order
sitions, like ‘Up’ and ‘Down’, or ‘Under’ and Players set up in the order listed for their
‘On top’, are NOT considered separate loca- OOB, with the side setting up first com-
tions but separate positions within the same pleting all set up before the side setting up
location). second places any units on the map. In any
Example: A Personnel unit in a building may scenario that has all units of one side en-
be on the ground level, at Level 0, or one level tering play from off-map, the non-entering
‘upstairs’ at Level +10. Each represents a player sets up first. In any scenario lacking
separate location within one hex. the set up order for units of one or both
3.2 OVERLAYS sides setting up on map, make a pre-game
Overlays are sheets with printed terrain pro- Initiative die roll. The lowest roll wins, and
vided in ADVANCED TOBRUK. Scenario the winner may set up first OR second.
Special Rules (SSRs) specify overlay place- 3.4.3 Set Up Area
ment on maps. Units may set up anywhere in their desig-
3.2.1 Placement nated area(s), including in half-hexes.
Each overlay is identified by a letter -num- 3.4.4 Map Entry and Exit
ber ID. Simply match the X and Y coordi- Some units enter the game from off-map.
nates found on the specified overlay with All units enter within the listed instructions
the matching hexes on the map. provided in the scenario. Units listed as
3.2.2 Overlays do not contain their own entering during a certain turn must enter
coordinates. Use the hex coordinate found on that turn but may otherwise enter freely
on the map hexes beneath the overlay. using any listed entry hexes (i.e., they need
3.3 CHARTS AND TABLES not set up off map prior to actually using a
Tables on Play Aid Cards 1-8 have a unique movement impulse to enter). Entering units
ID, usually found in the upper right-hand follow all rules of movement. Units may only
or left-hand corners. See Appendix A for an exit the map without penalty if exit is speci-
overview of all system charts and tables. fied by SSR or in the Victory Conditions.
Example: ‘F2’ is the Casu-
alty Table. TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.4 SCENARIO CARDS
Each ATS game or expan- 1.0 INTRODUCTION...........................................................3
sion contains several cards 2.0 GAME SCALE AND TERMS.........................................3
providing a collection of his-
torical scenarios. Each sce-
3.0 COMPONENTS............................................................3
nario contains an historical 4.0 SEQUENCE OF PLAY........................................5
s u m m a r y , a n O r der - O f - 5.0 STACKING............................................................7
Battle (OOB) for each com-
batant, a turn record track,
6.0 LINES OF SIGHT AND FIRE.........................................7
any special rules unique to 7.0 GENERAL TERRAIN RULES.....................................10
that scenario, pertinent 8.0 TERRAIN TYPES..................................................12
map information, and vic-
tory conditions.
9.0 EMPLACEMENTS................................................20
3.4.1 Order of Battle 10.0 MORALE.......................................................23
The OOB provides the type 11.0 MOVEMENT.................................................25
and number of units avail-
able for the combatants. In-
12.0 COMBAT.....................................................28
structions for set up are 13.0 SPECIAL TROOP TYPES.................................45
also provided, including the
14.0 SPECIAL WEAPON AND CREW RULES...............46
order of set up. When more
than one of a particular
15.0 SPECIAL VEHICLE RULES...............................48
counter is provided, the DETAILED LOS EXAMPLES..................................53
number printed under the
APPENDIX A: CHARTS AND TABLES.................54
counter indicates the quan-
tity. See 6.7.5 for Dummy
APPENDIX B: ACRONYMS..............................54
units. APPENDIX C: OPTIONAL RULES................................55
Example: An EIGHT under
INDEX................................................................................56
a 7|6|8 squad means that
3
Otherwise, units MAY exit along a friendly
map edge but are counted as Victory Points
earned by the opponent. Once exited, units
may not return.
3.4.41 Platoon and Convoy Entry—If us-
ing Platoon Movement or Convoy Movement
to enter, treat the map hexgrid as if it con-
tinues off-map in continuous open ground
(Exception: Roads and waterways are con-
sidered to extend straight off the map in
their current hexrows). These units then
move through these ‘imaginary’ hexes to
enter play but may not be fired on until they
reach a hex that is in play.
3.4.5 Victory Conditions
Victory usually involves seizing terrain or
causing enemy casualties. To win, a side
must COMPLETELY fulfill the stated Vic-
tory Conditions. If only one side has victory
conditions, failure to fulfill these conditions
results in victory for the other side. Draws
are sometimes possible.
3.4.51 Victory Points—Some scenarios call
for one side or the other to earn Victory
Points (VP). Players tally VP using the val-
ues provided on the Victory Point Table.
Victory Points are awarded, or ‘earned’,
immediately when the listed action is ac-
complished.
3.4.52 Exit Victory Points—Units exited
to meet scenario Victory Conditions are
worth the same value to the exiting side as
if they were destroyed by the other side.
Move these units off the map from the exit
hexes listed in a scenario, paying one move-
ment point to move off the map from any
map-edge hex. Exit is only available as an
option for earning VP if so-stated by SSR or
Victory Conditions.
3.4.53 Control—Some Victory Conditions
call for a side to control terrain. A side con-
trols a hex LOCATION if ANY of the follow-
ing applies:
a) The hex is in its original set up area and
no enemy unit has ever entered any loca-
tion of it;
b) It was the last to enter the location with
non-Broken/Surrendered Personnel units
totaling at least two Stacking Points (applies
to ANY terrain hex);
c) It was the last to enter the location with a
non-M/F-KILLed AFV/APC (applies to non-
Building terrain hexes).
A side can only control a HEX if it controls
ALL locations in the hex. However, if a side
controls ONE non rooftop location of a hex
and the enemy has never controlled ANY
non rooftop location of it in the manner de-
scribed in ‘b’ above, the entire hex is con-
sidered controlled by the side that last en-
ters it.
3.4.6 Game Turn Record Track—A group
of rectangular boxes on each scenario card
shows how many turns the scenario lasts.
Place the Turn marker in the correct box
for each turn.
3.4.7 Friendly Map Edge—Some rules re-
fer to the ‘Friendly Map Edge’ (FME). If this
information is not listed by SSR, any edge a
side entered from or the closest edge to that
side’s set up area is considered a FME.
3.4.8 Scenario Special Rules—The Scenario
Special Rules (SSR) detail unique rules for
each scenario. SSR normally add restric-
tions or abilities to a side just for that sce-
nario and sometimes override the system
rules.
3.5 COUNTERS
The die-cut playing pieces, variously called
units, markers, or counters, show individual
vehicles, weapons, or small groups of Per -
sonnel. Counters consist of purely combat
units (Personnel; vehicles; weapons) and
markers (emplacements; smoke; FFE; etc.)
Printed on each counter is information per-
tinent to the play of the game. Armored Fight-
ing Vehicles (AFV) and some other vehicles
also use cards to present information. Ad-
ditional information relating to units is found
on various Play Aids. The ammunition types
available to gun counters are found on the
Gun & Ammo Table for each nationality (Play
Aid 5 for each).
3.5.1 Counter Size
Counters come in three sizes:
a) Personnel—5/8";
b) Weapons and vehicles—both 5/8" and
3/4" sizes;
c) Markers—both 1/2" and 3/4" sizes.
3.5.2 Nationalities
Personnel, weapons, and vehicles are pre-
sented in a different color for each nation-
ality: Blue-Gray for Germans; Bright Green
for Italians; Olive Drab for Americans; Khaki
for British; Brown for Russians; and so on.
Emplacements use a 3/4” counter in a dusty
yellow, as do all truck counters (colored
yellow to denote these counter types may
be used freely by any side).
3.5.3 Personnel —There are six types of
Personnel counters in the game. All use 5/
8" counters and have three values repre-
senting: Gunfire Factors | Range | Morale.
3.5.31 Squad—Rep-
resents 7-12 men
and have three fig-
ures on their front
side; the back of the
counter, bearing two figures, represents a
Reduced squad, with lower values for Gun-
fire Factors and Morale.
3.5.32 Crew—Represents 2-4
men trained to fire Medium and
Heavy weapons, like mortars
and anti-tank guns, and have
two figures on the front AND
back of the counter (one figure is always
with field glasses); the back of the counter
represents a reduced Crew with lower Gun-
fire and Morale values.
3.5.33 Leader—Rep-
resents one man, ei-
ther a noncommis-
sioned officer (re-
ferred to as an NCO
in game terms) or a commissioned officer
(referred to as an Officer in game terms);
the back of the counter has a reduced Mo-
rale value and a ‘red cross’, denoting
Wounded status. In all cases an OFFICER
is represented by the leader counter with
the HIGHEST printed morale value (Excep-
tion: Japanese officers show an ‘*’ instead
of a morale value; see 10.3.3 for details) for
each nationality. An NCO is represented by
the leader counters with morale values that
are lower. Example: German Personnel rep-
resent an Officers as 1|1|8s and NCOs with
1|1|7s. See 13.1.41 for movement bonuses.
3.5.34 Commissar —Repre-
sents one man, a political advi-
sor to tactical commanders; has
a Wounded side like a leader
counter. A Commissar may never
4
lead attacks or be part of a Firegroup, but
is otherwise treated as a Leader. The mo-
rale value of a Commissar is shown as an
‘*’, indicating specials rules apply (see
10.3.3). Note: Japanese OFFICERS also have
an ‘*’ morale value but are NOT considered
Commissars. Commissars receive a move-
ment bonus in the same manner as leaders
(see 13.1.41).
3.5.35 Forward Observer
(FO) —Represents one officer
from an artillery unit; has a
Wo u n d e d s i d e l i k e a l e a d e r
counter; all FO counters have a
black triangle on their counters. FOs re-
ceive a movement bonus in the same man-
ner as leaders (see 13.1.41). An FO may
never lead a Firegroup nor provide a lead-
ership shift/DRM.
3.5.36 BAR Gunner —Repre-
sents one man armed with a
Browning Automatic Rifle and
has a wounded side like a leader
counter. Each BAR Gunner has
a 2 Rate-of-Fire (ROF) for its 2 Gunfire Fac-
tors. BAR Gunners receive a movement
bonus in the same manner as leaders (see
13.1.41). A BAR Gunner may never lead a
Firegroup nor provide a leadership shift/
DRM.
3.5.37 Additional Personnel Types—Some
ATS games include additional Personnel
types in their Battlefield Walkaround (BW)
rules (e.g., Suomi Gunners are included in
MANNERHEIM’S CROSS).
3.5.4 Weapons
There are three types of weapon counters.
Place weapon counters on top of the Per -
sonnel unit that is crewing or carrying it
(referred to as ‘manning’ in both cases).
3.5.41 Light (L) Weapons— Represent one
Light weapon that Personnel counters can
carry and fire. These weapons are usually
among the standard armament of an infan-
try company, such as anti-tank rifles
(L|ATR), Light machine-guns (L|MG), light
mortars (L|MTR), Flamethrowers (FT) and
Shaped Charge Weapons (L|AT). Light in-
fantry weapons use 5/8” counters.
3.5.42 Medium (M) weapons —Includes
medium mortars (M|MTR), medium ma-
chine-guns (M|MG), medium anti-tank guns
(M|AT), medium howitzers (M|HOW) and
medium anti-tank rifles (M|ATR). Add one
crew per M weapon provided in the OOB
listed for each side on a scenario card (see
3.4.11). All Medium weapons must set up
with this manning crew. Medium weapons
use 5/8” counters.
3.5.43 Heavy (H) weapons—Includes anti-
tank guns (H|AT), anti-aircraft guns (H|AA),
heavy anti-aircraft machine-guns (H|AA),
howitzers (H|HOW), and field artillery
(H|GUN). Add one crew per H weapon pro-
vided in the OOB listed for each side on a
scenario card (see 3.4.11). All Heavy weap-
ons must set up with their manning crew.
These heavier -caliber guns are the only
weapon units that use 3/4” counters.
3.5.5 Vehicle Types and Armor Factors
There are three types of 3/4" vehicle
counters. The color of the movement class
icon (printed behind a vehicle’s movement
point rating on the counter’s upper right
hand corner) indicates the type of vehicle.
3.5.51 Gray —Armored Fighting Vehicles
(AFV), a vehicle type that includes Tanks,
self-propelled guns (SPGs), and armored
3.5.102 FFE —Fire For Effect, represents Segments that are further divided into
cars (wheeled vehicles with gray movement
the delivery of an artillery payload on the Phases. It is possible that nothing happens
icons). All AFVs have their own AFV Cards
battlefield; attacks units IN and adjacent to in a segment or phase. In that case simply
(note that most ATS games include bonus
the FFE counter (with a wider or longer at- skip it. For instance: if there is no air sup-
AFV counters included for future expan-
tack radius possible in some instances, e.g., port in a scenario, players skip that portion
sions, without their own AFV Cards).
Barrage; Line Barrage and only one hex for of the Indirect Fire Segment.
3.5.52 Yellow —Armored Personnel Carri-
On Board units). 4.1.1 Impulses
ers (APC), a vehicle type that includes half-
3.5.103 Barrage Limit —These markers During the Indirect Fire Segment, Fire &
tracks and Carriers. ALL APCs have an Ar-
show the extent of an artillery barrage. Movement Segment, and Close Assault Seg-
mor Factor (AF) of ‘0’ (zero) at all facings.
3.5.104 Counter Battery and Neutralized— ment, players ALTERNATE committing their
3.5.53 White—Soft-skinned transport such
These markers are not placed on the map; units to action. Each act of firing and/or
as trucks, Jeeps and staff cars. This ve-
they are used on the Off-Board Counter moving is called an ‘impulse’, and usually
hicle type is referred to as truck type ve-
Battery Matrix on Play Aid 2. consists of firing or moving one unit at a
hicles, and ‘armed trucks’ if armed. All Truck
3.5.11 Markers time. In some cases, players may move or
type vehicles have an AF of ‘-1’ (negative
Markers use mostly 1/2" counters, and fire more than one unit while using ONE
one) at all facings (although they are not tech-
record game functions and unit status. impulse (e.g., Firegroups; Platoons). Addi-
nically ‘armored’ vehicles).
These include: Suppressed, Fire For Effect tionally, certain rules (e.g., Assault fire) also
3.5.54 Open-Topped Vehicles—Some AFVs
(FFE), Collateral Fire, Movement, Wrecks, offer the possibility of firing AND moving in
and APCs lack a fully enclosed compartment
Burning Wrecks, Wire, Turret, Winded, and ONE impulse.
for the crew. These are ‘Open-Topped’ (OT)
Courage (shown by various medals, e.g., 4.1.2 Pass
vehicles, and have a white outline surround-
Iron Cross; Silver Star). A player may CHOOSE to Pass instead of
ing the vehicle art on the counter (e.g., Ger-
3.5.12 Emplacement using an impulse; play then passes from
man Sd 250-1 half-track). Truck type ve-
Emplacements use both 3/4" and 1/2" that player to the opponent. After the oppo-
hicles are not classified as OT for game
counters, and include Mines, Weapons Pits, nent executes an impulse or passes, play
purposes.
Bunkers, AT Trenches, Sangars, Cave Dug- comes back to the previous player who may
3.5.6 Movement Class
outs and Hedgehogs. now either execute another impulse with a
There are three movement classes for ve-
3.6 AFV CARDS unit or pass again. There is no limit to the
hicles, indicated by the SHAPE of the gray,
Each AFV used in a scenario in a particular number of times a player may pass, but if
yellow or white movement icon.
game receives its own card that provides both players pass two times in a row the
a) Tracked Vehicle—Oval movement icon.
Armor Factors and other pertinent informa- Phase or Segment ends immediately. A
b) Half-Tracked—Small oval plus small circle
tion. Trucks and APCs are all considered to player MUST pass if there are no more units
movement icon.
have ‘armor factors’ of ‘-1’ and ‘0’ (respec- that can perform any impulse activities.
c) Wheeled —Two large circles movement
tively) for game purposes and do not re- 4.1.3 Turn End
icon.
quire cards. Once play reaches the End of Turn Seg-
3.5.7 Target Size HPT DRM
3.7 FATE ment, one complete game turn is over.
Some vehicles and Heavy weapons receive
Ten-sided ‘percentile’ dice are used to rep- 4.1.4 Game End
a Target Size modifier on the Hit Probability
resent fate. When one die is used, a ‘1’ is A game ends as soon as one side or the
Table (HPT), including tables A2 and A3.
the lowest roll and a roll of ‘0’ is read as other achieves its Victory Conditions OR at
Target size modifiers are NEVER used as
ten. When two dice are rolled together to the end of the last turn of a scenario (as
column shifts on the Casualty Table. A color
obtain a value ranging from 1-100, the dark printed on the Scenario Card).
circle behind the unit ID letter/# on a ve-
colored die is used as the tens die and the 4.1.5 Speed of Play and Tactical Advan-
hicle/H weapon counter indicates the size
lighter die as the ones die. A black ‘7’ and a tage
modifier as follows:
white ‘2’ is read as ‘72’. Read a roll of ‘00’ as ATS games should be played ‘hard and fast’,
a) Black ID—Large target: -1 HPT DRM;
‘100’. with tactics determining more of the out-
b) White ID—Small target: +1 HPT DRM;
3.7.1 Rounding come than luck. When moving a unit(s), al-
c) Red ID—Very Small target: +2 HPT DRM.
Unless stated otherwise, round ALL frac- low your opponent a moment to decide if he
3.5.8 Turrets and 360 traverse guns
tions DOWN. Round down the TOTAL of a wants to use Opportunity Fire against your
Some vehicles have turrets, while some guns
Firegroup, not each individual unit. unit(s) in its current hex (or location within
are capable of firing in all directions (360-
Example, 3.45 rounds down to 3 and 4.8 a hex). Once attacks are resolved and play
degrees). A circle around the Gun Size indi-
rounds down to 4. A Firegroup consisting of proceeds, the result stands—even if play-
cates that a weapon can fire 360-degrees.
three squads using Assault Move-
A solid circle denotes a ‘fast’ turret or gun
ment (which halves Gunfire Fac-
traverse. A dashed-line circle denotes a ‘slow’
tors) each with 7 GF, rounds down
turret or gun traverse.
to TEN.
3.5.9 Ammunition Limitations
3.7.2 Die Roll Modifiers
A colored square or circle behind the Gun
(DRM)/Column Shifts
size reminds players that these units face
Attacks are usually modified by
some limitations in the ammunition types
DRM or column shifts, depend-
they may fire. Always refer to the Gun &
ing on their resolution, in the
Mortar Ammo Table (Play Aid 5 for each
form of: [modifier +#/#L or -#/
nationality) and the AFV Card for each unit
#R]. DRM modify attacks using
for all of the types of ammunition each gun
the HPT by adding the DRM to
may fire (use of different types of ammuni-
the die roll; the modified roll
tion is described later).
must be less than or equal to the Typically, the first action taken when a player announces
a) Gray—High Explosive (HE);
Hit Probability Number (HPN) to he'll be using an impulse to fire at the enemy is a check of
b) Gold—HE and Smoke;
obtain a hit. Column shifts the Line-of-Sight to the target hex. A straight edge is simu-
c) White—Armor Piercing (AP);
modify attacks using the Casu- lated by the dashed line above and it should be noted the
d) Yellow—Armor Piercing Composite Rigid
alty Table by shifting the speci- LOS touches Crops in hex QQ6 and RR5 before arriving
(APCR);
fied number of columns to the in hex SS6. A check of the Play Aid 7, the TERRAIN
e) Red—Flamethrower;
Left or Right. CHART, indicates Crops are 'Obscuring' terrain, but no
f) Purple—Smoke ONLY.
cover benefit is obtained for stationary units IN a Crops
3.5.10 Artillery markers
hex. However, EACH Crops hex ALONG an LOS (i.e., we
Artillery markers depict off-map actions as 4.0 SEQUENCE OF PLAY
4.1 OVERVIEW
do not count the target hex when considering hexes along
well as rounds exploding on the battlefield
ATS is played in turns. Each turn
an LOS, only the hexes BETWEEN target and firing unit)
(see 12.12 and 12.13).
represents about 90 seconds of
creates a ONE column shift LEFT on the Casualty Table.
3.5.101 CFF —A Call For Fire marker is
elapsed time and follows a strict
A 1L shift provides a +1 HPT DRM if a gun is being fired,
placed in the target hex on the map when
the owning player calls for off-map artillery. order of play, consisting of four
but NEVER a shift AND a DRM.

5
ers subsequently decide they inadvertently
made a mistake in a previous attack. Play
cannot be ‘backed up’ or ‘reversed’ if an error
is discovered to have occurred in an earlier
part of the game. C’est la guerre… Fire (12.8).
4.2 INITIATIVE
To determine which side has the Initiative,
each player rolls a die at the beginning of
each of the following Segments: Indirect Fire
Segment; Fire & Movement Segment; and
Close Assault Segment.
4.2.1 Initiative Choices
The player rolling lowest receives the ‘Ini-
tiative’. Re-roll any ties. The player with the
Initiative chooses to go first or second. Play-
ers then alternate using impulses (firing,
moving, etc.) until the end of the Segment
or phase.
4.3 ELIGIBILITY
To participate in a certain activity in a game
turn, a unit must be ELIGIBLE for that ac-
tivity by meeting all criteria outlined in the
rules. Unless stated otherwise, Broken and
Surrendered units are never considered ‘eli-
gible’ to make an attack or serve as a Spot-
ter/FO.
4.3.1 During any Segment or Phase both
players may perform actions with all, some,
or none of their eligible units. Players are
never required to commit all their units.
4.4 THE FULL TURN
This section summarizes the sequence of
play of a full ATS game turn. More detailed
descriptions of the various activities and
terminology can be found in the sections
listed. One full game turn consists of four
Segments, to be resolved in the following
game turn order:
1. Indirect Fire Segment;
2. Fire & Movement Segment;
3. Close Assault Segment;
4. End of Turn Segment.
Each of the Segments consists of one or
more Phases and/or actions, as listed in
the following sections.
4.4.1 INDIRECT FIRE SEGMENT
A. Roll for Initiative (4.2).
B. Players alternately use impulses (4.1.1)
in the following order:
1. On-board guns fire Smoke (6.4.3); Mor-
tars and Personnel place Flares (6.9.5). Note
that Personnel may NOT place smoke gre-
nades (this is part of the Fire & Movement
Segment).
2. Aircraft Attacks (12.16.3);
3. On Board Spotted Fire and Off-map In-
direct Fire (12.12);
4. Counter -Battery Fire (12.13).
Finish all fire of each step before beginning
the next one. Place an ‘F’ marker on units
that fire, unless hidden (6.8) or off-map.
4.4.11 One Unit at a time—The use of an
Indirect Fire impulse ALWAYS represents
the fire of ONE unit at a time. There are no
Platoon firing or Firegroup opportunities
when using Indirect Fire.
4.4.2 FIRE & MOVEMENT SEGMENT
A. Roll for Initiative (4.2)
B. FIRE & MOVEMENT PHASE—Players
alternately use impulses (4.1.1) to fire and/
or move some, none, or all of their eligible
Personnel, guns and vehicles, in any order.
The following actions are possible, to be
performed in any desired order:
a) Direct Fire (12.5) and non Spotter on map
Mortar Fire (12.11);
b) Assault movement (11.3.12) and Assault
Fire (12.8);
c) Cross-Country Movement (vehicles,
11.4.1);
d) Running movement (11.3.13);
e) Crawling Movement (11.3.11) and Assault
C: Remove all ‘C’ Collateral Fire Markers
(12.5.10).
4.4.21 Eligible units—Only eligible units
may fire and/or move. Eligible units include
those that have not already moved (marked
with a movement ‘arrow’ marker) or fired
their entire Rate of Fire (ROF, 12.6.2)
(marked with an ‘F’ marker). Units using
Continued Movement (still marked with a
movement marker from a previous turn, see
11.4.5) may move, but may not use Direct
or Opportunity Fire (they may use Assault
Fire if using Assault movement).
4.4.22 Marking used units—To keep track
of units that have already fired and/or
moved, place an ‘F’ marker on top of units
that fire and a movement marker on or be-
hind those that move.
4.4.23 Multiple unit actions—The use of
a direct fire and/or movement impulse can
involve MORE THAN ONE unit at the same
time, by using Firegroups (12.5.4) or Pla-
toon Movement (11.3.2).
4.4.24 Multiple Firing Units—Multiple ROF
weapons may ‘save’ remaining ROF for use
later in the same Fire & Movement Segment
(using Direct Fire, Opportunity Fire or Gun
Duels).
4.4.25 Smoke Grenades —Squads may
place Smoke Grenades (6.4.7) while in the
act of using a movement impulse.
4.4.26 Enemy activity—Enemy units may
(under defined circumstances) use Oppor -
tunity Fire (see 4.5 and 12.7) and initiate
Gun Duels (4.6 and 12.9). Opportunity Fire
and Gun Duels do NOT require the use of
an impulse.
4.4.3 CLOSE ASSAULT SEGMENT
A. Initiative Roll (4.2)
B. INFILTRATION PHASE— Players alter -
nately use impulses (4.1.1) to perform the
following actions:
a) Grenade Attacks (12.15.2) OR
b) Infiltration (12.15.1)
Infiltration refers to the act of entering an
adjacent hex or location, including those
occupied by enemy Personnel units. All non-
Broken Personnel units, even those marked
with movement arrows and ‘F’ markers, may
use Infiltration. Personnel may also exit Full
Cover positions (e.g. under a Hedgehog, see
12.5.66) using Infiltration. Vehicles never
use Infiltration, although Passengers can
use a limited form of it (11.5.5). If units
from both sides are in the same location,
‘Melee’ takes place in the next phase of this
Segment.
C. MELEE PHASE — Players resolve Melee
in all hex locations containing units from
both sides (see 12.15.3 for Melee versus
Personnel, 12.15.4 for Melee versus Ve-
hicles).
4.4.31 One action per unit—Both players
are free to choose which of their units act
in the Infiltration Phase, and in what order.
Each acting unit is, however, restricted to
only ONE action, EITHER a Grenade Attack
OR Infiltration.
4.4.4 END OF TURN SEGMENT
A. Both players perform the following ac-
tions:
1. Remove Melee, Overrun (12.14), and
Cease Fire markers (12.16.83); Remove
6
movement arrows, Flares, ‘2’ Smoke and ‘F’
markers;
2. Check for Intimidation (10.2.3);
3. Decide whether to remove movement
arrows from vehicles (4.4.41);
4. Flip ‘1’ Smoke markers to ‘2’ side (6.4.6);
Spread Flame one building level UP (8.8);
5. Flip FFE markers to their CFF side
(12.12.2);
6. Flip eligible counters to the Fog of War
(FOW) side (6.7).
Any face-up unit with a yellow Fog of War
side on the back, such as an L|MG, may
be flipped back to its FOW side if it is in
terrain providing cover of at least ONE LEFT
SHIFT and out of LOS to all enemy units.
7. All other markers remain.
B. Both players perform the following Rally
actions:
1. Attempt to Rally Broken and Surrendered
Personnel units in the same location as a
leader (10.8);
2. Attempt to restore Surrendered units to
Broken status for all Surrendered units in
the Morale Support Range (10.2) of a friendly
non Broken/Surrendered Personnel unit (no
leader needs to be present) or a friendly
non K-, F- or M-KILLed AFV, APC, or armed
truck;
3. Roll to remove Suppressed markers
(12.5.176).
C. Move the Game Turn marker to the next
box on the scenario card’s Turn Record
Track.
4.4.41 Continued Movement—Players may
choose to keep movement arrows on VE-
HICLES in step A3. Such vehicles will con-
tinue to be marked as moving at the start of
the next Fire & Movement Segment, which
makes the vehicle harder to hit. A non-mov-
ing vehicle may NOT BEGIN moving during
the End of Turn Segment, i.e., only already
moving vehicles may use continued move-
ment.
4.5 OPPORTUNITY FIRE—During the Fire
& Movement Segment, the non-moving
player may fire upon the opposing player’s
moving units using ‘Opportunity Fire’. Op-
portunity Fire does not require the use of
an impulse; once the non-moving player
completes all desired Opportunity Fire at-
tacks, the moving player continues the
movement impulse with any surviving units.
The non-moving player receives use of the
next impulse as usual.
4.5.1 Mark all units that use Opportunity
Fire with an ‘F’ marker. Units not otherwise
eligible to fire, may not use Opportunity Fire.
4.5.2 The outcome of an Opportunity Fire
attack is applied immediately to the target.
The firing player may then choose to use
additional Opportunity Fire attacks against
the same target (during that same moment
of ‘suspended play’ when the target unit
moved or conducted the activity [e.g., turned
a turret] that ‘triggered’ the Opportunity
Fire). Example: A squad carrying a L|MG
could use only the machine-gun, wait for
the outcome, and then choose to make a
separate additional shot with its own printed
Gunfire Factors or save its own GF (OR
combine both in one shot).
4.5.3 Each individual opportunity firing unit
may fire only ONE Opportunity Fire shot
per MP spent by the targeted unit in the
targeted location (MP spent in previous lo-
cations in this impulse are not counted).
However, there is NO limit to the number of
separate units that can use Opportunity Fire
against the same target following the expen-
diture of a specific Opportunity Fire ‘trig-
ger’ like movement. This includes the use
of Firegroups.
4.6 GUN DUELS —Under special circum-
stances (see 12.9.1) the non-impulse player
may also return fire with gun-armed vehicles
and H weapons using a ‘Gun Duel’. Return-
ing fire via a Gun Duel does not require the
use of an impulse. Once it is completed,
the non-firing player receives use of the next
impulse as usual. A Gun Duel may also be
used by a firing player to assert his ‘right’
to fire prior to any Opportunity Fire taking
place. Full rules for Gun Duels can be found
in 12.9.
4.7 OPTIONAL RULES
Players may wish to experience additional
uncertainty and excitement during play by
using optional rules. The Optional Rules
Appendix (Appendix C) provides rules for
Variable Impulses, optional sequence of play
and more.
5.0 STACKING
5.1 Overview—Stacking refers to the maxi-
mum number of Personnel units and/or the
maximum number of vehicles and heavy
weapons allowed in any one LOCATION
within a hex (as defined in 3.1.13; e.g., the
top floor of a multi-story building) before
OVERSTACKING occurs.
5.1.1 Having more than the maximum num-
ber of units in a location is called
Overstacking. Overstacking is not forbid-
den, but results in penalties (see 5.4). A
unit may enter a hex location in excess of
stacking limits but penalties for overstacking
apply if units in the location are fired upon
or a spotting attempt is made against units
in the location.
5.1.2 Limits—Stacking always applies to
each location separately. Stacking limits
refer to each side, not the total of the two
sides (e.g., during infiltration and melee).
5.2 VEHICLES AND HEAVY WEAPONS
5.2.1 The stacking limit for vehicular units
and Heavy weapons is ONE of each type
per location—two or more of one type vio-
lates this limit except for a vehicle towing
another vehicle. One vehicle plus one Heavy
weapon does not create overstacking in a
hex; two vehicles or two Heavy weapons
does. The presence of vehicular units and
Heavy weapons does not affect Personnel
unit stacking in any manner or vice-versa.
Wrecks and F-KILLed H weapons count as
ONE of each type for the purposes of stack-
ing-based entry costs ONLY.
5.3 PERSONNEL UNITS
5.3.1 The stacking limit is TWELVE Stack-
ing Points (SP) of Personnel in a location
(Exception: A handful of terrain types specify
lower limits for specific hex locations [e.g.,
Steeples] and stacking vs. OBA is dealt with
as per 5.3.11 and 12.11.24). The number
of figures depicted on a counter determines
its Stacking Points value.
a) A full size squad numbers 3 figures—3
SP;
b) Reduced squad—2 SP;
c) Crews—2 SP (exception: crews manning
H weapons do not count toward stacking);
d) Leaders, BAR gunners, Commissars and
Forward Observers—1 SP.
5.3.11 Versus OBA—In any location exceed-
ing TWELVE Stacking Points of Personnel,
the target location is penalized in the form
of an additional roll on the Casualty Table
in any hex attacked by an FFE (see
12.11.24).
5.3.2 Exceptions
5.3.21 The following units never count when
computing stacking limits: Passengers,
crews manning H weapons (i.e., crews are
counted if not manning a weapon or if their
weapon is eliminated or F-KILLed); L and
M weapons; aircraft; towed weapons (and
towed vehicles); and markers.
5.3.22 Emplacement counters do not affect
stacking. However, units stacked under and
on top of emplacement counters and in Lin-
ear Depression hexes are totaled for stack-
ing purposes in a location, noting that some
Emplacement types have their own stack-
ing limits (e.g., Blockhouse).
5.4 OVERSTACKING PENALTIES
5.4.11 In any location that is overstacked
(by any quantity) double the usual entry cost
for all units of the overstacked unit type. A
location is considered overstacked the mo-
ment a unit in excess of stacking enters,
e.g., upon entry of a second vehicle into a
hex containing one already or when any other
Personnel unit enters a hex already con-
taining 12 SP of Personnel.
5.4.12 Spotting and OBA: Overstacked lo-
cations are easier to spot as defined in the
Spotting Range rules (see 6.3.4). See
12.11.24 for OBA attacks.
5.4.13 Vehicle/H Weapon Specific Penal-
ties—In overstacked locations apply a HPT
DRM of –1 PER vehicle or H weapon IN
EXCESS OF ONE per type against
overstacked vehicles and/or H weapons.
Wrecks/F-KILLed H weapons NEVER
cause overstacking for TARGET purposes
(i.e., they only provide movement penalties
for overstacking).
5.4.14 Personnel Specific Penalties—For
all attacks that utilize the Casualty Table,
apply a -1R shift (only, no HPT DRM is
applied) per additional 3 SP of overstacked
Personnel (or fraction thereof) in a location.
6.0 LINE OF SIGHT AND FIRE
6.1 TERRAIN/TOPOGRAPHY
6.1.1 Visualization —Landforms and the
terrain forms that sit upon them are repre-
sented like a stack of pancakes. The battle-
field has a ‘sea level’, or floor, known as
‘Level 0’ in game terms. Stacked on this are
found levels, easily visualized as one, two
or more pancakes stacked on the floor. A
person standing on a stack of two pancakes
can see over a one pancake-high obstacle
to his Line-of-Sight (LOS). A person stand-
ing on one pancake cannot see past a stack
of two or more pancakes along his LOS.
Some of these ‘pancakes’ may have Wadis,
Ravines, Creeks, Rivers and Sunken Roads
that cut into them.
6.2 TOPOGRAPHY AND LINE-OF-SIGHT
6.2.1 Line-of-Sight—A straight line drawn
between the center -dot of the firing unit’s
hex and that of the target hex represents a
Line-of-Sight (LOS). Use a thread or a
straight-edge touching the center -dot of both
hexes to trace LOS. Depending on the ter-
rain and other ‘obstacles’ along this line, LOS
may be BLOCKED or OBSCURED. When
Spotting Range rules are in play, it IS pos-
sible for a unit to have a LOS to another but
7
be unable to fire at it due to the desired
target being beyond Spotting Range.
6.2.11 With a few exceptions, terrain in the
firing and target hexes does not block LOS—
only terrain in intervening hexes, along the
LOS. If the LOS to a hex is blocked, no
direct or Indirect Fire may be fired into it
(with the exception of spotted fire, a unit
spotting for another unit, such as an FO
spotting for Indirect Fire).
6.2.12 Obscuring Terrain—Some interven-
ing terrain types as well as Smoke and Dust,
do not completely hide the target from view,
but obscure visibility. Although firing at an
obscured target is allowed, penalties do
apply (see 6.4.5 for Smoke and Dust; and
7.1 for Obscuring terrain; 6.2.64 for LOS
blocked by Obscuring terrain). In some cir-
cumstances obscuring may be so severe,
that the LOS is obstructed (see 6.2.64) and
no firing at the target is allowed. Note that
LOS is also obscured by Smoke and Dust
in the firing and/or target hex (not just the
intervening hexes). When firing along a
hexside with Obscuring terrain on BOTH
sides, only ONE +1/1L is applied.
6.2.12 Orchard Variance—Orchards are
considered Obscuring terrain for SAME
LEVEL/CONTINUOUS SLOPE LOSs only
and otherwise create Blind Hexes in the
same manner as Blocking Terrain.
6.2.2 Reciprocity—LOS is reciprocal even
if the unit being spotted is ‘only’ a leader or
FO. If a firing unit can see a target, then
the target can also trace a Line of Sight to
the firing unit, including units spotting for
artillery (e.g., FO). Unlike LOS, reciprocity
does not apply to spotting range.
6.2.3 Exact LOS—A hex containing block-
ing or obscuring terrain only affects LOS if
the thread or straight edge touches any part
of the terrain depiction or contour artwork.
AFVs, APCs, and wrecks (further described
in 6.2.7) as well as smoke (6.4) and Dust
(6.5.2) affect any LOS drawn into or through
their hex, including a LOS that runs exactly
along one of its hexsides.
6.2.4 Adding Heights—Some hexes contain
a combination of land and terrain forms,
such as Buildings, Hillocks, and Woods. The
height of any terrain form is added to the
hex’s terrain level. Height is always mea-
sured in levels.
Example: A building that is +10 levels high,
sitting on a Level 0 hex, produces an overall
obstacle to LOS drawn through its hex of +10
levels if a LOS thread hits the building art.
Otherwise, the terrain is only Level 0 for LOS
purposes.
6.2.5 Unit Location—Treat a unit in a hex
containing more than one NON BUILDING
level as at the level of the center dot in the
This example illustrates the difference be-
tween a “hexside” and a “hexspine”. Most
references in the rules refer to hexsides,
the name for the six sides that are found
around each hexagon.
 The CHI HA tank may move in
REVERSE into either of the rear The M18 AFV may move FOR-
two hexes in its rear VCA. Using WARD into either of the front two
reverse movement costs hexes in its VCA. It must pivot
DOUBLE the normal MP cost to to enter other hexes outside its
enter a hex. If this was a TRUCK VCA.
type vehicle, the cost would be 1.5
x the normal MP.

hex. Units in BUILDINGS may be at the
‘ground level’ (same level as the hex the
building sits ON), or in higher levels, de-
pending on the existence of additional lev-
els (or ‘stories’ a.k.a. ‘floors’) in a building.
6.2.6 Higher Level Obstacle Along LOS—
In situations where the firing unit and its
target are on the SAME level, any BLOCK-
ING terrain at least +5 levels higher along
the LOS blocks it.
6.2.61 Blind Hexes—Blocking terrain (e.g.,
Woods) and land forms (e.g., Hills) higher
than the target location and along an LOS
may create ‘blind hexes’, one or more hexes
NON BURNING WRECKS in the same man-
ner for LOS and for the purpose of entering
a hex containing a wreck/vehicle. These rise
+5 levels in height and affect any same-level
LOS (or LOS along a continuous downward
or upward slope) traced into or through their
hex (including directly along their hexside),
whether they have moved or not. They af-
fect LOS by adding a +1/1L per vehicle/
wreck through which an LOS passes OR
enters. Wreck/vehicle cover is not cumula-
tive with terrain in a hex. Vehicles and
wrecks never create blind hexes (see 6.4.5)
and do not incur additional entry costs un-
using only Moved status and Terrain related
cover states: Moved|Running|Assault; Sta-
tionary (includes Crawling units); Good;
Improved; and Full. If more than one state
of a target applies, use the highest (easiest
to spot) Spotting Range available. A unit is
only considered Moved if marked with a
Moved marker;
4) Find the column under that cover state
for the target’s unit type;
5) Cross-reference to find the maximum
Spotting Range for that unit. No unit may
be spotted beyond the listed range;
Example: A Stationary squad in the open

directly beyond the obstacle. They lie in the less Overstacking occurs. Burning wrecks being spotted by a Suppressed tank in Hazy

‘shadow’ of a terrain form (e.g., building; produce smoke and cost 1 + (2 x CoT) to conditions would have to be 4 or fewer hexes

woods). LOS to a unit in a blind hex is enter. away from the tank to be Spotted. If the

blocked. Only terrain and/or land forms (or 6.3 SPOTTING squad had fired (and thus was marked with

a combination of them) that rise +10 levels 6.3.1 Spotting determines whether a unit an ‘F’ marker), the Spotting Range is unlim-

or higher than the target unit (compared to can actually ‘see’ another unit in its Line of ited.

the height of the firing unit) create blind
hexes. Level +5 terrain (e.g., Rubble; Wall;
Hedge) and land forms NEVER create blind
hexes, they only block LOS along same
level/continuous slope LOSs.
6.2.62 LOS Blind Hex Creation Table—
Consult the LOS Blind Hex Creation Table
to determine the number of Blind Hexes
created. The axis on the left, labeled
‘HEIGHT DIFF’ represents the elevation dif-
ference between the higher unit and the
intervening blocking terrain. This difference
must be at least +10 in levels in order for a
line of sight to exist over intervening terrain
or land forms that are +10 levels in height
or greater (Exception: See 6.2.621 for the
effects of +5 Level Hillock terrain). The hori-
zontal axis represents the range in hexes
from the firing unit to the intervening ter-
rain. Cross indexing these two values re-
sults in a number that represents the num-
ber of blind hexes behind the intervening
Sight. Use Spotting for all scenarios in Ad-
vanced Tobruk and its expansion modules
set in desert terrain. While Spotting Condi-
tions are provided in non-desert ATS sce-
narios, this rule is OPTIONAL for all non-
desert scenarios unless Night or Fog Spot-
ting Conditions are used. When not using
this rule, the ability to fire is determined by
the ability to ‘see’ a target unit, based only
on whether a LOS exists. Any scenario that
does not state Spotting Conditions by SSR
is assumed to have ‘Optimal’ Spotting Con-
ditions.
6.3.2 A Spotting Ranges Table (Play Aid #6)
is included with the game. It indicates how
many hexes one unit may be from another
and still see or ‘spot’ that unit, depending
on the actual battlefield conditions.
6.3.3 Observation Limits—No unit may be
fired on unless it is within LOS (and Spot-
ting Range if in use). Units marked as Fired
may be spotted to an unlimited range if
6.3.41 Exceptions— Apply the following:
Unlimited Spotting Range to any target units
marked as Fired or marked with a BOT
marker (except for smoke). Treat an
OVERSTACKED location as if all units are
moving. Add any applicable Height Advan-
tage the firing unit has over the target unit(s).
When firing at buildings as targets instead
of the units inside, firing Smoke, or using
Indirect Fire, use the “B-SM-I’ column for
the current Spotting Conditions indicated
(see 6.3.5).
6.3.5 Height Advantage—A unit at a higher
level than Level ‘0’ adds any level differ -
ence between the spotter and target to its
Spotting Range unless the Spotting Condi-
tions are NIGHT/KHAMSIN/FOG. A unit
that adds to its Spotting Range with height
advantage may also be spotted at the in-
creased range. Also note that for spotting
purposes levels are relative.
Example, a unit in a +20 hex has a +10 height

terrain. LOS is blocked if the lower unit is within LOS. A target marked with a BOT advantage over a unit on a +10 hex.

within this range of hexes.
6.2.621 Level +5 Terrain—Being in the UP
location of a FULL or PAR TIAL Hillock pro-
vides an LOS over +5 level terrain (e.g.,
Walls; Hedges; Crops). Level +5 Blocking
and Obscuring terrain NEVER create blind
hexes to units at a higher level (Exception:
8+ shifts/HPT DRM along a same level/con-
tinuous slope). They only block LOS along
the SAME level.
6.2.63 Tracing LOS—Blind hexes are cre-
ated along the LOS, starting in the hex di-
rectly behind the terrain form, and continu-
ing toward the lower unit UNLESS the Blind
Hex is created by a HILL contour of the
‘same hill’, which reduces blind hexes by
one (see 8.13.21).
6.2.64 Obstructed LOS Due to Obscuring
Terrain —If HPT DRM/LEFT shifts are
EIGHT or greater (including the firing and
target hex for smoke/Dust but Obscuring
terrain BETWEEN only), LOS is blocked.
6.2.7 Vehicles and Wrecks
6.2.71 Treat AFVs and APCs (ONLY) and
marker may also be spotted to an unlimited
range by the firing unit that placed the BOT
marker. Spotting Ranges are not automati-
cally reciprocal.
6.3.31 Aircraft Limits—An LOS (and the
ability to spot) always exists to and from
aircraft noting the Line-of-Sight exceptions
listed in the rules for Aircraft Attacks.
6.3.4 Using the Spotting Ranges Table
1) Match the condition in the left column:
Optimal; Average; Hazy; Night | Khamsin |
Fog—with that listed in that scenario’s SSR.
Use Optimal for any scenario that does not
list Spotting conditions by SSR; all fire at
buildings as targets, using smoke and ALL
Indirect Fire uses the B|SM|I column (as
does any unit spotting for Indirect Fire/
mortars);
2) Find the Status column—use the ‘SUP |
FOW’ row for firing units that are Sup-
pressed or for VEHICLE and H E AVY
WEAPON (ONLY; NOT L OR M) TARGET
units that are Fog of War side up;
3) Check the cover state of the Target Unit
6.4 SMOKE
Smoke is produced by burning wrecks, ter-
rain, smoke shells fired indirectly by on-
map guns and mortars or off-map artillery,
and from Smoke Grenades.
6.4.1 Spotting—When firing smoke use the
‘B-SM-I’ column on the Spotting Range Table
to find the maximum range. Ignore the cover
state of the target unit(s) in this case.
6.4.2 Target hexes—Smoke shells, unlike
HE Indirect Fire, may be fired into hexes
occupied by friendly units. Smoke may also
be fired into empty hexes.
6.4.3 On-map units —Fire Smoke shells
indirectly during the Indirect Fire Segment
using the HPT in exactly the same manner
as HE rounds, except they are fired at hexes
instead of individual target units and receive
a -2 HPT DRM. LOS may be traced to the
highest terrain height of a hex and still al-
low smoke to be fired into it, noting any
smoke ‘hits’ are considered to land at the
ground level of the hex. A miss does not
place a smoke counter. A BOT is not placed

8
when firing smoke ammunition, but any
existing BOT DRM is used for the firing unit
attempting to land a smoke round in a hex.
On-map units may fire smoke into ONE hex
per phase, but may use their full ROF at-
tempting to place one or more smoke
counter(s) in one hex.
6.4.4 Off-map Ammunition—All Off-Board
Artillery (OBA) batteries may fire smoke
ammunition unless restricted from doing so
by SSR. Each off-map battery may place
smoke into as many hexes as its FFE would
affect (e.g., a Concentration may place smoke
in its FFE hex and six adjacent hexes; Bar-
rages may place smoke in every FFE hex of
a Barrage).
6.4.5 Smoke Effects— Smoke and Dust rise
to Level +30 above the ground level of their
hex (or the highest level a building rises to
above ground level when burning). Smoke
markers (including smoke created by Burn-
ing wreck and Flame counters) create a +4/
4L modifier. Each smoke-producing counter
along an LOS is counted, including the fir-
ing and target hex. Smoke and dust effects
are added to any terrain found in their hex
as an additional HPT DRM.
6.4.51 Entry—Note any amount of smoke
adds ‘1’ to the normal cost of terrain (1 +
CoT) for units entering it.
6.4.6 Smoke Duration
6.4.61 Smoke fired from off-map batteries
lasts for TWO turns. When fired by these,
a smoke counter is placed face-up in the
target hex displaying its ‘1’ side. Smoke
fired/placed by on-map units lasts for ONE
turn. When fired by these, place a smoke
counter in the target hex with the ‘2,’ side
up.
6.4.62 Removal—During the End of Turn
Segment, remove all smoke counters dis-
playing a ‘2’ from the map. All smoke
counters on the map displaying their ‘1’ side
are flipped to display the ‘2’ on the back.
6.4.7 Smoke Grenades
6.4.71 Usage—Any SQUAD (including re-
duced) may place ONE Smoke Grenade in
its own or an adjacent hex during a move-
ment impulse at the cost of ONE additional
Movement Point (or while in the act of crawl-
ing). When placement is announced before
a unit moves from its current hex/location,
it is still considered an Opportunity Fire trig-
ger. The smoke counter may be placed be-
fore a unit moves or while in the act of mov-
ing and Opportunity Fire takes place AF-
TER the unit places a smoke grenade once
the owning player announces a MP expen-
diture for this purpose.
6.4.72 Availability—American and British
(and Engineers) OOBs receive ONE Smoke
grenade per SIX Stacking Points of SQUAD/
REDUCED SQUAD Personnel in their OOB
(including reinforcements). German, French,
and Italian OOBs receive one grenade for
every NINE SP. Other OOBs receive Smoke
grenades only by SSR. Smoke grenades do
not have to be assigned to specific units,
they may be used freely.
6.4.73 Placement —Smoke grenades are
placed in the ground level of the target hex.
6.4.8 White Phosphorus (WP) Smoke
Shells and Grenades
6.4.81 Scenario SSR may provide a certain
number of ‘White Phosphorus’ grenades
and/or WP Smoke ammunition. WP ammu-
nition is ONLY available for weapons speci-
fied on the GUN & MORTAR AMMO TABLE
(GM) for each nationality. WP grenades may
be used ONLY by SSR. WP Grenades func-
tion in the same manner as normal Smoke
Grenades with the following exceptions.
6.4.82 Check Morale—Any unit in a hex
location where White Phosphorus smoke is
placed in must immediately perform a mo-
rale check.
6.4.83 Flame —When White Phosphorous
smoke is placed, make a separate die roll
in any terrain eligible for the placement of a
Flame marker. On a die roll of ‘1’, place a
Flame marker in the ground level of the hex.
6.4.9 AFV and Armed APC Smoke Candles
6.4.91 AFVs and APCs carry smoke candles
for self-defense.
6.4.92 Usage—Each AFV/APC may place
one smoke counter in its hex upon the ex-
penditure of a Movement Point, even if F-
KILLed. Smoke Candles may only be used
once during a scenario (they are considered
to be automatically replenished between
campaign game scenarios). Place a smoke
counter with its ‘2’ side up in the vehicle’s
hex.
6.5 WEATHER AND AEROSOLS
6.5.1 Overview
Aerosols are airborne factors such as haze,
dust and heat shimmer that affect the abil-
ity of men to observe on the battlefield. These
are used in addition to the use of the Spot-
ting Table to depict weather such as intense
dust storms, or ‘Khamsin’, that occasion-
ally take place.
6.5.2 Dust
6.5.21 Vehicles moving across the dry and
dusty battlefields of North Africa and the
Russian Steppe raised plumes of dust be-
hind them that caused severe visibility prob-
lems. Dust is only used in a scenario when
provided by SSR.
6.5.22 Vehicles create Dust ONLY when
using cross-country movement to enter
Open Ground and Scrub hexes. Place a
Moved arrow behind the vehicle in the hex
it just exited to represent Dust and ‘follow’
the vehicle with the marker, always keep-
ing it directly behind.
6.5.23 Road and Track—Vehicles moving
along a road do not raise dust. Dust IS
raised in track hexes.
6.5.24 Removal —Dust markers are re-
moved during the End of Turn Segment
unless a vehicle Continued Movement be-
tween turns.
6.5.25 Dust obscures LOS in the same
manner as Smoke.
6.5.26 FFE/Aircraft Bombs Hindrance and
Dust—All hexes of an FFE are treated as
+1/1L Obscuring terrain. If Dust is speci-
fied by SSR, Dust is created in every hex
affected by an FFE AND/OR aircraft bomb.
Place a Smoke counter in such hexes with
its ‘2’ side facing up. The dust created by
an FFE is ignored for the purposes of main-
taining an LOS to the already-placed FFE
that created the dust.
6.5.3 Sun Glare
6.5.31 The difficulty of looking east, i.e.,
into the rising sun during the morning, or
west, into the setting sun, is represented
by a fire modifier to re-create this effect.
Sun Glare is only used in a scenario by SSR.
6.5.32 When sun glare is in effect, any Line-
of-Sight that leaves the firing unit’s hex
through the two (or three, depending on the
map orientation for that scenario) hexsides
facing directly east or west receives a +2/
9
2L for fire using the Casualty Table only.
Whether sun glare is created by LOS facing
east or west will be stated by SSR. A +2
HPT DRM applies for all fire no matter the
range.
6.5.33 Sun glare creates no effect on OBA
FFE or aircraft fire.
6.5.4 Heat Shimmer or Haze
6.5.41 Heat shimmer is a form of aerosol
that hinders LOS dependent on range. Heat
shimmer is only used in a scenario by SSR
and may also be used to depict haze or fall-
ing rain effects.
6.5.42 When Heat Shimmer is in effect ap-
ply a +1/1L for each FRACTION of ten hexes
(fractions rounded UP) in range between fir-
ing unit and target.
Example, an LOS of 12 hexes would receive
a +2/2L for fire not using the HPT. At a range
of 21, a +3/3L applies; and so on.
6.5.5 Khamsins
6.5.51 Khamsins (desert dust storms) could,
and did, sweep across battlefields with blind-
ing suddenness. Khamsins are only used
in a scenario by SSR. When in use, the SSR
will specify when and what die roll is needed
for their implementation. A Khamsin has the
effect of reducing Spotting Conditions to
‘Khamsin’ for the remainder of the scenario.
6.6 LIMITED INTELLIGENCE
6.6.1 The following rules reflect the lack of
accurate detailed information a field com-
mander would have concerning enemy units
and defensive positions.
6.6.2 Full/Under—The opposing player may
never examine Personnel units UNDER an
emplacement (or marked with an FC marker)
unless it moves out of a Full cover position
or an opposing unit enters their hex loca-
tion.
6.6.3 The opposing player may also not look
at:
a) Any units under the top unit in a stack
unless those units are within Spotting Range
AND LOS and move or fire;
b) The other side of any counters currently
showing their FOW side UP.
6.7 FOG OF WAR
6.7.1 Vehicles and weapons have a yellow
blank or generic tank or gun icon known as
their ‘Fog of War’ (FOW) side that conceals
their identity. Players may set up all such
units with their FOW side up. Units that
enter from off-map also enter with their FOW
side up.
6.7.2 Removal–A unit flips from its FOW
side when it FIRES or MOVES within the
LOS (and Spotting Range if in use) of a non-
Suppressed/Broken/Surrendered enemy
unit. A unit does not lose FOW simply for
being within Spotting Range. Enemy aircraft
never benefit from their FOW side; this side
is simply provided if players wish to ran-
domly choose among different aircraft
counters during solitaire play.
6.7.21 Vehicle and H Weapon FOW DRM—
Any VEHICLE or HEAVY weapon (including
the crew of such a weapon) with its FOW
side up receives a +2 HPT DRM. There is
NO Casualty Table column shift for such
targets (e.g., when firing to attempt to Sup-
press a vehicle [presumably an AFV] show-
ing its FOW side up).
6.7.22 Night, Khamsin and Fog FOW Shift/
DRM—When Night|Khamsin|Fog Spotting
Conditions are in effect, ALL units receive
a +2/2L FOW modifier for ALL attacks (Ex-
ception: Units in/adjacent to Flare hexes
during Night Spotting Conditions).
6.7.3 Flip to FOW—During the End of Turn
Segment, face-up units may be flipped back
to their FOW side if the unit is (all three):
a) In any terrain that provides at least one
column shift LEFT for LOS traced into or
through it AND;
b) Not Surrendered or Broken; AND;
c) Out of LOS or Spotting Range of all non-
Suppressed/Broken/Surrendered enemy
units.
6.7.4 Light and Medium weapons—Light
and Medium weapon counters are flipped
c) A ‘C1’ or better result is obtained on the
Casualty Table against an ‘empty’ hex in any
manner. When firing at an EMPTY hex loca-
tion treat it as if a FOW unit is therein (i.e.,
apply +2 HPT DRM to any fire) AND HALVE
the GF (or FRAG Factors from any HPT hit).
When firing directly on the Casualty Table
all GF are halved.
6.8.4 Revealing Hidden Emplacements
Emplacements containing hidden units are
not placed on map until the units under or
on them are revealed. An emplacement may
set up hidden if only units eligible to be
If firing at a unit in the adjacent hex to an
Illumination Zone, night modifier (i.e., +2/
2L) still applies.
6.9.71 OBA Illumination Rounds—If ‘Illu-
mination Round’ ammunition is made avail-
able to an off-board battery by SSR all seven
hexes normally attacked by an FFE and ALL
adjacent hexes are considered a Flare hex
(19 hexes). All other OBA rules are applied
normally for illumination rounds. The Illu-
mination Zone thusly extends to each hex
adjacent to the outer ring of these 19 hexes.

to their FOW side only if their carrying Per-
sonnel units meet the above conditions. The
ONLY purpose of the FOW side of L/M
weapons is to conceal from the opponent
the exact weapon carried/set up (i.e., there
is no DRM).
6.7.5 Dummies—Some scenarios provide
dummy Heavy weapon and vehicle counters
that set up or enter from off-map. Vehicle
dummies ONLY may be moved as if they
are any vehicle–there is no limitation on their
Movement Points. A moving dummy vehicle
will be removed the moment it enters the
Spotting Range and LOS—or just LOS if not
using Spotting—of an enemy unit. Use any
extra 5/8” counter to provide a dummy crew
for Heavy weapons if they are placed on
map with their FOW side up. If a dummy
counter is forced to flip to its non-FOW side
(see 6.8.3) it is removed from play (along
with any dummy crew).
6.8 OPTIONAL HIDDEN SET UP
Hidden set up is OPTIONAL with the ex-
ception of units allowed to set up hidden by
SSR. See 6.8.5 for solitaire play when SSRs
specify units as setting up hidden. See the
‘Hide’ column of Table TC for terrain that
allows units within to set up hidden.
6.8.1 Heavy Weapons and FOs— Heavy
weapons and their manning crews and FOs
may set up hidden. Other units may only
set up hidden if allowed to do so by SSR.
Hidden set up may only be used in terrain
that allows such set up. Hidden units are
not set up on the map, (nor are the man-
ning crews/Personnel carrying hidden
weapons [and any leaders in the same stack
at the owning player’s option] OR any em-
placements the hidden unit(s) is set up in).
6.8.11 Terrain—ONLY non-hexside terrain
that provides at least a 1L shift for any LOS
traced into or through it, such as Brush,
may be used for Hidden set up. Exception:
Units that set up with a Bocage hexside
between them and ALL enemy units may
set up Hidden.
6.8.2 Set Up
Make a side note of hidden units, including
covered arc for any crew-served weapons
and vehicles (include turret-covered arc if
it differs from the vehicle-covered arc) and
any other unique parameters (e.g., FO in-
side a particular vehicle).
6.8.3 Revealing Hidden and Dummy H
weapons and Vehicles
Place Hidden units on map and remove
dummy weapons and vehicles for the fol-
lowing reasons:
a) Conducting any fire or movement action,
including changing vehicle or turret covered
arc if the hidden unit’s location is otherwise
within LOS and Spotting Range (if the latter
is in use);
b) An enemy unit attempts to enter their
location;
hidden are set up stacked on or under it
7.0 GENERAL TERRAIN RULES
(ON only applies for emplacements that pro-
vide cover of +1/1L or better for units on
7.1 Terrain Chart-This play aid provides
the following data about each terrain type:
top).
Terrain—The name of the terrain type.
6.8.5 Suggestions for Solitaire Play
6.8.51 For solitaire play, place all units on Type-A terrain type may be Clear, Obscur -
ing or Blocking. Terrain may affect LOS when
map but do not allow enemy units to fire
touching the terrain art, known as PAR TIAL
upon friendly units that would be Hidden
and considered the default type, or it may
until they fire or move.
affect the ENTIRE hex at ground level, in-
6.8.52 Random Placement—Players may
cluding hexsides, noted on the Terrain Chart
also wish to place weapons for the ‘enemy’
with a superscript ‘e’ to the ‘B’ or ‘O’ label.
in a cup and place them randomly during
a) Clear (C)—No effect on LOS;
set up with the FOW side up in order to
b) Obscuring (O)—LOS can go through but
conceal their identity. A dummy or two can
fire will be less effective. Apply a +1/1L
be added when using this approach to add
shift for every hex with obscuring terrain
flavor during solitaire gaming.
art touched along an LOS (noting the LOS
6.9 NIGHT RULES
must actually TOUCH the terrain art in some
6.9.1 Spotting—Spotting at night is slightly
cases, each noted in the rules for that ter-
different. Fired units are still spotted at any
rain type and on the Terrain Chart as ‘e’ for
range.
Obscuring terrain that affects the entire hex
6.9.2 Firing—Apply the +2/2L FOW DRM
at ground level [or higher e.g., Smoke]);
to all Night fire unless the target is in/adja-
c) Blocking (B) —The terrain blocks LOS
cent to a Flare hex.
completely if touched; all Blocking terrain
6.9.3 Morale Support Range—The Morale
is considered ‘partial’ (i.e., the LOS must
Support Range is 0—only units in the same
touch the terrain art) with the exception of
location affect morale.
RUBBLE, noted with an ‘e’ superscript on
6.9.4 Platoons and Fire Groups—Only same
the chart);
hex firegroups are allowed. Personnel Pla-
d) Special (S)—Some unique terrain rules
toon movement is only allowed for units start-
apply to this kind of terrain.
ing in the same hex (although they are al-
Height—The ‘obstacle’ height of the terrain,
lowed to move into separate hexes once they
expressed in LEVELS.
begin moving). Multiple locations within a
hex are permitted for both platoons and
Cover—Indicates the cover provided by the
terrain, whether it is none, Good, Improved,
firegroups. Vehicle convoys and platoons
Masonry and Full. Multiple cover states may
operate normally.
apply in some terrain as per the rules for
6.9.5 Flares—Flares may be used during
each.
all scenarios with NIGHT Spotting Condi-
tions. During the Indirect Fire Segment, an
Entry cost—These four columns list the
entry cost for each type of unit (Personnel;
unbroken unit with Flares may place a Flare
Fully Tracked; Half-Tracked; or Wheeled).
marker in the ground level location of any
An entry cost of ‘1+CoT’ means that the unit
hex within its LOS AND within THREE
must pay 1 MP AND add the entry cost of
hexes. On board mortars may place a Flare
the terrain in the hex. An entry of ‘2 x CoT’
marker anywhere within their minimum and
means DOUBLE the Cost of Terrain. A dia-
maximum range. After ANY eligible unit
mond indicates the need to check for Im-
places a Flare marker, roll on the Accuracy
mobilization when entering the terrain or
Diagram (IA) (applying a -20 Accuracy DRM
crossing the hexside. Sometimes, there are
for flares placed by Personnel units ONLY).
two entry costs, such as 1+CoT|Road,
Place a Flare marker in the final hex. Flares
meaning the unit must pay 1 MP plus the
are removed during the End of Turn Seg-
cost of the other terrain in the hex if it
ment of the turn they were placed.
doesn’t follow a road. In this case the term
6.9.6 Flare Allotment —Unless another
‘Road’ may also apply to a Track, Path, or
quantity is provided by SSR, ONE Flare is
Railroad for Sunken Roads and Embank-
provided each side for every LEADER, BAR
ments that contain these terrain types.
Gunner, and Commissar currently in play
Im—Indicates if a roll on the Immobilization
and one per turn for on board mortars. They
Table is required Before (B) or After (A) en-
may be used by ALL friendly Personnel units
tering the hex or crossing the hexside. Any
(i.e., they are not restricted to leaders). Mark
resulting M-KILL leaves the vehicle in ex-
mortars (ONLY) that place a Flare as FIRED.
actly the SAME facing it was in at the time
6.9.7 Flare Effects—All units in/adjacent
it entered AND requires a roll on the Bail
to a Flare hex (known as the Illumination
Out Table (Table E). Note: M-KILLed vehicles
Zone) may be Spotted as if they fired. The
are NOT considered ‘moving’ for the pur -
night FOW +2 DRM for all target units is
poses of HPT DRM (i.e., do NOT apply a +2
ignored. Units which are within the Illumi-
DRM).
nation Zone of a flare only have a LOS within
Cu—Indicates this terrain creates ‘Cushion’
the Illumination Zone and adjacent hexes.

10
effects, representing the absorption of HE
explosions. Any Personnel unit in Cushion
terrain has its Cover shifted 1L for all Di-
rect or Indirect HE Fire. This Cover modi-
fier applies ONLY on the Casualty Table,
even if the fire used the HPT. Cushion does
not provide a 1L against Personnel units in
Full Cover in APCs (marked with ‘F’ on their
counter), Bunkers or Blockhouses (Build-
ings also negate cushion effects for units
within).
Flam-Indicates if the terrain is flammable.
It can burn for two reasons: By SSR or by a
FT|HE attack (including White Phosphorus,
see 6.4.83). Such an attack must obtain a
C6+ on the Casualty Table to create a Flame
in an applicable terrain hex (see Table FR).
AirB-Indicates the terrain creates Airbursts.
Certain terrain represented additional dan-
ger due to fragments being thrown about
by exploding HE rounds (see 12.5.654).
H-D —Indicates if the terrain or terrain
hexside allows for automatic Hull Defilade
or a die roll may provide H-D status.
Hide—Indicates terrain where a unit may
set up Hidden. Units may set up Hidden in
SCRUB and any terrain providing at least a
1L shift INTO them and/or obscuring for
fire THROUGH them.
Notes—Some brief notes to remind players
of rules that apply to the terrain.
7.2 In Hex and Hexside terrain—Terrain
located in a hex is referred to as ‘In-hex’
terrain. Some terrain is ‘Hexside’ terrain,
and appears along hexsides. Even if that
hexside terrain blocks LOS, same-level LOS
can still be traced to the hex bordered by
that hexside terrain, but not beyond it. If
the LOS runs exactly along a hexside con-
taining hexside terrain, it can still be traced
to the hex just behind that hexside terrain,
and units behind it receive the applicable
cover for the hexside terrain. See 7.21.
7.21 Level +10 Hexside Blind Hex—If the
Hexside terrain is at least Level +10 high
(e.g., High Wall; Bocage), consider the hex
sharing the hexside terrain that shares the
+10 hexside and on the ‘other side’ of an
LOS to be a Blind hex from HIGHER LEV-
ELS if the target unit(s) in the hex are sta-
tionary and have not fired. Blind hexes are
created beyond a +10 hexside normally (us-
ing the hex sharing the +10 hexside as the
‘first’ blind hex). LOS is ALWAYS blocked
directly ALONG a Level +10 hexside.
7.22 Cover Denied—There is no cover (i.e.,
column shifts on the Casualty Table pro-
vided by hexside terrain against OBA or air-
craft attacks that do NOT include the hexside
terrain along their flight path. Nor is cover
provided by hexside terrain against Direct
Fire from an adjacent unit at least +20 lev-
els higher than the height of the hex shar-
ing the hexside terrain. HPT DRM apply for
on-board Indirect Fire if the LOS crosses
hexside terrain
Example: A ‘0’ level unit behind a Hedge
hexside gets no cover from the Hedge against
a unit at Level +20 in a building in the adja-
cent hex.
7.23 Entire Hex and Partial Terrain—Most
terrain of the Blocking AND Obscuring type
is considered to be ‘partial’. When tracing
LOS, the ‘thread’ must actually TOUCH the
terrain art to be affected. Hexside terrain is
ALWAYS partial. Some Obscuring (e.g., Or -
chard hexes containing four or more or -
chard symbols) and ONE Blocking terrain
type (rubble) are considered to affect LOS
in the ground level of the ENTIRE hex; they
affect LOS tracing through and alongside
any part of the hex containing the terrain.
Flame and Smoke (including when created
by Burning Wrecks and Smoke Grenades)
is ALWAYS considered to affect the entire
hex (up to the maximum height of Smoke).
7.24 Continuous Slope—An LOS that rises
or falls in even increments of +10 or +5
levels PER HEX along an LOS in continu-
ous downward or upward slope is consid-
ered a ‘Continuous Slope’ and is treated in
the same manner as an LOS along the SAME
level for the purposes of applying Blocking
and Obscuring terrain (including blind hexes
created by Blocking terrain).
7.3 Linear Depressions (LD)—Some terrain
types represent narrow valleys, and are
termed ‘Linear Depressions ’ (e.g., Ravine;
Wadi; Sunken Road) for game purposes.
Units in LD hexes may be in one of two
positions:
a) UP (at Ground level, indicated by placing
the unit on a LOS +10 marker with the ar-
row pointing toward two hexsides NOT
crossed by LD or CLIFF art [if possible; oth-
erwise at least ONE must be available or
there is no UP position]); and;
b) DOWN (inside the Depression, consid-
ered at -10 levels lower than the ground
level of the hex).
When a unit enters an LD hex it is consid-
ered to be in the DOWN position (i.e., an
UP position in an LD hex may ONLY be
entered from that hex’s DOWN position; a
unit may EXIT an UP position as per 7.3.42).
Both positions count as ONE hex location
for stacking and entry but are targeted as
separate locations for non-OBA attacks.
7.3.1 Entry—It costs 2 MP to enter a Lin-
ear Depression hex, even if moving along a
continuous LD, noting these exceptions:
i) When entering the END of a Wadi (see
8.29.41-2);
ii) Moving along a road in an LD;
iii) If there is any other terrain depicted in
the LD hex (e.g., Woods; Brush), in which
case entry costs 2 MP + CoT.
7.3.2 Exit to a Non LD Hex—Exiting from
an LD costs 1 + CoT.
7.3.3 Immobilization Check— Entering
AND exiting an LD hex requires a roll on
the Immobilization Table for Wheeled vehicles
unless moving along a road (or railroad/path)
with the following exceptions. Sunken Road
terrain calls for a roll for ALL vehicle types
unless using a road. Wadi end hexes do not
require a roll for ANY vehicle type. If exiting
one LD hex to enter another a roll is ONLY
made in the hex ENTERED (i.e., two rolls
are not made if moving along a continuous
LD) unless exiting one Level -10 location to
enter another -10 location between two NON-
continuous LD hexes. All other vehicles may
enter and exit without rolling on the table.
7.3.4 UP Cover—Units in UP positions re-
ceive Good cover (including for H Weapons
[or H-D status] for Wadis, since these allow
vehicles and H Weapons to be in UP posi-
tion) for DIRECT Fire across the two
hexsides pointed to by the Level +10 marker
(Exception: No cover benefit [or H-D] is pro-
vided if the LOS also crosses Depression
art). Unless eligible for GOOD cover against
DIRECT fire by being UP, no cover benefits
are created by Linear Depressions unless
there is other terrain (e.g., Woods) also in
11
the hex (i.e., UP units derive NO cover ben-
efits against indirect fire, OBA, etc.
7.3.41 Entering/Exiting UP/DOWN Posi-
tions—A Personnel unit may enter an UP
position via crawling, Infiltration or at the
cost of 4 MP via movement impulse. It costs
ONE MP to enter a Down position from an
UP position of the same hex. See 8.29.41-2
for vehicles and H Weapons in Wadi LD.
7.3.42 Exiting an UP Position—A unit in
an UP position may ONLY enter the DOWN
location of its hex OR move across either of
the two GOOD cover hexsides. Moving from
an UP position across a GOOD cover hexside
costs 1 + CoT and is otherwise treated as
normal movement.
7.3.5 LOS and Hidden Set Up—A Linear
Depression doesn’t block or obscure LOS
through its hex. An LOS exists to units in a
DOWN location ONLY in the following cases:
a) An adjacent, continuous LD hex;
b) An adjacent unit in a NON LD hex;
c) Along a continuous LD if the LOS does
NOT leave the LD art, including from a higher
level hex adjacent to the LD.
If otherwise allowed, a unit may set up hid-
den in the DOWN location of an LD if out of
the LOS of all enemy units.
7.3.43 Fire from UP Position—Units in UP
position may only fire across hexsides that
provide cover/Hull Defilade benefits.
7.4 Multiple Terrain Effects—All terrain
that provides a cover benefit for units oc-
cupying a hex (or behind hexside terrain)
may provide a shift/HPT DRM. In the case
of multiple IN HEX shifts/HPT DRM, the
targeted player may choose which to apply.
Unless moving along a road/railroad/path/
track entry of a location containing more
than one type of terrain requires the expen-
diture of MP for ALL accessible terrain. Only
one +1/1L DRM applies for any OBSCUR-
ING terrain hex (Exception: Smoke; see
7.4.1).
Example: If a hex has a hexside terrain and
in-hex terrain, a Building behind a wall
hexside, the targeted player must choose ei-
ther the hexside or the in-hex terrain when
fired on. If entering a building + woods hex
along a non-road hexside a Personnel unit
must expend 4 MP. If fired on in a building +
woods hex, the targeted player may apply
cover benefits (and detriments, e.g., Airbursts
for woods) of one of the two terrain-types, at
his choice.
7.4.1 Along LOS—Any terrain along an LOS
that is NOT a hexside of the firing or target
hex affects LOS normally. For each HEX
containing at least one occurrence of Ob-
scuring terrain BETWEEN firing and target
unit add a cumulative +1/1L. The excep-
tion to this is Smoke: If an LOS enters/
passes through/exits (i.e., the firing unit’s
hex contains smoke) an OBSCURING hex
(or hexside) containing Smoke, apply ONLY
the Smoke modifier; if the target occupies a
hex containing a terrain providing a cover
modifier AND a Smoke, apply both.
Example: A unit fires on the HPT along an
LOS that has a Brush hex with a Smoke
marker in it applies a +4/4L.
7.5 Overlays—Overlays are added to some
maps to change the terrain used in a sce-
nario. They provide landforms—Hillocks,
and depressions—Deirs and Wadis, as well
as Rock-Strewn terrain, villages, desert
tracks, etc. Trim individual overlays from
the sheets they are provided on—being sure
to cut right along the ‘colored’ edge—leav-
ing no white space around the edge of each
overlay. Overlays don’t have any hex num-
bering, so use the map numbering. Over -
lays have two adjacent hexes named X and
Y. SSRs give overlay placement by saying
which two adjacent hexes the X and Y hexes
should cover.
7.6 Floorpan Armor Hits—An AFV cross-
ing some hexsides (e.g. Walls) or exiting
certain emplacements (e.g., Sangars) is sub-
ject to a Floorpan Armor Hit for Direct Fire
when in the act of crossing/exiting.
7.6.1 Floorpan Hits—If an AFV receives a
Lower Hull (LH) hit when fired on by Op-
portunity Fire as it crosses a hexside creat-
ing the possibility of a Floorpan hit, roll a
subsequent die AFTER the vehicle enters
the new hex. If this roll is 1-2, treat the
Armor Factor for that hit as ‘1’ (i.e., ignore
the AF provided on the vehicle’s AFV Card).
7.7 Hull-Defilade (H-D)—Some terrain may
AUTOMATICALLY (i.e., as compared to H-
D provided via a die roll) provide vehicles a
‘Hull-Defilade’ advantage. In other terrain,
vehicles need to roll equal to or lower than
a given number to obtain H-D status. Place
a Hull-Defilade marker to indicate this sta-
tus unless the vehicle is in terrain that al-
ways provides H-D (e.g., behind a Wall), in
which case marker placement is unneces-
sary. If the roll fails to gain H-D, a vehicle
must exit the hex and re-enter before it may
roll to attempt H-D again. HPT fire against
turreted vehicles in Hull-Defilade must roll
a turret hit (a die roll of 1-3 on the Hit Loca-
tion Table) in order to hit the vehicle. Non-
turreted vehicles must roll an UH on the
table to be hit. Any other aspect rolled is
considered a ‘miss’, even if the HPN was
successfully rolled for on the HPT.
7.7.1 Turreted Truck Type and APC—Tur -
reted APCs and Trucks may also use H-D
positions. When in H-D, a roll IS made on
the Hit Location Table. Non-TURRET hits
are ignored when using DIRECT fire.
7.7.2 H-D Sponson Vehicles—When in H-
D positions, Sponson vehicles are hit on tur-
ret AND UH hits on the Hit Location Table.
They may fire their Sponson weapon when
in Hull Defilade position.
7.7.3 Terrain DRM—When in Hull Defilade,
HPT DRM for terrain (including hexside ter-
rain) are applied normally (EXCEPTION: +1
Hill cover is REPLACED by Hull Defilade
and is NOT applied).
8.0 TERRAIN TYPES
8.1 BOCAGE
8.1.1 Description —Bocage
terrain is depicted by an ir -
regular brown hexside ‘bank’
with green foliage on top.
8.1.2 LOS —Bocage is Level
+10 Blocking HEXSIDE terrain.
8.1.3 Cover—Bocage provides IMPROVED
cover to any LOS crossing its hexside. LOS
traced directly down a Bocage hexside be-
tween same-level units is BLOCKED (or
Blind hexes are created for LOS from higher
levels). Ignore ALL column shifts RIGHT for
Personnel units using Assault or Running
movement for fire that crosses a Bocage
hexside. Bocage hexsides create Hull-Defi-
lade for all vehicles (i.e., roll for Hit Loca-
tion for all if using the HPT). See 7.2 for the
ability of higher level ADJACENT units to
negate cover. Units may set up Hidden (if
otherwise allowed or by SSR) if behind a
Bocage hexside to ALL enemy units after
both sides have set up (reveal any units if
an LOS can be traced after the opponent
has set up his units). They may always set
up marked with an FC marker if behind a
Bocage hexside to ALL enemy units after
both sides have set up (remove any FC
markers if an LOS can be traced).
8.1.4 Movement —It costs 2 MP for Per -
sonnel units to cross a Bocage hexside (in
addition to the CoT of the hex entered), and
4 MP + CoT for Fully Tracked vehicles. Ve-
hicles must check for Immobilization BE-
FORE crossing the Bocage hexside unless
using a gate. Other vehicles may not cross.
If a tracked vehicle successfully crosses, a
Lane marker (same as minefield lane) is
placed across the hexside. All vehicles that
enter later may cross THAT hexside with-
out Immobilization checks ONLY if using As-
sault movement.
8.1.41 Floorpan Hits—Floorpan hits may
occur when AFV crosses a Bocage hexside
(even if across a Lane but not when moving
through a gate).
8.2 BRUSH
8.2.1 Description—Brush is
depicted as small, irregular
green foliage pieces or ‘grass
pieces’ in a blue-green back-
ground.
8.2.2 LOS —Brush is Level +5 Obscuring
terrain that affects the entire hex at ground
level.
8.2.3 Cover—Brush provides no cover for
units within but allows Hidden set up.
8.2.4 Movement—It costs 2 MP for all types
of units to enter a Brush hex.
8.3 BUILDINGS
8.3.1 Description—Buildings
are found on maps and over -
lays, the latter bearing a ‘V’
(for ‘village’) in their ID. Build-
ings are either depicted as
brown or gray structures, and it is this col-
oring that determines the kind of COVER
the building (or its Rubble) provides. Treat
all buildings on overlays as Masonry unless
stated otherwise by SSR.
8.3.11 Building Colors and Cover—Brown
buildings (and their Rubble) are considered
somewhat less substantial and provide IM-
PROVED cover (i.e., 2L or +2 HPT DRM).
They are referred to as ‘Wooden’ buildings.
Gray buildings (and their Rubble) are con-
sidered more substantial, and provide MA-
SONRY cover (i.e., 3L or +3 HPT DRM).
8.3.12 Levels—A Building always contains
a ground level and may have higher ‘floors’
representing additional locations that rise
+10 or more levels above the ground level
of the hex. A wide variety of other types of
Buildings are depicted on historical maps
and overlays, ranging from small cottages,
to churches, large factories and urban ca-
thedrals. Buildings vary by height and other
features noted below. STAIRWELLS exist
in all multi-hex Buildings (and all building
hexes containing a larger than normal cen-
ter -dot, or in some cases center square [e.g.,
Stalingrad map]).
8.3.12.1 HOUSE—A House is a Single hex
Building that has a small white center dot.
It is Level +10 Blocking terrain and only
contains a ground level. Note: If specified
as a flat-roofed building it has an inherent
12
Stairwell that leads to its ROOF level.
8.3.12.11 Flimsy Huts—In Pacific Theater
games small brown building depictions may
be specified to represent ‘Flimsy Huts’.
These are treated as Wooden HOUSE type
buildings with no roof level. Flimsy Huts
provide GOOD cover. Tracked vehicles have
the option of entering Flimsy Hut hexes with-
out making a roll on the Immobilization Table
at DOUBLE the usual entry MP cost or in
the same manner as a wooden building.
8.3.12.2 TOWER—A Tower is a SINGLE hex
Building with a large yellow or white center
dot or square. It has a Ground level and an
additional Level +10 location (or story) if a
DOT; two additional levels if a SQUARE,
and is Level +20 (dot) or +30 (square) Block-
ing terrain. It contains a Stairwell.
8.3.12.3 LARGE BUILDING—A multi-hex
Building with normal center dots in EACH
hex. It has a Ground level AND an addi-
tional level (+10) AND Stairwells in EACH
hex leading ‘upstairs’. It is Level +20 Block-
ing terrain.
8.3.12.4 STAIRWELL BUILDING—A Stair-
well Building is also a multi-hex Building,
but at least ONE hex contains a large RED
center dot/any colored square. It has a
Ground level and two additional levels (+10
and +20), and is level +30 Blocking terrain.
It has a Stairwell ONLY in hexes with a large
red center dot/ square.
8.3.2 LOS—All Buildings are Blocking ter -
rain of varying height. Units in an upper
level (or floor) or rooftop location trace their
LOS from that level. A LOS exists between
one level and the NEXT up or down in the
same hex only if a Stairwell connects the
locations. Thus, there is no LOS between
the Ground level and Level +20 of the same
hex, or between Ground level and Level +10
if there is no Stairwell connecting the hexes.
There is also no LOS between different lev-
els of adjacent locations of the same build-
ing or the same level of non-adjacent loca-
tions of the same building unless the LOS
leaves the building (and re-enters in the tar -
get hex).
8.3.3 Level Markers—3/4”-sized ‘Level +10’
and ‘Level +20’ markers are provided. Place
Personnel inside Buildings on top of a Level
marker according to its current level.
8.3.4 Cover—Buildings provide Improved
or Masonry cover (Exception: Flimsy Huts).
Personnel units may set up marked with
FC markers in a multi-hex Building hex.
8.3.41 Indirect Fire Effects—Any unit in a
Building attacked by INDIRECT FIRE re-
ceives an ADDITIONAL 1L on the Casualty
Table for each ‘floor’ (i.e., +10 in levels) of
non rooftop locations ABOVE its location.
Example: A unit on the Ground level of a Large
Building adds one additional column shift
LEFT to its cover because of the +10 non roof-
top levels above it.
8.3.5 Fire Restrictions—Mortars, Bazoo-
kas, Panzerfausts, and Panzerschrecks may
not fire from a non-Rooftop building loca-
tion (Exception: Emergency use; see
14.4.41). Vehicle ar mament and Heavy
weapons may not fire at a different location
of the building hex they are in (i.e., may not
fire ‘up-’ or ‘downstairs’). Only Personnel and
their Light and Medium weapons may fire
at units occupying the next level above or
below in the same Building hex and only
through a Stairwell, treating those targets
as if inside a Building normally (even if oc-
cupying the roof location above).
8.3.6 Movement—All eligible units pay 2
MP to enter any level of a Building hex or 1
MP to move up or down to the next existing
level through a Stairwell. A unit may only
exit a Building from a Ground level loca-
tion. From a level other than the Ground
level, it can only move Up or Down to the
next connected level of the same hex
through a Stairwell or enter a connected,
adjacent hex of the same level of the same
Building (or may move across adjacent con-
nected rooftop hex locations).
8.3.61 Movement Restrictions —Only
Close Topped TRACKED AFVs and APCs (in-
cludes half- and fully-tracked) AND Heavy
weapons may enter or set up only in the
Ground level of a Building (and only in the
ground level). Any eligible vehicle that EN-
TERS a Building location during play must
roll on the Immobilization Table AFTER en-
tering. Vehicles that SET UP in Buildings
do not risk Immobilization.
8.3 .7 FLAT-ROOFED BUILDINGS —All
Buildings in desert scenarios, unless stated
otherwise by SSR, are Flat-Roofed and thus
have a top level called a Rooftop. Buildings
in other theaters are Flat-Roofed only by
SSR or as specified in the Battlefield
Walkaround booklet for a specific game. The
level of the Rooftop is the same as the ob-
stacle level of the Building.
8.3.71 Rooftop Spotting —Use the Im-
proved/Full column on the Spotting Range
Table to spot units in Buildings unless oc-
cupying a Rooftop, which is considered
GOOD cover from same and lower level
units and Stationary to higher firing units.
8.3.72 Rooftop Cover—Rooftop positions
provide GOOD Cover, fr om lower/same
level fire ONLY and do not block LOS from
along the same-level (e.g., roof to roof LOS).
8.3.73 Rooftop Firing Restrictions—Only
Personnel and their Light and Medium weap-
ons may fire from Rooftop level. Mortars
and SCW may fire without restrictions.
8.3.74 Rooftop Movement Restrictions—
Units may move from one Rooftop location
to an adjacent one of the same Building (un-
less roofless) at a cost of 1 MP. Units may
move from a Rooftop location to the next
lower level of the same hex and vice-versa
via a stairwell.
8.3.8 Buildings as Targets—A player may
opt to use the HPT to fire at a Building IN-
STEAD of any units within. When firing at
the Building (including forts) itself, use the
Spotting Range found in the “B SM I” col-
umn on the Spotting Table and the appro-
priate HPT row/column for the firing unit.
Do not apply HPT DRM for the building it-
self. Any HPT DRM for obscuring terrain/
smoke along the LOS or smoke in the build-
ing hex ARE applied.
8.3.81 LOS and Eligible Targets—When fir -
ing at the building an LOS must be estab-
lished to a NON roof location (i.e., a level) of
the building, i.e., no specific unit must be
seen. However, the ONLY units inside a tar-
geted building that may be affected are those
in NON cellar/rooftop locations (i.e., levels)
within the firing unit’s LOS.
8.3.82 Attack Resolution—For any hit ob-
tained attack ALL units within LOS in any
NON cellar/rooftop location of the building
at HALF the FRAG factors. Units in Rooftop
locations are attacked at FULL FRAG fac-
tors. Units in Cellars are NOT affected by
attacks that use BUILDING targets (unless
rubble results). Apply the appropriate col-
umn shifts for Improved/Masonry (1L shift
for Flimsy Huts) normally on the Casualty
Table.
8.3.83 BOT Placement—For the purposes
of BOT placement, a BOT marker may be
placed in ANY level of the building that has
enemy units within the firing unit’s LOS. If
none are in LOS, no BOT marker may be
placed. All other BOT rules apply normally.
8.3.9 Building Destruction/Rubble Cre-
ation —A Casualty Table result of ‘C3’ or
greater obtained by direct or indirect fired
HE, OBA, Aircraft Bomb or Satchel Charge
may destroy a NON rooftop building LOCA-
TION and ALL levels above it. Before apply-
ing casualties for the attack, a subsequent
rubble determination die roll is made. If this
roll is less than or equal to the number of
casualties, i.e. the C#, (after adding the
rubble modifier as per 8.3.92) place a rubble
marker in the location. All Personnel and
Open Topped AFVs, and non AFV vehicles
in the newly destroyed rubble location are
eliminated. Close topped AFVs are automati-
cally Suppressed. When using Direct fire
at a unit on a specific level, all non Close
Topped/Personnel units in that location are
eliminated. Place a Rubble marker on top
of a Level marker to signify that level has
been rubbled (see 8.3.93 for levels above).
A rubble determination roll is NEVER made
in a location that already contains rubble.
Any stairwell in a rubble location is elimi-
nated.
8.3.91 Indirect Fire—When a building hex
is attacked by Indirect Fire and a rubble
result occurs make a die roll for EACH non
rooftop location (including un-occupied lo-
cations) to randomly select the rubbled lo-
cation. The location with the LOWEST roll
is rubbled. The number of building LEV-
ELS ABOVE each level, divided by TEN, is
added to this roll as a DRM (making it more
likely to rubble upper levels of a building).
If this roll is the same for multiple building
locations, those locations ALL receive a
rubble result.
Example: A Level +30 hex adds a +3 DRM
to the ground level location roll.
8.3.92 Rubble Modifiers—The cover state
for a building location (including any addi-
tions created by Dug-In markers) is ADDED
to the roll needed to create rubble in 8.3.9.
Example: A die roll of 1-2 is needed to rubble
a Masonry building location for a C3 result
on the 80 column due to a +3 DRM added
by the Masonry cover.
8.3.93 Building Collapse—Whenever a lo-
cation is rubbled, all HIGHER same-hex lo-
cations will ‘collapse’, placing a rubble
marker at the highest remaining level and
eliminating all building levels above. All units
within a rubble location are eliminated.
Rubble at the Ground level also eliminates
any Cellar location. Place a Rubble marker
(a +5 level OBSTACLE) in the highest NON
rubble level.
8.3.10 Flame—Make a subsequent die roll
on a ‘C6’ or greater result on the Casualty
Table (prior to applying rubble creation
modifiers listed in 8.3.92) from an attack
that is eligible to cause rubble (and in non
Building flammable terrain). On a die roll of
1-3, place a Flame marker in the location(s),
along with the rubble marker if in a build-
ing. On a C6+ a Flamethrower may also
13
place a Flame marker in a building or flam-
mable terrain location attacked, subject to
the same subsequent 1-3 die roll. Rubble
creation is NOT required for a Flame marker
to be placed. See Table FR.
8.3.11b Interior Walls—Some
Buildings have a black bar
Running along the interior
hexsides of some hexes. No
movement (including Infiltra-
tion) or fire is permitted across or ALONG
these hexsides and they block same-level
LOS. Units are not considered ‘adjacent’
across black bar hexsides for the purposes
of Morale Table modifiers, Platoon Movement
or Firegroups. Note: The moniker ‘b’ has
been appended to this rule to differentiate
it from 8.3.11, Building Colors.
8.3.12b CELLARS—If stated by SSR, some
Buildings have a building location level be-
low their Ground level known as a Cellar.
In addition to other Stairwells in the build-
ing, buildings with Cellars are treated as if
they contain a Stairwell in each ground level
hex, heading into the cellar. Cellars are at
Level –10. Place units in a Cellar UNDER a
+10 LOS marker (with no other counters
on TOP of the Level +10 marker). Note: The
moniker ‘b’ has been appended to this rule
to differentiate it from 8.3.12.
8.3.121 Cellar Fire Restrictions —Only
Direct Fire is allowed from a Cellar, and then
only between the Cellar and Ground level
of the same Building hex, or against adja-
cent units in hexes that are not part of the
same building. This same restriction applies
for Direct Fire INTO a Cellar location. Only
Light weapons and Personnel Gunfire Fac-
tors, including Grenades/Satchel Charges/
Gammon Bombs may be fired from a Cel-
lar. Add ALL levels above the Cellar for In-
direct Fire column shifts against Cellar oc-
cupants.
8.3.122 Cellar Movement Restrictions—
Only Personnel and their carried Light and
Medium weapons may set up in or enter a
Cellar. A Cellar may be entered from the
Ground level of the same hex (and vice-versa)
at a cost of 2 MP. Units may also move di-
rectly to a Cellar location from an adjacent
Hedgehog, AT Trench, Blockhouse or Bun-
ker directly from UNDER those Emplace-
ments. No movement or fire is allowed be-
tween adjacent Cellar hexes.
8.3.13 STEEPLE—A building
Hex that contains a white
cross depicts a ‘Steeple’. A
Steeple is treated as a Build-
ing location Level +10 higher
than the highest non-Steeple Building level
in its hex. A Stairwell leads to it. A Steeple
also adds +10 levels to the LOS Obstacle
height of the Building in the Steeple hex
ONLY.
Example: A House is Level +10 Blocking ter-
rain with a Steeple it is +20 Blocking terrain.
A new level is created in the Steeple hex.
There is never a Rooftop location in a Steeple
hex.
8.3.131 Steeple Stacking Restrictions—
Stacking is limited to TWO Stacking Points.
Overstacking is not permitted.
8.3.132 Steeple Fire Restrictions—
Steeples are treated as building locations
for the purposes of fire restrictions (e.g.,
mortars may not fire from Steeple locations).
8.3.133 Steeple Movement Restrictions—
Only Personnel may enter a Steeple loca-
tion. Place Personnel on an appropriate
Steeple Level marker (or use a Level +10
and +20 marker [two markers] to denote
units at Level +30).
8.3.14 FACTORIES
8.3.141 Factory Defined—A
‘Factory’ is any Building with
a Road or Railway physically
depicted as ‘entering’ it at some
point. Factories are treated in
the same manner as Buildings for all pur-
poses except where noted below.
8.3.142 Levels —Factories ONLY have a
Rooftop location above Ground level and it
is located at their highest Obstacle level.
Factories with at least one large RED cen-
ter dot (representing the Stairwell; or a large
white square) are Level +20 Blocking ter -
rain. All other Factories are Level +10 Block-
ing terrain, with a Stairwell in each hex that
connects to the Rooftop. As there is no level
above the Ground level, Factories do not
provide additional Fire modifiers against In-
direct Fire for units in the Ground level.
8.3.143 Rooftops—Factories ALWAYS have
Rooftops (Exception: Roofless hexes); they
need not be specified by SSR.
8.3.144 Roofless Factories—
Factories may be depicted with
some Rooftops bearing battle
damage (in effect only if stated
in the Battlefield Walkaround
for an ATS game). Known as ‘Roofless’ hexes,
there is no Rooftop in these hexes. Roofless
hexes may not be created during play. For
fire from the roof or within the Factory, treat
these hexes according to the other terrain
in the hex, usually Debris (Airbursts may
occur). Mortars may fire from within roofless
hexes. LOS to (and from, i.e., within the
building) roofless hexes is treated as if across
a CONTOUR hexside.
8.3.1441 Other Roofless Buildings—Treat
non-Factory buildings that are roofless NOR-
MALLY for all purposes with the exception
of any LOS that is created into a Roofless
hex due to the hole in the roof.
8.3.145 Interior —Factories are different
from other Buildings in that as long as a
LOS INSIDE the same building does not
cross any ‘black bar’ hexside, it is NOT
blocked. Unless rubbled, or filled with De-
bris in the case of a Roofless hex, treat all
interior hexes within a Factory as JUNKYARD
for inside-to-inside fire ONLY. For fire from
outside, a Factory is treated as a building
normally.
8.3.146 Entry and Exit—Personnel enter
Factory hexes normally from the outside
(i.e., like other buildings). When moving
from one interior hex to another, treat each
non-Rubble or Debris hex as if it is a
JUNKYARD hex. Unlike normal Buildings,
all vehicles may enter Factories using Road
or Railway ‘entrances’, ignoring ‘junkyard’
terrain in the first hex they enter (i.e., a roll
is ONLY made if the hex is Rubble or De-
bris). Vehicles already inside a Factory move
to new interior hexes as if entering
JUNKYARD hexes. Vehicles enter non-en-
trance Factory hexes from OUTSIDE in the
same manner as normal buildings.
8.3.15 FORT —Several Beau Geste style
Turkish Forts were found in North Africa,
and are depicted by the overlay with the ‘F’
ID. A Fort is a Building with one Gate and a
Courtyard in its center surrounded by a
Rampart.
8.3.151 Fort Movement restrictions—The
Rampart hexside next to hex ‘X’ on a Fort
overlay is the ‘Gate’ hex. Units may only
exit/enter the interior ‘Courtyard’ through
the Gate, and only if it is ‘open’. Placing a
movement arrow in the Gate hex facing IN
to the Fort signifies an open Gate. Only the
Personnel unit in the Gate hex may open or
close the Gate. The Gate may be opened or
closed during the End of Turn Segment by
any Personnel unit in the Gate hex.
8.3.152 Rampart and Courtyard—The Fort
consists of one center Courtyard hex, sur -
rounded by Rampart hexes. Units in the
Courtyard center hex may only be at Ground
level and are treated as if in Open ground
(including allowing the placement of emplace-
ments therein). Units in a Rampart hex may
be in a Courtyard location (at Ground level)
inside the Fort or on a Level +10 marker, to
signify they are in a Rampart location. Per-
sonnel units and their L, M, weapons may
set up and enter a Rampart location. They
may also enter from a same-hex or adjacent
Rampart location within by Crawling or via
Infiltration. NON-large target size H weap-
ons may SET UP in a Rampart (and may
change their covered arc); they may not
move from one once set up.
8.3.1521 Cover—Units in a Rampart are
considered in Improved Cover to fire from
OUTSIDE the Fort. They may not ‘Drop’
from a Rampart when fired on.
8.3.1522 LOS and Spotting From Out-
side—Units in a Courtyard location are con-
sidered out of LOS from any hex outside
the Fort, except for Indirect Fire, from which
they receive no cover benefits. Indirect Fire
may fire IN a Courtyard that would be oth-
erwise out of LOS. Use the column B-SM-I
when spotting a Fort on the Spotting Table.
8.3.1523 Rubble Creation—A Rampart hex
may be destroyed and changed into Rubble
like a building. Units in a Courtyard loca-
tion are out of the LOS of units outside the
Fort and may set up hidden if out of LOS of
all enemy units during set up.
8.3.16 Other Building Types-Occasionally
an SSR will specify that a particular Build-
ing is a ‘tomb’, a ‘mosque’ or some other
type not covered in these rules. Rules for
such Building types will be provided entirely
by SSR or in the Battlefield Walkaround
booklet.
8.4 CROPS
8.4 .1 Description —Crops
terrain is depicted by yellow-
brown mass with irregular
edges filling most of one or
more hexes. A Flame marker
may be created in Crops.
8.4.2 LOS—Crops are level +5 Obscuring
terrain. Harvested Crops are Clear Terrain
(and no Flame may be created).
8.4.3 Cover—Crops provide no cover ben-
efits (Exception: Running benefit), but units
may set up Hidden in them. Treat RUN-
NING Personnel units in a Crops hex as if it
is using ASSAULT movement and an Assault
moving Personnel unit as if it was Station-
ary. A Crawling unit derives no extra ben-
efit. Harvested crops are ignored for LOS
and attack purposes.
8.4.4 Movement—It costs 2 MP for all units
to enter a Crops or Harvested Crops hex.
8.4.5 Rice Paddies—Rice Paddies are an-
other form of ‘crops’ terrain that is depicted
on some ATS maps and specified via Battle-
14
field Walkaround.
8.4.51 Personnel Units—Personnel units
(on foot) treat Rice Paddies as if they are
Crops hexes for movement purposes.
8.4.52 Non Personnel—All other units treat
Rice Paddies in the same manner as Swamp
hexes for movement purposes.
8.4.53 LOS and Attack—Rice Paddies are
treated in the same manner as Crops hexes
for all LOS and attack purposes (i.e., no
cushion effect).
8.4.6 Elephant Grass— Some Pacific The-
ater games use Crops artwork to depict El-
ephant Grass. Treat Elephant Grass in the
same manner as Crops (Exception: Person-
nel may not use Running Movement in El-
ephant Grass; the placement of lanes
through crops may not be placed [see Op-
tional Rules Appendix C]).
8.5 DEBRIS
8.5.1 Description—Debris
terrain is depicted by ran-
dom specks.
8.5.2 LOS—Debris is level
+5 Obscuring terrain that
affects the entire hex at ground level.
8.5.3 Cover —Debris provides Good cover
to units within and create Airbursts. Units
may set up hidden in Debris.
8.5.4 Movement—Debris terrain costs 2
MP to enter. Personnel may not use Run-
ning movement in a Debris hex. Vehicles
must roll on the Immobilization Table AF-
TER entering Debris.
8.6 DEIR
8.6.1 Description —Deirs
depict slight depressions in
the desert and are repre-
sented by any overlay with
a ‘D’ ID.
8.6.2 LOS—Deir contours represent a gentle
slope in level down to Level -5 open ground
(barring other terrain in the hex). An LOS is
created DOWN into a Deir in the same man-
ner as any lower level terrain, i.e., requir-
ing a contour hexside from a higher level,
including a Deir contour. A non-burning
Wreck or vehicle in a Level -5 location in a
Deir is ignored for LOS purposes if the LOS
is between units at Level 0 or higher.
8.6.3 Cover —Personnel in a Level 0 hex
adjacent to a Deir contour are in Good Cover
if fired at from a unit IN the Deir (i.e., from
Level -5 locations across a hexside to a
higher unit at Level 0). Units IN a Level -5
Deir are also in Good cover for any LOS
that crosses the Deir down contour along a
hexside of the target hex unless the firing
unit is ADJACENT.
8.6.31 Hull-Defilade—Deir contours auto-
matically create Hull-Defilade for Vehicles
on a Deir hex adjacent to a contour for all
non-adjacent LOS traced from higher level
hexes and crossing that contour. Being ‘up’
across the contour (i.e., from fire emanat-
ing from IN the Deir) does NOT create H-D.
8.6.4 Movement —There is no additional
movement point cost to move Down onto a
Deir location. Moving Up (crossing a hex
side with a contour to a Level 0 hex) costs 1
MP + CoT of the hex entered.
8.7 EMBANKMENT
8.7.1 Description—Embank-
ment terrain represents a
raised road or railroad. It is
depicted as a light back-
ground, with a darker back-
ground and Road or Railroad terrain de-
picted in the center.
8.7 .2 LOS —Embankment is Level +10
Blocking terrain.
8.7.3 Cover —Vehicles are automatically
considered in Hull-Defilade position in an
Embankment hex from a lower level firing
unit. All other units receive Good Cover in
the same situation.
8.7.4 Movement—In each case movement
is allowed along the Road, Path, or Railroad
normally, noting any elevation changes if the
Embankment enters or exits to lower -level
terrain.
8.7.41 Non Road Movement—Units mov-
ing into or out of embankment hexes with-
out moving along a Road/Railroad pay 1 MP
plus the cost of any terrain entered. Any
Vehicle using Non-Road movement must roll
for Immobilization BEFORE entering or AF-
TER exiting the Embankment.
8.8 FLAME
8.8.1 Description—Flame exists
only in the form of a marker
placed in a hex or location by SSR
or created during play. If in a
building level Flame never
‘spreads’ DOWN from its current location;
it spreads UP one level (up ONLY; not to
adjacent hexes) during each End of Turn
Segment starting on the turn it was placed.
Burning Wrecks are NOT treated in the
same manner as Flame markers but instead
as a Wreck with a permanent Smoke
marker.
8.8.2 LOS—Flame is treated as Smoke for
LOS purposes and rises to Level +30 above
the level of its location. It affects the entire
hex to +30 levels above ground level.
8.8.3 Cover—Flame provides no cover.
8.8.4 Movement—No unit may enter a LO-
CATION containing a Flame marker and any
units in a newly created Flame location must
exit by the End of Turn Segment of the NEXT
turn or they are eliminated (Vehicles are
replaced by burning wreck markers although
no additional smoke effect is created in such
hexes).
8.9 GRAVEYARD
8.9.1 Description —Grave-
yard terrain is depicted by nu-
merous small headstones.
8.9.2 LOS—Graveyard is level
+5 Obscuring terrain that af-
fects the entire hex at ground level.
8.9.3 Cover —Graveyards provide Good
cover to units within. They create Airbursts.
Units may set up Hidden in Graveyards.
8.9.4 Movement—Graveyard terrain costs
2 MP to enter. Vehicles must check Immo-
bilization AFTER entering a Graveyard hex
unless moving on a road.
8.9.41 Graveyard Roads—Roads may run
through Graveyard hexes, often entering
through Gates. Units may move along Road
hexsides through a Graveyard to avoid the
cost and risk of entry but are otherwise
treated as being IN the Graveyard hex.
8.10 HEDGE
8.10.1 Description —Hedge
terrain is depicted by an ir -
regular green hexside.
8.10.2 LOS—Hedge is level +5
Blocking Hexside terrain.
8.10.3 Cover—Hedges provide Good cover
for LOS traced across their hexsides. See
7.2 for the ability of higher level ADJACENT
units to negate cover.
8.10.4 Movement—All eligible units pay an
additional 1 MP + CoT to cross a Hedge
hexside. Wheeled Vehicles may cross Hedge
hexsides but must roll on the Immobiliza-
tion Table BEFORE crossing the Hedge.
Heavy weapons may never be Pushed or
Towed across a Hedge hexside unless
through a Gate. When an opening in the
Hedge hexside art is depicted, represent-
ing a Gate, all units may cross the Hedge
without any restrictions and without MP cost
supplement. A Gate is treated for all other
purposes as a Hedge hexside.
8.11 HIGH WALL
8.11.1 Description —A High
Wall is depicted with Wall art-
work containing two or three
large black squares.
8.11.2 LOS—A High Wall is
Level +10 Blocking Hexside terrain.
8.11.3 Cover—High Wall hexsides BLOCK
same-level LOS across them. Units behind
them receive Improved cover from higher
level fire. See 7.2 for the ability of higher
level ADJACENT units to negate cover.
8.11.4 Movement—No Vehicle may cross a
High Wall unless using a Gate opening. Per-
sonnel may only use Crawling or Infiltration
to cross a High Wall hexside.
8.12 HILLOCKS
8.12.1 Description—Hillocks
are found on some hexsides
(although they are not techni-
cally ‘hexside terrain’) and rep-
resent a small rise in eleva-
tion insufficient to constitute a hill. Hillock
terrain is depicted by elevation ‘hachure’ art
along a hexside. There are two types of Hill-
ocks, Full (desert overlays only) and Partial
(all others). The following rules apply to both
types unless expressly stated to be a rule
for FULL or PAR TIAL Hillocks.
8.12.11 Unit Location—Units located in a
hex into which the hexside hachure con-
tour ‘fingers’ point are situated on the DOWN
side of the hexside. Those on the flat side
are in the UP side. Units located within a
complete circuit of a FULL desert Hillock
are in UP hexes regardless of their location
with reference to the Hillock’s hexsides.
8.12.2 LOS—Any LOS traced from Level +5
Hillock terrain may see OVER any +5 ter -
rain (e.g., Wall; Crops) unless a Continuous
Slope applies (see 7.24). In the case of a
PAR TIAL Hillock, the firing unit must be in
an UP position to be considered at +5 lev-
els. All UP (i.e., Level +5) portions of a FULL
15
Hillock impart this LOS advantage. Treat
Level +10 and higher portions of a FULL
Hillock as HILL terrain.
8.12.3 Partial Hillock Effects— Hillock
hexsides of a PAR TIAL Hillock do not block
or obscure LOS in ANY way.
8.12.4 Full/Desert Hillocks—A series of
connecting Hillock hexsides that form a
COMPLETE circuit of Level +5 hexes on a
DESER T overlay represent a Full Hillock.
Hillocks on desert overlays are the ONLY
full Hillocks in the system. Treat ALL other
Hillock hexsides, even if part of a ‘ring’ of
connected hexsides, as PAR TIAL Hillocks.
8.12.41 FULL Hillock LOS Effects—LOS
from the Level +5 portion of a FULL Hillock
may be traced from units in UP/+5 hexes
to all other units in UP/+5 hexes. LOS may
also be traced from an UP/+5 Hillock loca-
tion to the first DOWN hex of another FULL
Hillock along a firing unit’s LOS. Both cases
assume there is no higher intervening Block-
ing terrain (or Obscuring terrain of 8+ shift/
HPT DRM) along the LOS (i.e., it is from a
unit on a Hillock to a unit on [or one hex
behind] another Hillock along its LOS). No
blind hexes are created by Hillock hexsides
on the SAME Hillock of a firing unit.
8.12.5 Cover—Non-vehicle units in lower
level hexes receive GOOD cover against at-
tacks crossing (INCLUDING directly along)
a FULL Hillock hexside of their hex (Excep-
tion: Units in lower hexes do not receive
any cover benefits from an adjacent UP hex).
A unit that is in a Hillock hex and UP/+5
levels above a firing unit(s) receives GOOD
cover, including from adjacent firing units.
8.12.51 Hull Defilade—Vehicles in DOWN
hexes automatically receive H-D across a
FULL Hillock hexside (from non adjacent
fire). Vehicles in any UP/+5 Hillock hexes
may roll for H-D status for fire crossing (in-
cluding directly along) a Hillock hexside from
units at lower levels by making a die roll of
‘1’. A vehicle may only roll for H-D when
using ASSAULT movement (or during set
up). H-D in a Hillock UP hex is lost if the
vehicle leaves the hex or changes VCA
(changing TCA without leaving does not re-
sult in the loss of Hull Defilade).
8.12.6 Movement—All units must pay a cost
of 1+CoT to move UP across a Hillock
hexside (Exception: Moving along a Road or
Path). There is no additional cost when
moving down (Exception: Precipitous Ter -
rain). Crossing a Hillock hexside to a higher
In the example at left, Pzkw If ‘C’ is in a hull-
defilade position across the down contour
hexsides in its hex (the front two hexes cor-
responding with its VCA). If squad ‘15’ was
an enemy AFV, Pzkw IIf ‘C’ would NOT be in
hull-defilade to its fire.
Squad ‘15’ can see all units in the deir. If it
was one hex back (away from the deir), it
could NOT see ‘13’. Also, if ‘15’ was back
away from the deir contour, squad ‘21’ would
get the benefit of being in GOOD cover. Be-
ing adjacent to ‘21’ denies this benefit (mak-
ing it in STATIONARY cover).
If squad ‘15’ was backed away from the deir
BUT was up on Level +5 or greater it could
see into all hexes of the deir.
or lower level may constitute Precipitous Ter -
rain (see 8.13.6).
8.13 HILLS
8.13.1 Description—Histori-
cal maps depict Hills and Hill-
ocks using relative topographi-
cal ‘levels’, each printed in a
different color. In the above ex-
ample, hex G35 is a HILL hex; hexside
G35/G36 is a HILLOCK contour hexside
ON a Hill. On non-desert maps Hillock
hexsides represent Level +5 contours ON
TOP of the colored levels. Unlike Hillock
terrain, which is depicted using artistic con-
tour depictions that face out from along a
hexside, the contours for Hill terrain is found
inside a hex in a similar manner to Deirs
(except the terrain surrounding the hex cen-
ter dot slopes UP instead of DOWN).
Example: A Level +30 Hill will have a “+30”
appended to one or more of its hexes, as ref-
erence, somewhere on the mapsheet. All other
hexes of that color found on the map are con-
sidered the same height. Hillocks are NOT
marked with height information—only Hills
are.
8.13.2 LOS—Hills depict more substantial
terrain undulations than Hillocks do and
vary in height. The default change in eleva-
tion of a Hill is +10 LEVELS. Units on Hills
cannot see to a lower level unless the unit
is in a hex that contains a contour and/or
Hillock hexside. See the example on page
54.
8.13.21 Blind Hexes —Hills create Blind
hexes in keeping with the relative height
difference between firing and target units.
Non-Cliff crest lines (contours) create one
LESS Blind hex (to a minimum of ZERO blind
hexes) from a hex that is part of the SAME
hill regardless of the shape of the hill. To
be part of the same hill, there must be con-
nected hexes above Level 0, making up one
‘hill’. (Exception: When TERRACED hills are
in effect a Blind Hex is always created by a
Above is the Fort overlay provided with AD-
VANCED TOBRUK. The gate hex is found
along the hexside between the ‘X’ hex and
the one directly under it. The three hexes
directly under the ‘X’ hex, and the two ad-
jacent hexes on either side of these repre-
sent the ‘courtyard’ of the fort. Personnel
may be ‘up’ in all hexes of the fort EXCEPT
the one hex directly in the center of the
courtyard.
crest line). SUBTRACT ONE from the num-
ber of Blind Hexes specified on the LOS
Blind Hex Creation Table. Example: A squad
in a Level +20 Hill hex tries to see past a
Level +10 Hill (on a different hill) hex 16 hexes
away to see an enemy squad in Level 0 open
ground 20 hexes away. Using the ‘13-18’
column, the row used is the ‘+10’ row, since
the firing unit has a +10 Height Advantage
(Height DIFF) over the +10 Hill and is 16
hexes away from the blocking terrain. Three
Blind hexes are created, so the firing squad
has a LOS to the enemy squad. If the enemy
was 19 hexes away, the LOS would be
blocked, due to the three Blind hexes. If the
LOS contained Hill hexes of the same hill
ONLY, one less Blind Hex would be created.
8.13.3 Cover—Vehicles are automatically
considered in Hull-Defilade position from
any lower level firing unit if occupying a Hill
hex containing a contour, i.e., the LOS
crosses a HILL contour in the target unit’s
hex. All other units receive Good cover from
lower level fire UNLESS receiving in-hex
cover from ANY other terrain or Emplace-
ment in their hex location.
8.13.31 Adjacent H-D—A higher level ve-
hicle IS considered H-D across a Hill hexside
from an adjacent, lower level firing unit.
8.13.4 Movement —It costs 1 MP+CoT to
move UP when entering a hill hex; other -
wise pay CoT when moving down.
8.13.5 Cliffs—A rough dark-brown hexside
on a Hill hex depicts a ‘Cliff’. Cliffs separate
some Hill hexes, usually along hexsides
when the change in elevation represents
more than a +10 or -10 Level change (they
may also be used with lesser elevation
changes). Cliff hexsides are impassable. No
unit may move across a Cliff hexside.
8.13.6 Precipitous Terrain—A unit must
pay 4 MP + CoT to enter an adjacent hex
that entails changing levels by +15 or more,
whether moving up or down in levels.
Winded units may not do so, including dur-
ing Infiltration. Note that Hillocks on Hills,
as well as Ravines and Creeks may create
precipitous terrain—always use the actual
level the unit is entering when it crosses a
hexside or enters a new hex. All non Fully-
Tracked Vehicles must roll on the Immobili-
zation Table when moving entails entering
precipitous terrain, prior to entering the new
hex.
8.13.61 Hillock—Precipitous terrain is cre-
ated whenever a Hillock hexside is printed
along a hexside that ALSO has a Hill con-
tour within.
8.13.62 Roads and Paths —Any Road or
Path (not Track) that crosses a Precipitous
terrain hexside cancels the Immobilization
Table roll for vehicles moving along them
and reduces the cost for vehicles to 2 +
CoT. A road or path reduces the cost for
Personnel by ONE MP to 3 + CoT and al-
lows Winded units to Infiltrate into precipi-
tous terrain.
8.13.7 Razor-Back Ridge—Another form of
Hill contour is the ‘Razor-Back Ridge’ (e.g.,
ATS Okinawa map). A Razor -Back Ridge ex-
ists along hexsides containing Hillock art
along adjacent hexsides (i.e., BOTH sides
of one hexside).
8.13.71 LOS—A Razor-Back Ridge hexside/
hexspine is a Level +5 Obstacle just as if it
were a wall hexside. A unit in Full cover
UNDER an Emplacement can see past a Ra-
16
zor -Back Ridge that forms a hexside or
hexspine of its own hex to non-adjacent
hexes. Units directly behind a Razor -Back
Ridge hexside or hexspine receive IM-
PROVED cover as if it were a wall. It is
otherwise treated as a Hillock contour
across the hexside for purposes of tracing
LOS by units sighting across a Razor -Back
Ridge hexside (i.e., they receive a +5 levels
LOS height advantage across the hexside
[in both directions]).
8.14 JUNKYARD
8.14.1 Description —The
Junkyard terrain is depicted
by a pile of irregular objects.
8.14.2 LOS—Junkyard is
level +5 Obscuring terrain that
affects the entire hex at ground level.
8.14.3 Cover —Junkyard provides Good
cover. It creates Airbursts. Units may set
up Hidden in Junkyard.
8.14.4 Movement—Junkyard terrain costs
2 MP to enter. Personnel may not use Run-
ning movement in Junkyard hexes. Vehicles
must check Immobilization AFTER entering
a Junkyard hex.
8.15 OPEN GROUND
8.15.1 Description—All clear
or ‘blank’ terrain, containing
no other terrain art depiction
within is considered Open
Ground.
8.15.2 LOS—Open Ground is Level 0 Clear
Terrain.
8.15.3 Cover—Open Ground provides no
cover.
8.15.4 Movement —All units enter Open
Ground at the cost of 1 MP.
8.16 ORCHARD
8.16.1 Description—Orchard
terrain is depicted by rows of
medium foliage pieces that do
not touch one another.
8.16.2 LOS —An Orchard is
Level +10 Obscuring terrain that affects the
entire hex at ground level and +10 levels
above if there are 4+ orchard art symbols
in the hex. Orchard hexes with three or less
symbols ONLY affect LOS if touched by the
LOS ‘thread’. Orchards create Blind hexes
(unless firing and target unit are at the SAME
level) if the LOS traced touches a part of
the artistic Orchard depiction in a hex OR
any part of the hex that contains four or
more Orchard symbols. See the exceptions
created by Orchard Roads.
8.16.21 Orchard Roads—Any SAME LEVEL
LOS (including Continuous Slope) that en-
ters and exits an Orchard hex ALONG a
road, never leaves the road art, and does
NOT touch an orchard art symbol, is NOT
affected by the Orchard terrain.
8.16.3 Cover —An Orchard provides no
cover to units IN its hex. However, units
may set up hidden in orchards.
8.16.4 Movement—All units enter Orchards
at the cost of 1 MP.
8.17 PALM GROVES
8.17 .1 Description —Palm
Groves are found on any Over-
lay with a ‘P’ ID and green
‘palm tree’ artwork.
8.17.2 LOS—A Palm Grove is
Level +10 Obscuring terrain that affects the
entire hex at ground level and +10 levels
above. Palm Groves create Blind hexes with-
out reference to the number of palm tree
terrain symbols in the hex.
8.17.3 Cover —A Palm Grove provides no
ginning with ‘Tr’ are Tracks. Overlays that
cover to units in its hex. However, units
begin with the letter -number ID ‘RR’ are Rail-
may set up hidden in Palm Groves.
road terrain. Roads (including Paved and A C
8.17.4 Movement —All units enter Palm
Unpaved Roads as well as Paths) are de-
Grove at the cost of 1 MP.
picted on non-desert maps. Paved Roads
8.18 RAILCARS
are depicted in gray. Non-paved Roads are
8.18.1 Description—Railcars
printed in light brown or tan. Paths are de-
are found on maps depicting
picted by squiggly brown lines. Unless stated
industrial complexes.
otherwise, there is no difference in game
8.18.2 LOS—A Railcar is Level
terms between ‘paved’ and ‘un-paved’ roads. B D
+10 Blocking terrain. The
8.20.2 LOS—Tracks, Roads, Railroads and
traced LOS must touch a Railcar depiction
Paths themselves are Clear terrain, noting
within the hex to be affected. All Personnel units in this example are on the
other terrain in their hexes.
8.18.3 Cover —A Railcar provides Good same terrain level. Squad A has a LOS to C.
8.20.3 Cover —Tracks, Roads, Railroads
cover to units in the hex. ONLY Personnel It does NOT have one to D. Squad B has a
and Paths have NO effect on LOS or cover,
and their carried L and M weapons (not H
noting other terrain in the same hex is
LOS to both C and D. If B fired on C or D it
weapons) may set up Hidden in Railcar
treated normally for the purposes of cover.
would use the ‘4’ column on the Casualty
hexes.
8.20.4 Movement—When moving ALONG
Table, applying its usual ‘8’ Gunfire factors,
8.18.4 Movement—Personnel enter a Rail-
a Road or Track, vehicles pay a HALF MP
with a 2L shift, reducing it to a ‘4’.
car hex at a cost of 2 MP. Only fully tracked
(Exception: WHEELED vehicles pay ONE If the thick black hexsides were instead
vehicles may enter at the cost of 2 MP and
MP when moving along a Track). Railroad BOCAGE terrain, A and C do NOT have a
they must roll on the Immobilization Table
costs ONE MP for all units moving ALONG LOS to each other. Nor would B and D as
AFTER entering a Railcar hex.
a Railroad. Personnel pay ONE MP unless Bocage is Level +10 hexside terrain and
8.19 RAVINE
changing levels, in which case the MP cost blocks any LOS drawn exactly along the
8.19.1 Description—A Ravine
is reduced by ONE. Movement costs are hexside.
is depicted by green and
brown terrain art similar to a
NEVER reduced to ‘zero’. The minimum cost If these were BLACK BAR hexsides inside a
Wadi. Ravine is a Linear De-
is always ½ MP or 1 MP if only moving one
building, squads A and B do NOT have a LOS
pression.
hex.
to C or D (and vice-versa) as the hexsides
8.20.41 Paths —Paths ONLY
8.19.2 LOS—Ravine follows the LOS rules
would block ALL LOS.
affect Personnel movement.
for Linear Depression terrain.
They reduce by ONE the cost Open Ground if ONLY Road, Railroad, or
8.19.3 Cover —Ravine follows the Cover
for Personnel moving to a Path terrain art is depicted in the hex).
rules of Linear Depressions normally not-
higher level across a hexside 8.20.5 Mines Set Up restrictions—Mines
ing the restriction below on which units may
crossed by a Path. Paths also allow Person- may NOT be set up Hidden in Paved Roads;
be in UP positions.
nel to move through other terrain along a they must be set up on-map if set up in a
8.19.4 Movement —Ravine follows the
Path as if moving through Open Ground. Paved Road, with their density value facing
movement rules for Linear Depression ter-
Pay the other cost of entering the terrain UP.
rain.
otherwise. Hex N3 (above) is an example of 8.20.6 Hexside Roads and Buildings with
8.19.41 Up and Position Restriction—Only
a Path hex. Roads —Some Roads run along hexsides
Personnel and their carried L and M weap-
8.20.42 Moving Along—To be considered (e.g., L32-L33 hexside on the Scottish Cor-
ons may be in the UP location in Ravine
moving ALONG these terrain types, a unit ridor mapsheet 1; G21-H20 hexside on the
hexes.
must be moving along the SAME Track, Arnhem map) or in the same hex as a Build-
8 . 2 0 R O A D S , T R A C K S , PAT H S , A N D
Road, Railroad or Path (or Open Ground to ing, but not directly along a hexside (e.g.,
RAILROADS
one of these across a hexside that points to hex A5 on the Combat Rangers map; hex
8.20.1 Descrip-
the ‘clear’ portion of the hex) by entering H6 on the Arnhem map). The rules treat
tion —These are
and exiting through connected hexsides both of these Road situations in the same
depicted on maps
crossed by the contiguous art depiction. Per- manner. A unit may move along such Roads,
and overlays by
sonnel pay ONE MP for all three types, when moving from one Road hex to another, with-
brown, gray or
moving along. In ALL other movement cases, out entering other terrain in the hex. Place
hatched stripes. Overlays with an ID be-
use the OTHER terrain in the hex (usually a movement arrow OFF the unit, pointing

In the Wadi (also illustrates Ravines and other LD)

LOS example at left, squad ‘13’ only has a LOS to
‘21’, ‘15’ and the Pz IIf ‘C’ (and vice versa).
Squad ‘9’ UP in the wadi (along with its MG 34
L|MG) can SEE but has no LOS to FIRE at squad
‘10’ (ignore ramifications for same nationality for
this example) or ‘15’. Squad ‘10’ CAN see and
fire at (i.e., has a LOS) squad ‘9’ with no restric-
tion as can ‘15’.
Pzkw IIf ‘C’ is also UP in its wadi hex. It has a
LOS to squad ‘10’ but no ability to fire at any
other unit in the example. Its line-of-fire to ‘15’
crosses a wadi hexside; squads ‘13’ and ‘21’ are
down in the wadi and can be seen but not fired
at. Its LOS to squad ‘9’ would NOT cross the two
allowable hexsides the Panzer’s LOS has to cross
from a hull-defilade position in a wadi. If squad ‘10’
was an enemy tank instead, Pzkw IIf ‘C’ would be
in hull-defilade to its direct fire.
Squad ‘10’ cannot see squads ‘13’ and ‘21’ down
in the wadi. If it was in the hex with the “W13”
overlay ID text, it COULD see along the continu-
ous wadi to squad ‘13’.

17

In the example at left the Covered Arc (CA) of
the PaK 40 H|AT gun is traced through its front
two hexsides, continuing out to include all
hexes within the area enclosed by the arrows.
To fire outside of this Covered Arc, the gun
will have to pivot to face a new hexspine, thus
changing its CA. If it turned ONE hexspine,
add a +3 HPT DRM.
This example also describes Vehicle Covered
Arc (VCA). Non-turreted vehicles MUST pivot
to engage targets outside their Covered Arc.
Turreted vehicles may instead pivot their turret
ONLY (i.e., change Turret Covered Arc [TCA]).
AWAY from the terrain as a reminder of this
in-hex location status.
8.20.61 LOS—LOS is traced to non moving
units normally (Exception: Opportunity Fire,
see 8.20.63). If the LOS hits any terrain in
the hex shared by the hexside Road before
it touches the Road art depiction in the hex,
it is blocked. Treat a LOS directly along a
hexside as touching a Road that crosses any
part of a hexside it is connected to.
8.20.62 Entry and Exit—A unit using a
Hexside Road to enter a new hex (i.e., in-
stead of entering the other terrain in the
hex) may only enter a new hex across a
hexside physically touched by the Road. A
unit exiting a hex along a hexside Road may
only enter new hexes connected to the Road.
8.20.63 Opportunity Fire —When using
Opportunity Fire at a unit newly entering a
hex along a hexside Road or Road + Build-
ing Road, a LOS is valid if any part of the
Road art can be touched on a hexside the
unit moved across to enter the hex before
hitting any terrain that would block it.
8.20.64 Vehicle Movement—Vehicles may
only use Assault movement on Hexside
Roads and pay ONE MP instead of HALF a
MP for entering along a Hexside Road. They
make all VCA changes normally when en-
tering hexes with hexside Roads. They must
pay to change VCA to follow the hexside
Road. The facing hit when a vehicle is fired
at is determined normally as if the hex con-
tained no terrain. LOS may be blocked by
terrain in the hex sharing the hexside, how-
ever, and is based on where the vehicle
entered the hexside in relation to where the
building is in the hex. Vehicles may end the
Movement Segment in hexside Road loca-
tions and may use Continued Movement
along them.
8.20.65 Vehicles Entering In-Hex Terrain—
A vehicle may not enter in-hex terrain once
it moves along a hexside Road location of
that hex. It must exit the hex first.
8.20.66 Limitations—No more than ONE
vehicle may be in the Hexside Road loca-
tion of a hex. Any vehicle with a Gun Size of
75 or greater, and an ‘A’ Gun Rating may
ONLY move along the hexside if its turret is
facing toward the FRONT covered arc (usu-
ally NO turret marker placed unless the
vehicle is Suppressed) or REAR covered arc.
8.20.661 Range Limit—Any firing unit in
either hex sharing a hexside Road fires at a
target along a shared hexside at a range of
‘0’ (zero).
8.20.67 Personnel Movement—Personnel
units may move along the hexside Road of a
the hex is affected (i.e., rubble at higher
levels is NOT considered to affect the EN-
TIRE hex).
8.22.3 Cover—Rubble provides Masonry,
Improved or Good cover based on the build-
ing color/type (gray/brown/Flimsy Huts).
Units may set up Hidden in Rubble and it
creates Airbursts.
8.22.4 Movement—Entry costs 2 MP. Only
Personnel and their Light and Medium weap-
ons, and FULLY tracked vehicles may set
up in and enter Rubble. Heavy weapons may
SET UP in Rubble hexes but may not EN-
TER during play. Personnel may not use
Running movement to enter and vehicles
must use Assault movement. A roll is re-
quired on the Immobilization Table AFTER
vehicle entry.
8.22.5 Creation—Rubble is cre-
hex that has NO enemy unit in its Ground
ated when building locations are
level. A Personnel unit may not voluntarily
destroyed as the result of an at-
END the Movement Segment in a Hexside
tack as per 8.3.9. Rubble is noted
Road.
on the map using rubble markers.
8.20.68 Personnel Entering In-Hex Ter-
8.23 SAND DUNES
rain —A Personnel unit moving along a
8.23.1 Description —Sand
hexside Road may enter the terrain in the
Dunes are found on Overlays
hex by paying the appropriate MP cost nor-
with an ‘Sd’ ID. They are
mally (unlike a vehicle). A Personnel unit
hexside terrain. Soft Sand is
that must end its movement involuntarily is
found on Sand Dune overlays.
considered IN the terrain, not along the
8.23.2 LOS—Sand Dune hexsides are Block-
hexside, and no Hexside Road may be en-
ing Hexside terrain treated in the same
tered by a Personnel unit if it does not have
manner as a Wall or High Wall. The default
enough MP available to do one of the follow-
height of any Sand Dune hexside is Level
ing:
+5 (i.e., like a Wall), but they may be speci-
a) Continue along the hexside road to end
fied as Level +10 (i.e., treat like a High Wall
its movement impulse in a non Hexside Road
for LOS but allow all units to cross) by SSR.
location;
For LOS purposes, treat Level +5 Sand
b) Enter the terrain in the hex after enter-
Dunes hexsides as if a Hillock contour runs
ing one or more Hexside Road locations.
along both sides of the hexside; +10 Sand
8.21 ROCK-STREWN TERRAIN
Dunes as if a Hill contour runs along the
8.21.1 Description —Rock-
hexside.
Strewn terrain is found on
8.23.3 Cover —Sand Dunes provide the
Overlays and is depicted by a
same cover benefits as a Wall/High Wall as
collection of gray stones.
well as LOS advantages of Hillock and Hill
8.21.2 LOS—Rock-Strewn
contours.
terrain is Level +5 Obscuring terrain that
8.23.31 Floorpan hits—A Floorpan Armor
affects the entire hex at ground level.
Hit may occur when an AFV crosses a Sand
8.21.3 Cover —Rock-Strewn terrain pro-
Dune hexside.
vides Good cover and creates Airbursts.
8.23.4 Movement—Crossing a Sand Dune
Units may set up hidden in Rock-Strewn
hexside costs DOUBLE the normal entry
hexes.
cost for the hex. Vehicles roll on the Immo-
8.21.31 Hull-Defilade —Turreted vehicles
bilization Table when crossing Level +10
may attempt to gain Hull-Defilade on a roll
Sand Dunes (i.e., not Level +5 dunes; note,
of ‘2’ or less in Rock-Strewn terrain.
this check is in addition to any called for by
8.21.4 Movement —Rock-Strewn terrain
the entry of soft sand terrain; roll AFTER
costs 2 MP points to enter. All vehicle types
the unit crosses the hexside).
must make a roll on the Immobilization Table
8.24 SCRUB
AFTER entering Rock-Strewn terrain. There
8.24.1 Description —Scrub
is no roll made for vehicles that set up
terrain is found on AD-
within.
VANCED TOBRUK (e.g., hex
8.22 RUBBLE
QQ20) maps and Overlays and
8.22.1 Description —Rubble
on other maps when stated via
represents shattered build-
Battlefield Walkaround.
ings, printed on-map or de-
8.24.2 LOS—Scrub is Clear Terrain.
picted by rubble markers. A
8.24.3 Cover—Scrub doesn’t provide any
Rubble location is treated as
cover. Units may set up Hidden in Scrub.
a building location for Victory Condition pur -
8.24.31 Hull-Defilade—Eligible vehicles set
poses.
up in or entering Scrub via Assault move-
8.22.2 LOS—Rubble is Level +5 Blocking
ment may attempt to gain Hull-Defilade on
terrain that affects the entire hex at ground
a roll of ‘1’ or less in Scrub terrain.
level. It rises +5 levels above the ground
8.24.4 Movement—Scrub terrain costs 2
level if ALL levels of a building are rubbled
MP to enter for ALL unit types.
(which is the case for all rubble PRINTED
8.25 SHELLHOLES
on map) or +5 levels above any level marker
8.25.1 D e s c r i p t i o n —A
a rubble marker is placed on if only an up-
Shellhole hex is depicted as
per floor is affected. In the case of rubble
two or more ‘holes’, with a
in building levels ABOVE ground level, use
dark brown center and light
the building art to determine if LOS through
brown, irregular edges.
18
8.25.2 LOS—Shellholes are Clear Terrain.
8.25.3 Cover —Shellholes provide Good
cover to Personnel units and their Light and
Medium weapons (i.e., not to Personnel man-
ning Heavy weapons or vehicles). In the example at left the two hexes to
8.25.4 Movement—Shellhole terrain costs the front of the turret marker define its
2 MP to enter. Wheeled Vehicles must make Turret Covered Arc (TCA). Use the cov-
a roll on the Immobilization Table AFTER ered arc of the turret (TCA), not that of
entering a Shellhole hex. There is no roll the vehicle (VCA), when a TURRET
made when setting up within. Any hex con- aspect is struck by a hit.
taining A ROAD hex containing Shellholes
All rules for facing apply to turrets, spe-
is treated as a SHELLHOLE hex INSTEAD
cifically the exceptions to FRONT/
(i.e., NO road movement bonuses apply; treat
FLANK and REAR/FLANK hits for mov-
as Shellholes instead).
8.26 SOFT SAND
ing vehicles.
8.26.1 Description —Soft
Sand terrain is represented
by any Overlay with an ‘S’ ID 8.28 SWAMP Position—TURRETED and FULLY tracked
and pale yellow terrain. 8.28.1 Description —Swamp vehicles may set up in or enter an UP posi-
8.26 .2 LOS —Soft Sand is terrain is depicted by a irregu- tion in a Wadi at a cost of 4 MP. BOTH of
Clear Terrain. lar blue-green ‘grass’. the two (or one if two are not available)
8.26.3 Cover—Soft Sand provides no cover. 8.28.2 LOS—Swamp is level GOOD cover hexsides must be eligible en-
It creates a Cushion effect. + 5 Obscuring terrain that af- try hexsides for the vehicle BEFORE the 4
8.26.4 Movement—Soft Sand costs 2 MP fects the entire hex at ground level. MP expenditure is made (often requiring the
for all units to enter. All Vehicles must roll 8.28.3 Cover—Swamp provides no cover. vehicle to chance its facing). A cost of 4 MP
on the Immobilization Table AFTER enter- It creates a Cushion effect. Units may set x 2 (i.e., 8 MP, as the vehicle is considered
ing. There is no roll made when setting up up hidden in a Swamp hex. to be using reverse movement) is paid to
within. A Vehicle may not tow another Ve- 8.28.4 Movement—It costs 2 MP for Per - exit, to a DOWN position. Simply announce
hicle into a Soft Sand hex, but may tow one sonnel units and any Light and Medium the movement expenditure and remove the
out. weapons carried to enter a swamp hex. Per- Level +10 marker. Turrets may be pointed
8.27 SUNKEN ROADS, PATHS AND RAIL- sonnel may not use Running movement in in any direction.
ROADS Swamp hexes. A non FULLY Tracked ve- 8.29.411 Opportunity Fire—For the pur-
8.27 .1 Description—This hicle entering a Swamp hex is automatically poses of Opportunity Fire HALF of the ex-
form of Linear Depression M-KILLed upon entry. Fully Tracked Vehicles penditure of MP is considered in the UP
depicts Roads, Paths and Rail- pay 4 MP to enter a Swamp hex and must position when a vehicle enters OR exits UP.
roads cut into the surround- roll on the Immobilization Table AFTER en- 8.29.42 H Weapons In Up and Down Posi-
ing terrain. These terrain types tering. There is no roll for vehicles setting tion—Heavy weapons may SET UP (only;
are depicted with a dark background with up within. Heavy weapons may not set up they may not enter UP positions during play)
lighter, jagged sides facing ‘downhill’ and or enter a Swamp hex (nor may they be in UP positions and receive GOOD cover
rules referring to Sunken ‘Roads’ refer to towed in unless using a road). across UP hexsides. Their manning crews
Paths and Railroads also. 8.29 WADI may move between UP and DOWN positions
8.27.2 LOS—While treating a Sunken Road 8.29.1 Description Wadi ter- normally.
normally as a Linear Depression, note the rain is represented by any 8.30 WALLS
art is wider than a Ravine or Wadi when Overlay with a ‘W’ identifica- 8.30.1 Description —Some
tracing LOS between units down in the ter- tion letter -number combina- map and overlay hexsides con-
rain, making it easier to maintain an LOS. tion. Wadis are Linear Depres- tain Wall artwork.
8.27.3 Cover—Personnel units may be in sions. 8.30.2 LOS—Walls are Level
an UP position in keeping with the LD rules. 8.29.2 LOS—Wadis follow the LOS rules of +5 Blocking Hexside terrain.
8.27.4 Movement —Movement along a Linear Depression except where noted be- 8.30.3 Cover—Personnel units and Heavy
Sunken Road, Path, or Railroad is handled low. weapons behind Wall hexsides receive Im-
as per the rules for Linear Depressions (Ex- 8.29.3 Cover —Wadis follow the rules of proved cover. Walls create Hull-Defilade for
ception: ALL vehicles must roll on the Im- Linear Depressions (see 8.29.41-2 for ve- all eligible vehicles. See 7.2 for the ability
mobilization Table when entering [roll AF- hicles and H weapons) of higher level ADJACENT units to negate
TER entering the hex] and exiting [roll BE- 8.29.4 Wadi End Hexes—The END of a Wadi cover.
FORE exiting] along a non ROAD hexside) (where the wadi art meets non-wadi terrain) 8.30.4 Movement—Unless using a Gate,
and the road/path/railroad rules. is considered to slope all eligible units pay ONE MP + CoT when
gradually up to level ‘0’, crossing a Wall hexside and wheeled vehicles
In the example at left a path in T18-
creating an entrance into may not cross except through a Gate. Half-
7 T19-T20 runs through woods
the Wadi that does not in- Tracked vehicles may cross but must roll
hexes. on the Immobilization Table BEFORE cross-
crease the movement cost
Squad 7 has no LOS to squad 5 to enter or exit (i.e., treat ing. Heavy weapons may never be pushed
due to the intervening woods art it as OPEN GROUND un- or towed across a Wall hexside.
in T19, along the LOS between the less other terrain is also 8.30.41 Gates—An opening in a Wall hexside
sighting dots of T18 and T20. in the hex) and does not represents a ‘Gate’. All units may use Gates
If squad 7 moves into hex T19, it require a roll on the Im- to cross Wall hexsides without extra MP cost
Woods art pays only 1 MP due to the path mobilization Table for ve- or risk of immobilization. A Gate is treated
blocksLOS in the hex. If there was no path, hicles. The Wadi art is still for attack purposes as a Wall hexside.

it would pay 2 MP for entering a considered to be at Level 8.30.42 Floorpan hits—Unless using a Gate

Woods hex.
Assume hex T19 was a HILL at
+10 levels higher than T20.
Squad 5 would STILL only pay 1
5 MP to move uphill due to the
Path. Any fire at 5 will still apply
WOODS cover state, even though
it is moving along a Path.
–10; h o w e v e r, the AFVs are subjected to Floorpan Armor Hits
‘gradual’ slope is repre- (see 7.6) when crossing a Wall hexside.
sented in game terms 8.31 WATER OBSTACLES
ONLY by the absence of 8.31.1 Description —Water
a roll for Immobilization. obstacles represent rivers,
A unit may STILL be UP creeks, and ponds.
8.31.11 Water Terrain Depic-
in an end hex normally.
tions—Each category of wa-
8.29.41 Vehicles In UP
ter obstacle is depicted using unique art-

19
work. All water terrain contains BLUE in
the ‘water’ portion of the art.
8.31.12 Pond Terrain—A Pond is depicted
by an irregular blue shape covering one or
a small number of hexes.
8.31.13 River Terrain—A River is depicted
by an irregular blue shape with a blue por-
tion at least two hexes wide.
8.31.14 Creek—A creek is depicted in the
same manner as a Ravine with the excep-
tion that a blue ‘water’ element is found in
the middle.
8.31.141 Creek Description—A Creek is a
Linear Depression.
8.31.142 Creek LOS —Creeks follow the
LOS rules for Linear Depression terrain.
8.31.143 Creek Cover—Creeks follow the
Cover rules of Linear Depressions normally
noting the restriction below on which units
may be in UP positions.
8.31.144 Creek Movement—Creeks follow
the movement rules for Linear Depression
terrain UNLESS the water depth is stated
to be ‘deep’ by SSR, in which case treat
affected Creeks in the same manner as a
River.
8.31.145 Creek Up Position Restriction—
Only Personnel and their carried L and M
weapons may be in the UP location in Creek
hexes.
8.31.2 LOS—All water hexes are considered
to be at -10 levels below the terrain they
are found printed on (or abut in the case of
a river). Water hexes themselves do not af-
fect LOS in any way.
8.31.3 River and Pond Entry—No unit may
enter a river or pond hex unless on a Bridge
or utilizing a Ford, Wading, or via Water -
craft.
8.31.4 Fords— Personnel and vehicles may
enter Pond and River hexes in any hex speci-
fied by SSR (or Battlefield Walkaround) to
be a ‘Ford’. Entry costs 4 MP per water hex
entered via Fording. Towing is allowed and
vehicles do not require a roll on the Immo-
bilization Table when entering a Ford. Per-
sonnel units may NOT use Running move-
ment in a Ford hex.
8.31.41 Wading —In some cases a water
obstacle may be defined as ‘shallow’, or entry
may be allowed in some or all water hexes
via Wading. When using wading in a NON-
Ford water hex, all vehicles must roll on
the Immobilization Table in EACH water hex
entered. Entry via wading costs 4 MP for
entering (i.e., FOUR Movement Points per
hex) for both vehicles and personnel. Tow-
ing is NOT allowed in NON-Ford water hexes
and Personnel units may NOT use Running
movement.
8.31.5 Bridges —A bridge is treated as a
Road crossing water terrain. Unless stated
otherwise by SSR, bridges are considered
to be at the same level as any road that
crosses them (Exception: see 8.31.51).
8.31.51 Bridge Hexsides —Treat all non-
Road hexsides between bridge and non-
bridge hexes as if a Wall is present where
the LOS hits the hexsides.
8.31.52 Under Bridge—Place a LOS +10
marker ON TOP OF any unit that is in the
terrain UNDER a bridge to signify this sta-
tus. LOS is blocked to/from units directly
above, on the bridge. Treat all other LOS to
a unit under a bridge normally (i.e., usually
down in an LD). When attacked by Indirect
Fire/OBA, the bridge overhead adds one
column shift LEFT if under a ‘dirt’ road or
TWO shifts LEFT for a
paved road. Otherwise,
units under a bridge may
only be attacked by units
ON the bridge using Gre-
nades (including Satchel/
Gammon Bombs), with no
‘under bridge’ shift applied.
A unit may NOT move di-
rectly from on top to under
a bridge unless stated oth-
erwise by SSR.
8.31.53 Pontoon Bridge—
Counters for Pontoon
Bridges are provided in
some ATS games. These are
placed as per SSR and are
treated normally as bridges with the follow-
ing exceptions.
8.31.531 Stacking Limit—A Pontoon Bridge
may never be overstacked. No unit may ever
be in a position under a Pontoon Bridge.
8.31.532 Destruction—A Pontoon Bridge
counter is removed by any attack in its hex
that would otherwise create rubble.
8.32 WOODS
8.32.1 Description —Woods
terrain is depicted by large
foliage pieces that touch one
another. Woods is flammable
terrain.
8.32.2 LOS—Woods is Level +10 Blocking
terrain (Exception: Forest).
8.32.21 Forest—In some scenarios some
or all Woods hexes are defined as ‘Forest’.
Forest is treated as Woods in all cases with
the exception that it is Level +20 Blocking
terrain.
8.32.22 Jungle—In some sce-
narios some or all
hexes are defined as ‘Jungle’.
Jungle is treated in the same
manner as Forest (e.g., Air -
bursts apply; +20 Blocking terrain) with the
following exceptions. Personnel may ONLY
enter Jungle hexes by Crawling or via Infil-
tration Movement. Only Tracked (i.e., NOT
half-tracks or wheeled) vehicles may enter
Jungle hexes but pay DOUBLE the normal
MP to enter. All types of units may SET UP
in Jungle hexes normally as if in Woods (in-
cluding hidden set up).
8.32.23 Bamboo— O n s o m e m a p s t h e
Battlefield Walkaround will state certain
hexes represent another tropical terrain
similar to Jungle called ‘Bamboo’. These
hexes are treated in the same manner as
Jungle, with the following exceptions. Bam-
boo is considered a Level +5 Blocking ter -
rain that affects the ENTIRE hex. Foxholes
may not set up in Bamboo. Units may set
up hidden in Bamboo.
8.32.24 Optional—If using Optional Hid-
den Set Up all units that set up in Jungle or
Bamboo hexes may set up Hidden.
8.32.3 Cover—Woods provide Good cover.
Woods creates Airbursts. Units may set up
hidden in Woods hexes.
8.32.4 Movement —It costs 2 MP for all
units to enter Woods. All Vehicles roll on
the Immobilization Table AFTER entering.
They may set up within with no penalty.
9.0 EMPLACEMENTS
9.1 OVERVIEW
9.1.1 Emplacements are man-made field
works, used to strengthen defensive posi-
20
If ‘D’ pivots its VCA one
hexspine to fire, a +3 HPT
DRM will be applied for the
75|B gun. A three column
shift LEFT will be applied to
any Casualty Table fire us-
ing the ‘4’ factor BMG if it
fires during the SAME im-
pulse the VCA changed. If
the BMG was fired during a
later impulse it would NOT
pay the 3L shift called for by
pivoting the VCA one
hexspine.
tions. They include Anti-Tank Trenches,
Blockhouses, Bunkers, Foxholes, Hedge-
hogs, Minefields, Roadblocks, Sangars,
Weapon Pits, and Wire.
9.1.2 Emplacements Positions—All Em-
placements except Minefields, Roadblocks
and Wire have two distinct Positions: ON
TOP and UNDER. Together, both positions
count as one Hex location for Stacking pur-
poses. Unless otherwise restricted, units
may move between positions during Move-
ment by spending 1 MP or by Infiltrating.
9.1.3 Emplacement Entry and Exit —A
unit may enter or exit a hex with an Em-
placement. Usually, a unit enters an Em-
placement hex by moving on top of the
Emplacement marker by Crawling, Infiltrat-
ing, or moving normally. In some cases, a
Personnel unit UNDER an Emplacement may
move to an adjacent Emplacement, and re-
main underneath. Example: A unit in Open
Ground moves into a hex containing a Hedge-
hog. It is placed on top. It then moves under
Woods the Hedgehog. If it wants to leave this Hedge-
hog and enter an adjacent one, it may enter
directly to UNDER the adjacent Hedgehog.
9.1.4 Set Up Restrictions-Only one Hedge-
hog/Bunker/Blockhouse/Foxhole may be
placed in a hex. NO Emplacement may be
set up in a Swamp or Water Obstacle hex.
9.1.5 Stacking Limits—Emplacements do
not affect stacking. The stacking limit ap-
plies for all units in the hex, whether on top
of or under an Emplacement marker.
9.1.6 Destroying Emplacements —Some
Emplacements may be destroyed by differ-
ent means. When destroyed they are re-
moved from the map.
9.2 ANTI-TANK TRENCH
9.2.1 Description —An Anti-
Tank (AT) Trench is a steep-sided
ditch used to block vehicular
movement. An AT Trench is
treated like a Hedgehog with the
following exceptions.
9.2.2 Movement Restrictions—No vehicu-
lar units of any type may enter hexes con-
taining AT Trenches.
9.2.3 Destruction—An AT Trench may be
eliminated only by a Dozer. See the rules
relating to the Demolition Table.
9.3 BLOCKHOUSE
9.3.1 Description —Block-
houses are concrete defensive
structures built in defensive
strongpoints. They are in use
only by SSR. Use Bunker
counters as Blockhouses and treat them as
Bunkers except as stated below.
9.3.2 Stacking—Up to SIX Stacking Points
of Personnel and any Light and Medium
weapons (not Heavy weapons) they carry
may be stacked under a Blockhouse marker.
A Blockhouse may not be Overstacked.
9.3.3 Occupant Restrictions—No unit may
fire (or serve as an FO) when UNDER a
Blockhouse.
9.3.4 Attacking Blockhouse Occupants—
Units under a Blockhouse counter may not
be attacked by Small Arms Gunfire or Gre-
nades, even from adjacent or same-hex
units. See 9.4.52 for Melee attacks.
9.3.5 Destruction —A Blockhouse is de-
stroyed in the same manner as a Bunker
(see 9.4.6).
9.4 BUNKER
9.4.1 Description —Bunkers
represent weapons pits covered
with reinforced roofs. Bunkers
have two positions:
On Top Effects—Units on top
of a Bunker occupy the other terrain in the
hex and receive no cover benefits.
Under Effects —Units under a Bunker
marker are assumed to be in FULL cover.
However, they may fire OUT to their maxi-
mum range (Exception: Indirect fire may not
be used from under a Bunker marker [spot-
ting from under is otherwise allowed]). See
12.5.661 for rules on targeting units in
FULL cover.
9.4.2 Set Up Restriction—Bunkers may not
be placed in a building or LD hex.
9.4.3 Stacking Restrictions—No more than
THREE Stacking Points of Personnel and
ONE Light, Medium or Heavy weapon may
be placed under a Bunker marker (Excep-
tion: One 1 SP unit may be added freely).
Units inside a Bunker may not be
Overstacked.
9.4.4 Movement restrictions—Units on top
of a Bunker never ‘drop’ into Full cover un-
der a Bunker. They may move under the
Bunker using Movement (at the cost of 1
MP) and via Infiltration. Friendly units may
not move under a Bunker that is already
occupied by enemy units, even by Infiltra-
tion. Enemy and friendly Personnel may
occupy the same hex if one side is UNDER
a Bunker.
9.4.5 Bunker Target and Location—Bun-
ker occupants are treated as being in FULL
cover (Exception: Under Effects, see 9.4.1;
Same Hex Fire, see 9.4.52; AP Fire, see
9.4.51) for targeting purposes. The Bunker
and its occupants are attacked as if it is a
SEPARATE location within the hex.
9.4.51 AP Fire—Direct Firing Guns using
AP (any form of AP, e.g., APCR, but not
SCW) may be used to depict firing of solid
shot through the Bunker’s vision slits. A
special +4 HPT DRM (replacing the +3 DRM)
is applied. AP fire has no effect on the Bun-
ker itself. It targets H weapons normally
(i.e., use the C4 table for guns of 20mm or
less); (Exception: No Target Size DRM is
applied) OR Personnel, the latter using a
FRAG equivalent of 4 GF. Units firing AP at
a Bunker do not use or place BOT.
9.4.52 Units in the same hex—Units oc-
cupying the same hex as a Bunker reduce
the cover of enemy units under the Bunker
to IMPROVED (+2/2L) cover to THEIR FIRE
ONLY. There is no Melee allowed against
units in a Bunker unless the unit(s) UN-
DER the Bunker marker Infiltrate out.
9.4.53 Flamethrower Attacks—FT may be
used to attack bunker occupants HOW-
EVER the 3L shift for FULL cover IS ap-
plied.
9.4.6 Bunker Destruction—A Bunker is
destroyed by HE (Direct or Indirect Fire) or
by a Satchel Charge attack following a C6+
result. When a Bunker is destroyed, all oc-
cupants (including their weapons) are de-
stroyed. Remove the Bunker marker from
play.
9.4.7 Morale and Overruns—Bunkers add
‘2’ to the Morale value for Personnel units
beneath them. Personnel units beneath Bun-
kers ignore Overruns.
9.5 FOXHOLE
9.5.1 Description —Foxholes
depict individual holes dug by
soldiers. Foxholes have two po-
sitions:
On Top Effects —Units receive
no cover from the Foxholes.
Under Effects—Only Personnel units and
their Light and Medium weapons may move
under a Foxhole marker. Units Under a
Foxhole marker receive Good cover.
9.5.2 Set Up Restrictions—Foxholes may
not be placed in Buildings, Linear Depres-
sions, Bamboo, Paved Roads, or on a Bridge.
9.5.3 Movement restrictions—Foxholes do
not affect movement for vehicles. Person-
nel must pay 1 MP to move under a Foxhole
counter after entering the hex. They may
also enter via Infiltration.
9.5.4 Morale effect —Personnel units un-
der a Foxhole marker do not suffer the -4
DRM to their Morale during an Overrun.
They still check morale when Overrun.
9.6 HEDGEHOG
9.6.1 Description—Hedgehogs
represent a network of trenches
that provide all-round protection
for Personnel units. Hedgehogs
have two positions:
On Top Effects—Personnel and their Light
and Medium weapons are in Improved cover.
No other units receive a cover benefit.
Under Effects—Only Personnel units and
their Light and Medium weapons may be
placed Under a Hedgehog marker during
movement and Infiltration. Personnel may
also ‘drop’ into Full cover when stacked on
top of a Hedgehog. Units UNDER a Hedge-
hog receive Full cover.
9.6.2 Set Up restrictions—Hedgehogs may
21
not be placed in a Building, Linear Depres-
sion, or on a Bridge.
9.6.3 Entry—Personnel may move under a
Hedgehog at the cost of 1 MP or via Infiltra-
tion. When moving from Hedgehog to
Hedgehog, the unit may remain in the same
position (i.e., under or on top of the marker),
including during Infiltration. Personnel un-
der a Hedgehog may also move and Infil-
trate to an adjacent AT T rench, Bunker,
Blockhouse, Weapons Pits, and a Building
Cellar and vice-versa. When UNDER, and
moving between Hedgehogs (or allowable
emplacements/terrain as per the immedi-
ately preceding sentence), ignore the cost
of any hexside terrain (e.g., Bocage; Wall).
9.6.4 Movement restrictions—Hedgehogs
do not affect movement for FULLY or HALF-
tracked vehicles. Wheeled vehicles must
check Immobilization AFTER entering a
Hedgehog hex (Exception: Treat Cave Dug-
outs as the hex terrain, i.e., no roll is made).
To pick up a weapon left un-attended un-
der a Hedgehog, a Personnel unit must
move under the marker. Personnel may not
use Running movement when moving from
under one emplacement to under another.
9.6.5 Morale effect—Hedgehogs add ‘1’ to
the Morale value for Personnel units that
receive cover benefits from the Hedgehog.
Personnel units in Full cover under a Hedge-
hog counter do not suffer the -4 DRM to
their Morale during an Overrun. They still
check morale when being Overrun.
9.6.6 Cave Dugouts—Cave Dug-
outs are treated as the terrain
in the hex for vehicles. Person-
nel treat Cave Dugouts in the
same manner as Hedgehogs,
with the exceptions in 9.6.61-7.
9.6.61 Entry Restrictions—Only Japanese
units may enter/set up UNDER a Cave
Dugout counter. Unless using Infiltration,
moving UNDER a Cave Dugout may only be
accomplished from the hex the counter is
in and/or any adjacent LOWER level hex
that does not involve moving more than +10
levels across a hexside. No vehicle may set
up or move UNDER a Cave Dugout emplace-
ment and ONLY Japanese Personnel and
their carried Light and Medium weapons may
In the example at left the two hexes
to the front of the vehicle marker
define its front target FACING also
known as Vehicle Covered Arc
(VCA). The term ‘aspect’ is used to
define the portion of a vehicle
struck and requires use of the Hit
Location Table.
HPT hits from within its VCA, as
well as exactly along the hexsides
marked ‘Front’ are FRONT facing
hits. Hits from within the FLANK
and REAR facings are also de-
fined.
The exception to the example at
left is if the target is MOVING. If
the LOS is traced exactly between
the flank and the front, the facing
is FRONT if the target is MOVING
and flank if it is STATIONARY. If
the LOS is traced exactly between
the flank and rear, it is rear if
STATIONARY and flank if
MOVING.
MOVE under, including when using Tunnel
Infiltration. Heavy weapons may also SET
UP under Cave Dugouts, and may be pushed
out, but never into the SAME HEX as the
Cave and NEVER back under a Cave Dug-
out once exited. Heavy weapons exit is al-
lowed ONLY to an adjacent hex, across a
hexside that involves a change in levels of
no more than -10 levels.
9.6.62 Set Up and Multi-Level LOS—A Cave
Dugout counter may ONLY be set up in a
hex that has an LOS to LOWER level ter -
rain along at least ONE hexside that is at
least -10 (minus ten) Levels. Any unit UN-
DER a Cave Dugout traces its LOS (and vice
versa) FROM the level of the hex’s center -
dot and/or the lower level of any adjacent
hex (noting Precipitous Terrain and Cliff
hexsides allow multiple LOS levels). How-
ever, a unit under a Cave Dugout marker
has no LOS (and thus may not attack; see
9.6.621 exception) into its hex or other
hexes of the same level unless the LOS
crosses a hexside with -10 or lower terrain
(i.e., it may ONLY trace LOS across hexsides
with lower level terrain, including on more
than one ‘side’ of the hex, assuming the hill
‘drops off’ on more than one hexside).
9.6.621 Satchel Charge Same Hex At-
tacks—A Satchel Charge MAY be used to
attack from the same hex as a Cave Dugout
marker IF the unit carrying the SC is on a
HIGHER level than the actual location of
the Cave. A SC may NOT be used (including
by Cave occupants) against units in a higher
level location.
9.6.63 Tunnel Infiltration—Any Japanese
Personnel unit UNDER a Cave Dugout
counter (including marked with FC as per
9.6.64) that is eligible to use Infiltration may
do so to move UNDER any Cave Dugout
counter within FOUR hexes noting the fol-
lowing restrictions. This type of Infiltration
is called Tunnel Infiltration and may also be
used by Japanese Personnel to/from UN-
DER Blockhouse, Bunker, Cave Dugout and
Hedgehog counters. If the Infiltrating unit
is marked with an FC marker (i.e., in CAVE
INTERIOR COVER) it may remain marked
in a new Cave location or remove the marker
upon placement in its new hex.
9.6.631 Tunnel Infiltration Restrictions—
No unit may Infiltrate under a Cave Dugout
in violation of stacking limits. A path of
hexes must be traced that does NOT cross
a level that is LOWER in levels than BOTH
Cave Dugout counters.
9.6.64 Cave INTERIOR Cover—Japanese
Personnel/Heavy Weapons under a Cave
Dugout may set up or ‘drop’ into a special
for m of CAVE INTERIOR COVER. Being
under a Cave marker does NOT provide this
form of special cover. This ‘drop’ may ONLY
be conducted by units ALREADY under a
Cave Dugout counter (mark them with an
FC marker after they drop or mark them
during set up) in the same manner as drop-
ping into FULL cover when stacked on a
hedgehog. A unit that drops into CAVE IN-
TERIOR cover may ONLY be attacked by
DIRECT fire from ADJACENT hexes.
9.6.65 Sealing Cave Dugouts—A Cave is
‘sealed’ by an HE (Direct or Indirect Fire)
attack following a C9+ result (see Table FR)
or by a Satchel Charge C6+ (see Table DT).
Remove the Cave marker and all units un-
der it.
9.6.66 SCW Attacks —Shaped Charge
Weapons may fire at units under Cave Dug-
fully ‘Forced’ the Minefield. If the die roll is
out markers and apply a FULL cover HPT
equal to or less than the Minefield Density,
DRM for units stacked under a Cave marker
the Forcing attempt has failed and any unit(s)
(including HALVING Frag factors as per
entering that triggered the forcing roll is
12.5.6611).
attacked by the Mines. If more than one
9.6.67 Fire to Full Range—Unless marked
Personnel unit enters, ONE forcing roll is
with an FC marker as per 9.6.64, a unit
made and the resulting casualties are dis-
under a Cave marker may fire/receive fire
tributed normally.
to/from its maximum normal range.
9.7.71 Hidden Minefield —There is a -1
9.7 MINEFIELDS
DRM for any Forcing attempt when enter -
9.7.1 Description—Minefield
ing an enemy Hidden Minefield.
markers depict a combination of
9.7.8 Creating Lanes —Assault moving
AP and AT mines. Some depict AT
FULLY tracked vehicles may create a
mines only.
Minefield Lane. A Lane is created if a ve-
9.7.2 Set Up Restrictions—Minefields may
hicle successfully enters the hex without
be set up in hexes containing other types of
being attacked by the mines. Place a
emplacements. See 8.20.5 for road set up
Minefield Lane marker in the hex.
restrictions.
9.7.9 Minefield Attacks—Units unsuccess-
9.7.3 Minefield Density—On the back of
ful in Forcing a mine hex or attacked auto-
each Minefield marker, the field Density is
matically while entering suffer the following
indicated in the form of a number. The Den-
damage:
sity is never revealed to the Opponent.
9.7.91 AFVs—Are M-KILLed and must per-
9.7.4 Minefield Quantity —In some sce-
form a check on the Bail Out Chart. Any
narios the Defender is given a quantity of
Personnel units transported on that AFV are
Mines in his OOB. This quantity corre-
placed on the hex, and suffer automatic
sponds to the total density of mines the
minefield attack unless the mines in the hex
player may set up. Any quantity of Mine
were ONLY AT mines.
markers may be used, as long as this num-
9.7.92 APC and Trucks—Are K-KILLed and
ber is not exceeded. Once a total quantity
replaced by burning wrecks. Any units be-
of markers is selected, up to the quantity
ing carried are placed in the hex and suffer
given for that scenario, the markers are then
an attack unless the mines in the hex were
placed on the map (unless set up Hidden)
ONLY AT mines. Units being Towed are oth-
by the Defender with the number face
erwise unaffected (they remain in the hex),
down.
unless a Towed Gun, which is marked with
9.7.41 AT Minefields —Some
an F-KILL marker.
Minefield markers only show
9.7.93 Personnel Units—They are attacked
Anti-Tank Teller mine art (a round
on the Casualty Table by FRAG Factors
‘pie-plate’) on them. AT mines ALL
equal to the Minefield Density number mul-
have a strength of ‘3’ and when depicted as
tiplied by four, using STATIONARY cover.
part of a side’s OOB, represent the quan-
These attacks are conducted immediately
tity of AT mine COUNTERS provided. Per-
upon entry, and may ALSO take place dur-
sonnel units ignore such AT Minefields, i.e.,
ing the Infiltration Phase.
they are not attacked when entering. Only
9.7.10 Dummy M i n e f i e l d s —Dummy
Vehicles are attacked.
Minefields, marked fields containing no
9.7.42 Remove Non Hidden Mines—A Per-
mines, were often laid between real ones to
sonnel unit of at least two Stacking Points
increase coverage. To simulate this, some
may ‘pick up’ non-hidden mine markers set
scenarios provide ‘Dummy’ minefield mark-
up in bridge/paved road/airfield locations
ers by SSR. If enemy units attempt to Force
as if it is a Light weapon. The mine marker
a Dummy Minefield, the true nature of the
is immediately removed from play.
Minefield marker must be revealed. The
9.7.5 Units entering a friendly Minefield—
marker stays in place, face down, challeng-
Most Minefields contained secret lanes
ing the Opponent to remember its location.
through which the laying side could safely
9.7.11 Hidden Minefields—Minefields are
pass. Crawling, Infiltrating or Assault mov-
set up Hidden by SSR only. The location of
ing Personnel units, or Assault moving ve-
Hidden Minefields is recorded, including the
hicles, enter a friendly minefield hex with-
Minefield Density in the hex. A Hidden
out any effect. Running Personnel units or
Minefield is treated normally in every re-
Cross-Country moving Vehicles must make
spect and is placed on map when an enemy
a Forcing attempt when entering a friendly
unit enters the hex or finds it via search-
minefield.
ing. Apply a –1 DRM for any Forcing at-
9.7.6 Entering Enemy minefields—Crawl-
tempt in a Hidden minefield. Dummy
ing, Assault moving or Infiltrating Person-
Minefields may not be set up Hidden.
nel units, or Assault moving Vehicles, enter
Minefields may not be Hidden in Paved Road
an enemy Minefield hex without any effect
hexes or on a Bridge.
if moving along a Minefield Lane as do Per-
9.7.12 Searching For Mines—Any Person-
sonnel using non Running movement from
nel unit may spend a full Movement Seg-
under -to-under an emplacement. All other
ment in its current hex to ‘search’ for Hid-
units that are not Running or using Cross-
den minefields. The unit is considered to
Country movement require a ‘Forcing’ die
use Crawling movement although it does not
roll upon entry of a mine hex.
exit its hex. Any Hidden Minefield marker(s),
9.7.61 Automatic Attack—Running Person-
adjacent to the Searching unit, is (are) placed
nel units and Cross-Country moving vehicles
on map. No attack is made against the
are automatically attacked by the Minefield
Searching unit, it doesn’t enter the Mine hex.
when entering an enemy Minefield hex.
9.7.13 Mine Clearance—Remove any mines
9.7.7 Forcing a Minefield—When resolv-
in a hex attacked by Indirect Fire obtaining
ing a Forcing attempt, roll a die immedi-
a ‘C6’ or higher result in its location.
ately. A die roll greater than the Minefield
Density value means the unit has success-
22

9.8 ROADBLOCK
9.8.1 Description—A Roadblock
is a form of Emplacement de-
signed to stop vehicles. A Road-
block marker has three arrows
on it. When setting it up, point
the arrows at three hexsides. The Roadblock
is actually considered ON the hexsides, treat
these three hexsides as if they contain a
WALL with the following exceptions.
9.8.2 Set Up Restrictions—Roadblocks may
not be placed in a Linear Depression. Nor
may one be placed in a Building hex unless
there is a Building + Road combination. If
placed in a Building Road hexside or on a
Bridge, only the hexside crossed by the
Road contains the ‘Wall’.
9.8.3 Movement restrictions—No Vehicle
may cross a Roadblock hexside.
9.8.4 Clearing Roadblocks—A Roadblock
marker is removed by any C6 or better re-
sult obtained by Indirect Fire in its hex OR
via Demolition/Dozer OR if the Roadblock
itself is targeted for an attack by Direct Fire
HE (treat it as a Building target) and a C6+
is obtained.
9.9 SANGAR
9.9.1 Description—A Sangar is
an emplacement constructed
above the earth by piling stones.
Treat Sangars as Weapons Pits
with the following exceptions.
On Top Effects—Units on top of a Sangar
do not occupy the Emplacement and receive
no defensive advantages.
Under Effects—Personnel and Heavy weap-
ons are in Good cover. Vehicles receive Hull-
Defilade status.
9.9.2 Set Up Restriction—Sangar markers
may not be placed in a building hex or a
Linear Depression.
9.9.3 Stacking Restrictions—Each Sangar
may hold one Heavy weapon and its crew
OR one vehicle OR up to THREE Stacking
Points of Personnel and their Light and Me-
dium weapons. A Sangar may not be
Overstacked.
9.9.31 K-KILL and F-KILL Units in
Sangars —A unit continues to occupy a
Sangar regardless of its damage status. A
vehicle that is K-KILLed while in a Sangar
stays there (replaced by the appropriate
wreck counter, i.e., Burning or non-Burn-
ing) and prevents other units from occupy-
ing that Sangar. Likewise, a Heavy weapon
unit that is F-KILLed while in a Sangar stays
there, preventing other units from occupy-
ing the Sangar. Heavy weapons, vehicles and
Wrecks Under a Sangar may be Towed out
normally by Vehicles in the hex (i.e., on top
of the Sangar marker) without the towing
vehicle having to move under the Sangar.
Personnel may move under a Sangar to push
a Heavy weapon out using normal move-
ment rules and a cost of 2 MP.
9.9.4 Movement Restrictions —Vehicles
and Heavy weapons may never move under
a Sangar during play; they may only set up
under one. When overruning a Sangar hex
attacking vehicles do not move under the
emplacement. Sangars do not affect move-
ment through their hex.
9.9.5 Floorpan Hits—AFVs exiting a Sangar
are subject to Floorpan hits in the same
manner as if crossing a Wall hexside, with-
out reference to hexside.
9.9.6 Sangar Destruction—A Sangar is re-
moved from play when any target within is
hit by HE ammunition, either by direct or
indirect fire, that results in a C4 or greater
on the Casualty Table. Overrun of a unit in
a Sangar by any fully-tracked AFV removes
the Sangar AND any Heavy crew-served
weapons (and Light and Medium weapons
NOT carried by a Personnel unit) in it. Any
Personnel (including the manning crew of
the H weapon) receives no additional pen-
alty from the overrun that destroys the
Sangar (i.e., they check morale during Over-
runs, applying the normal morale penalty
with no increase).
9.10 WEAPONS PIT
9.10.1 Description —Weapons
Pit counters depict dug-in gun
positions providing partial pro-
tection for weapons, Personnel,
and vehicles. Weapons Pits have
two positions:
On Top—Units on top of a Weapons Pit do
not occupy the Emplacement and are con-
sidered in the hex’s terrain.
Under Effects:
Personnel units—Receive Improved cover.
Heavy weapons may not set up or move in
Full cover, but their crew may.
Heavy weapons—Improved cover, and they
benefit from an additional +1 HPT DRM for
Direct Fire. Their crew, like any Personnel
unit, receives Improved cover, but may also
move or drop into Full cover like a Hedge-
hog. When the crew is in Full cover, it may
not fire its Heavy weapon.
NON-Very Small Vehicles—Are in H-D po-
sitions. They may not use a BMG (bow ma-
chine-gun).
Very Small Vehicles—Are in FULL cover.
They may not fire ANY weapons except
against adjacent units and aircraft.
9.10.2 Set Up Restrictions—Weapons Pit
markers may not be placed in a building
hex, or on a bridge.
9.10.3 Stacking Restrictions—Each Weap-
ons Pit may hold ONE Heavy weapon unit
and its crew OR one vehicle OR up to
THREE Stacking Points of Personnel and
their Light and Medium weapons. A Weap-
ons Pit may not be Overstacked.
9.10.31 K-KILL and F-KILL Units IN Weap-
ons Pits —A unit continues to occupy a
Weapons Pit regardless of its damage sta-
tus. A Vehicle that is K-KILLed while in a
Weapons Pit is replaced by the appropriate
Wreck counter, which prevents other units
from occupying that Weapons Pit. Likewise,
a Heavy weapon unit that is F-KILLed while
under a Weapons Pit prevents other units
from occupying the Weapons Pit. Heavy
weapons, vehicles and wrecks under a
Weapons Pit may be towed out normally by
vehicles in the hex without having to move
under the Weapons Pit. Personnel may
move under a Weapon Pit marker for 2 MP
to Push an H weapon out.
9.10.4 Movement restriction —Vehicles
and Heavy weapons may never move Un-
der a Weapons Pit during play; they may
only set up under one. A vehicle may exit
from under a Weapons Pit by paying ONE
MP, and is placed on top of the marker; it
may then move normally. Weapons Pits do
not affect movement through their hex, not-
ing the ability to enter from an adjacent
Hedgehog (and vice-versa) while staying
under each Emplacement (and thus still in
Full cover).
9.10.5 Morale effect—Personnel units in
23
Full cover under a Weapons Pit counter do
not suffer the +4 DRM during an Overrun.
They still check morale during Overruns.
9.11 WIRE
9.11.1 Description—Wire repre-
sents rolled or staked concertina
wire used to hinder enemy move-
ment on the battlefield.
9.11.2 Set Up restrictions—Wire may not
be placed in a Building hex. Wire may be
placed in the same hex as other Emplace-
ments (e.g., Mines).
9.11.3 Movement r e s t r i c t i o n s —No
Wheeled vehicle may enter a hex contain-
ing Wire. Tracked and Half-Tracked Vehicles
must check for Immobilization AFTER en-
tering a Wire hex. Personnel units may only
enter Wire hexes by Crawling or Infiltra-
tion. All may EXIT freely.
9.11.4 Clearing Wire—A Wire counter is
removed by Indirect Fire HE receiving a ‘C6’
result or greater. A LANE may be created
through a Wire hex by a TRACKED (not Half-
Track) vehicle that uses Assault Movement
and successfully enters AND exits the Wire
hex. There is no effect to the Wire when a
vehicle enters and becomes M-KILLed.
10.0 MORALE
10.1 OVERVIEW
Each Personnel unit has a morale value that
represents combat worthiness. The morale
value is the third number displayed on each
Personnel counter. This value is used as
the unit’s base morale value when morale
checks are called for due to various cir -
cumstances (e.g., casualties; overrun).
10.1.1 Axis and Allied Leaders
For all Morale purposes, including rallying
Broken and Surrendered units, German
leaders are considered ‘friendly’ to all Axis
Personnel (e.g., Italian; Romanian; Hungar-
ian). Non German Axis leaders are only con-
sidered friendly to Personnel of their own
nationality. British/American leaders are
considered friendly to Allied troops.
10.2 MORALE SUPPORT RANGE (MSR)
Morale Support Range is defined as the hex
occupied by the unit or any hex adjacent to
the unit. Some friendly and most enemy
units within Morale Support Range alter a
unit’s current morale value. There must be
LOS (i.e., not across interior building 'black
bar' hexsides, Cliff hexside, or upper levels
of a building out of a unit’s LOS) and able to
be reached via crawling and/or Infiltration,
modify morale. These include Passengers,
as long as they are NOT in FULL cover in
the vehicle transporting them.
10.2.1 Morale Modifiers
Some friendly and most enemy units within
MSR alter a unit’s current morale value, as
well as some conditions (e.g., in a minefield).
There is no ‘maximum’ morale value.
10.2.2 Morale Table
The Morale Table (Table M) provides morale
modifiers related to friendly and enemy units
within MSR. The entry for “Each 3 Stacking
Point Personnel unit” implies that only full
Squads influence morale value (Exception:
USMC). Additionally, a maximum of ONE
friendly Leader may affect morale. No other
friendly units (e.g., reduced squads; crews)
increase morale, but ONE surrendered
friendly 2+ Stacking Point unit (i.e., non
leader/BAR Gunner/FO/other 1 SP unit)
within MSR reduces morale (Exception:
USMC/Japanese ignore surrendered
friendly units within MSR; Italian units re-
duce morale -2 for EACH surrendered unit).
10.2.21 Morale Table Modifiers —The
modifiers listed on the Morale Table reduce
or increase morale (i.e., they are NOT used
as DRM).
10.2.3 Intimidation
During the End of Turn Segment, check for
Intimidation for all Personnel units within
MSR to at least one enemy unit. If, using all
applicable morale modifiers, such a unit’s
morale value is less than zero, it immedi-
ately surrenders (and is removed from play)
UNLESS a non-Broken/Surrendered
friendly leader is in its location or within
MSR. Leaders ignore Intimidation.
10.2.4 Morale Check (MC) Order
Check morale in the following order when
the listed units are present:
1) Officer
2) NCO
3) All other units at the owning player’s dis-
cretion (Exception: Commissars do not
check).
10.2.5 Adjusted Morale
When checking morale, use the adjusted
value, which includes all morale modifiers
from the Morale Table. The adjusted mo-
rale value changes immediately if friendly
units modifying morale either break or sur-
render.
Example: If a leader fails a Casualty MC or a
friendly unit surrenders, other friendly units
in their MSR that subsequently check their
morale must immediately adjust their mo-
rale.
10.3 CHECKING MORALE
The following situations cause Personnel to
check morale. Place a BROKEN marker on
units that fail.
a) Casualty MC: Casualties cause all friendly
Personnel units in a Location to check mo-
rale (see 12.5.95);
b) Collateral Fire MC : Personnel must
check morale when entering a Location con-
taining a Collateral Fire ‘C’ marker (see
12.5.101);
c) Overrun MC: Overrun attacks cause tar-
geted Personnel units to check morale (see
12.14.61);
d) Surrender MC: Surrendering Personnel
units check morale to avoid being eliminated
(see 10.8.1);
e) Rally MC: Broken Personnel units trying
to recover (see 10.8).
10.3.1 Die roll
Check morale by rolling one die and com-
paring its result to the unit’s adjusted mo-
rale value. If the result exceeds the adjusted
value, the morale check failed. If it is less
than or equal to the adjusted value the mo-
rale check succeeds. Note: In some cases
rolling EQUAL to the adjusted morale value
may Pin Down a unit (see 10.6).
10.3.2 Automatic Results
A MC automatically succeeds on a DR of 1.
Conversely, a MC automatically fails on a
DR of 0 (Exception: Unless Courage results
in a ‘00’, see 10.4).
10.3.3 Commissars and Japanese ‘*’ Of-
ficers
Commissars and Japanese officers with a
morale value denoted by an asterisk NEVER
check Morale. Friendly units stacked with
these Personnel units only fail MC on a DR
of 0 and each of those failing their MC then
suffers a C1 (no subsequent MC following
this C1) instead of being Broken AND Cour-
age may not result.
10.4 COURAGE
10.4.1 Any Personnel unit that
rolls a 0 (zero) during any MC (in-
cluding while attempting to Rally)
immediately makes a subsequent
die roll. Another 0 results immediate rallies
the unit and marks it with a Courage marker.
Mark it with a ‘medal’ marker (a handful of
historical medals are provided; they are all
the same in game terms). If a second 0 is
not rolled after the first 0, the unit fails its
MC normally.
10.4.2 Courage Benefits
Units marked with a medal are immune
from MC for the remainder of the scenario.
Double their Melee Value against Vehicles
and Personnel (including doubling of leader
benefits). They may also fire any type of
weapon with no penalties for reduced Crews,
etc., including leaders manning weapons and
serving as crews. Do not mark them as
Winded when using Running Movement;
they may use running movement each turn
and do not suffer from exhaustion penal-
ties.
10.5 BROKEN UNITS
10.5.1 Restricted Use
Broken units may not fire or infiltrate.
10.5.2 Reaction
Broken Personnel react as follows.
10.5.21 In Emplacement—They ‘drop’ into
Full cover when first becoming Broken (even
if they already moved or fired) if the Em-
placement allows them to do so, and re-
main there for the remainder of the turn.
10.5.22 Passengers—Mark them with a FC
marker when first becoming Broken if the
Transport Vehicle provides Full cover; if not,
they immediately unload in the current hex.
10.5.23 Enemy Entry—Immediately elimi-
nate a Broken unit if an ARMED enemy unit
enters/Infiltrates into its location (see the
exceptions in 10.5.24).
10.5.24 Overrun & Melee vs. Vehicle—
Broken units may remain in the same hex
with an enemy vehicle after breaking as a
result of an Overrun attack (see 12.14.61)
or by failing a Melee vs. Vehicle morale check
(see 12.15.47).
10.5.3 Broken Unit Movement
Broken Units may never Infiltrate. A Per -
sonnel unit may not move during the turn it
breaks. Those that broke during a previous
turn MAY move, subject to the following
restrictions.
a) They may only use Assault or Crawling;
b) They may not move closer (or adjacent in
a multi-location hex) to enemy units within
their LOS and Spotting Range. If they are
ineligible to move due to LOS to enemy units,
they may crawl one hex or location in any
direction otherwise eligible for movement.
10.6 PINNED DOWN UNITS
If a moving Personnel unit (even if already
Broken) passes a morale check by rolling
equal to its morale value it must immedi-
ately stop moving unless a non-broken
leader is also in the location. Treat such
units as temporarily ‘pinned down.’ They may
Infiltrate normally during the Infiltration
Phase if otherwise eligible.
Example: A 7|5|8 squad that rolls an ‘8’
while moving must immediately stop.
10.7 SURRENDER
10.7.1 Place a ‘Surrender’ marker on a unit
when any of the following occurs:
a) An already broken unit fails a non-rally
MC;
b) The unit fails a non-rally MC while in MSR
of ANY non-broken/surrendered enemy
Personnel unit (Exceptions: Overrun and
Melee, see 10.5.24).
10.7.2 Surrender Effects
A Surrendered unit is treated like a Broken
unit, with the following additional restric-
tions:

In the example at left, Crusader ‘C’ is in a Hull-Defilade position to

Pzkw IIf ‘C’ (and vice versa). It can ONLY be hit in the turret, which
is showing the Crusader a FRONT facing. The Crusader is not in
defilade from ATR ‘C’—it can be hit in the hull REAR or turret SIDE.
Squad ‘9’ has no LOS to squad ‘21’. Squad ‘15’ has a LOS to all the
units shown and is at Level +5.
Squad ‘10’ can see squad ‘21’ and is in GOOD cover to ‘21’, Pzkw IIf
‘C’, Stuart ‘K’, and Crusader ‘C’. If squad ‘15’ was an enemy unit, it
would deny the GOOD cover when firing at ‘10’ due to being ADJA-
CENT.
Stuart ‘K’ is not automatically in Hull-Defilade—it may roll when in a
hex up on a hillock—after setting up in or entering the hex. If squad
‘21’ was ALSO on a hillock, it could NOT see ‘9’ since ‘9’ is beyond
the first hex of the new Hillock along 21’s LOS.
If ‘10’ was in FULL cover in a hedgehog, it would be out of LOS of
all units in the example except ‘9’ and the adjacent ‘15’.

24
a) It may neither move nor Infiltrate; dered units that fail their End of Turn Seg- and crossing hexsides.

b) Surrendered units may not be targeted ment MC. 11.1.21 End of Move— Once a player takes
for fire unless other enemy units are in their 10.9 CAPTURING ENEMY UNITS his hand off of a moving unit this ends its

location or another enemy unit is targeted 10.9.1 Any weapon unit or non-K-KILLed move and it may not be changed or reposi-

by FFE that also hits the surrendered units; vehicle may be ‘captured’ and used as if it tioned. Place a Moved arrow on or behind it

c) Enemy units may freely enter their loca- were a friendly piece of equipment. (based on the type used).

tion if no non Surrendered friendly units 10.9.2 Weapon units—L, M, and H weap- 11.1.3 Entering Enemy Hexes— Person-
are present; ons are captured if they are alone in a loca- nel may only enter an enemy-occupied lo-

d) Surrendered units reduce the morale of tion when an enemy unit enters. They may cation during Infiltration or if all enemy units

friendly units within MSR (Exception: be picked up normally and subsequently within are marked as surrendered. Vehicles

USMC/Japanese units). used by the new owners. There is no addi- may enter enemy-occupied hexes freely. (Ex-

10.7.3 Automatic Elimination—Automati- tional penalties applied for use of enemy ception: A TRUCK type vehicle may never

cally eliminate a unit marked as Surren- units. stop in one unless forced to by enemy fire).

dered if any of the following occurs: 10.9.3 Unarmed Trucks—Unarmed trucks Note: If a hex has more than one LOCA-

i) It fails a non-rally MC; (always YELLOW vehicle counters with TION (e.g., BUILDING hexes with multiple

ii) An enemy Personnel unit moves into or white movement icons; armed trucks are ‘floors’, including rooftop and cellar locations)

Infiltrates into its location; always the color of one nationality) are cap- Personnel units may enter non enemy-oc-

iii) It is still Surrendered at the end of the tured automatically if they are in a location cupied locations within that hex even if one

End of Turn Segment. at the End of Turn Segment (only) with a or more other locations in the hex are en-

10.8 RALLYING non-moving enemy AFV, APC, or non-bro- emy-occupied. If Hidden enemy units are

Broken and Surrendered units may be re- ken Personnel unit. They may be used with- in a location about to be entered by a friendly

stored to their normal function by a friendly out penalty once captured. unit, place the Hidden unit(s) on-map and

(noting 10.1.1 restrictions) NON-Broken 10.9.4 Bailed Out APCs/AFVs—Bailed Out all friendly PERSONNEL units must stop

leader via the ‘rally’ process. Surrendered vehicles are captured automatically. The their movement in the last hex location they

units may also ‘improve’ their state to Bro- procedure is the same as for weapon units were in before entering the hidden unit’s

ken without a leader being present. A NON- with the exception that only CREW Person- hex or location.

leader Personnel unit is only eligible to at- nel units may capture these vehicles and Example: A unit moving ‘downstairs’ from a

tempt to rally if a NON-Broken friendly they may only be captured during the End Level +20 to a Level +10 location in a build-

leader is in its location of Turn Segment. A captured vehicle may ing must stop in the +20 location if a Hidden

10.8.1 Self Rally —A Broken leader does fire its weapons normally (Exception: Un- unit is in the +10 location. For Opportunity

not need another leader to attempt Rally and less F-KILLed). Captured vehicles may never Fire, the unit is considered to have moved

may BEGIN the segment broken. If it ral- move or change VCA/TCA. only in the first location, in this case, the +20

lies it may immediately attempt to rally other 10.9.5 Armed Vehicles— Non-Bailed Out level location. Note: When Personnel are us-

friendly units. Crews (see 14.2.7) and all 1 armed vehicles may not be captured. ing Platoon movement, ONLY the entering

SP Personnel units (e.g., BAR Gunner) may 10.9.6 Towing Captured Units—Captured unit(s) must back up one MP expenditure; if

also attempt to rally without a leader present H weapons and vehicles may be towed nor- otherwise eligible the rest of the Platoon may

but do NOT rally other units. mally. continue moving.

10.8.11 Rally Attempt Limit—One morale 10.9.7 Victory Point Bonus—In those sce- 11.2 MOVEMENT ELIGIBILITY—Units not
check for rally purposes may be made per narios using victory points, captured units already marked as Moved, Fired, M-KILL,

unit per turn (i.e., rallying takes place dur- are worth double the normal VP value. Bail Out, newly broken or Surrendered are

ing the End of Turn Segment ONLY). Once 10.10 CROSSFIRE ELIGIBLE to move.

rallied, leaders may allow other units to at- 10.10.1 Creation and Effects—When two 11.3 PERSONNEL MOVEMENT—Personnel
tempt to rally during the same End of Turn consecutive (i.e., two impulses) enemy GF units do not have a movement allowance

Segment. or Grenade Attacks cross two directly op- printed on their counters. The MP provided

10.8.2 Rally Failure and Success posing hexsides of the target unit’s location, are the same for all Personnel units and

Any unit that fails to Rally simply remains a ‘Crossfire’ exists. From the second attack based on the movement type used (Excep-

Broken (Exception: Surrendered units on, morale is reduced by TWO for all CA- tion: Leaders add 1 MP for their own move-

checking morale as per 10.8.4 are elimi- SUALTY morale checks for the remainder ment and any other units moving with them

nated; if attempting rally with a NON Bro- of THAT turn in THAT location. HPT/OBA in the same stack/Platoon, see 13.1.41).

ken leader they remain in play marked as attacks NEVER create a Crossfire. Mark 11.3.1 Movement Types—Personnel may
Surrendered). Surrendered units that rally affected locations with two moved markers. use one of the following Movement types

are returned to their normal function (i.e., during a Fire & Movement Segment.

they are NOT marked as Broken). 11.3.11 Crawling Movement—Allows Per-

11.0 MOVEMENT
10.8.3 Rally Order sonnel to enter an accessible adjacent loca-
11.1 OVERVIEW—In any one turn, a player
When rallying, units use morale modifiers tion, including the next higher or lower lo-
may move some, all or none of his eligible
based on units PRIOR to the outcome of cation of the same hex. Units may never
units during the Fire & Movement Segment.
ANY rallies (e.g., A Broken friendly squad Crawl more than ONE location within a hex
Moving requires the use of an impulse in all
within MSR is treated as BROKEN for other (e.g., from Ground to +20 using Crawling
cases. Units may use any amount, up to
friendly units that attempt to rally later in as this represents a move of TWO levels).
the available Movement Points (MP) for the
the segment). Enemy units within MSR are Units may also Crawl one-hex-and-under an
unit being moved.
also applied prior to the rally of ANY unit, Emplacement when entering an adjacent
11.1.1 Movement Type—Before physically
friendly or enemy. hex. A unit may not Crawl ‘down’ to the
moving a piece the owning player announces
10.8.4 Surrendered Unit Morale Check— ground if ‘upstairs’ in a Building, then to an
what type of movement is being used (i.e.,
During the END OF TURN SEGMENT, all adjacent hex or vice-versa. Personnel using
Crawling, Assault Movement or Running).
Surrendered units MUST attempt a limited Crawling movement receive Stationary Cover
Unless stated otherwise, units are always
form of rally to improve their condition and/ and are considered to use ALL their move-
considered to be using Assault movement.
or avoid elimination. ment points in the act of crawling (Note: a 1
11.1.2 Movement In General—A moving
10.8.41 Eligible to ‘Improve’— Surren- MP expenditure may be made to place a
unit expends MP for each hex location it
dered units in the MSR of any NON-Broken smoke grenade prior to leaving its hex). Place
enters (usually 1 or 2 MP). Crossing hexside
friendly Personnel unit and/or non F- or M- a Moved arrow marker on top of Personnel
terrain (e.g., Wall; Hedge) adds an extra cost
KILLed vehicle are marked as BROKEN upon units using Crawling movement. A Crawl-
(usually 1 MP) to the cost of the entered
passing their End of Turn Segment morale ing Personnel unit may use Assault Fire
terrain (CoT). To move under some emplace-
check (Exception: Leaders, crews and all 1 DURING its move, before or after entering
ments also costs 1 MP. Each MP spent is
SP units Self Rally and are returned to nor- the new hex or location.
deducted from the total MP allowance of the
mal if they pass, they are eliminated upon 11.3.12 Assault movement—Allows a Per-
unit. A unit may NEVER spend more MP
failure as per 10.8.42). sonnel unit to use up to FOUR MP. Person-
than this allowance. The Terrain Chart (Table
10.8.42 Elimination—Eliminate all Surren- nel using Assault movement receive Assault
TC) specifies all costs for entering hexes
cover. Place a Moved arrow marker behind

25
Personnel units using Assault movement.
An Assault moving Personnel unit may Fire
during its move, before OR after expending
a movement point, using half GF (for small
arms or any L MG/ATR ONLY). Medium and
Heavy weapons may NOT be fired by mov-
ing Personnel.
11.3.13 Running movement—Allows a Per-
sonnel unit to use up to SEVEN movement
points. Personnel using Running movement
are considered to be in Running cover for
Opportunity Fire ONLY, while the player is
moving the counter. Use Assault cover for
any fire at them later in the Fire & Move-
ment Segment. Place a Moved arrow marker
behind the unit(s) at the end of their move,
in the same manner as Assault moving Per-
sonnel. Personnel using Running movement
may not fire during the Fire & Movement
Segment. Personnel carrying Medium weap-
ons may not use Running movement.
11.3.131 Winded —A ‘Winded’ marker is
placed on Running Personnel. A Personnel
unit already marked as Winded may not use
Running movement (Exception: Courage).
Remove previously placed Winded markers
from units after using a movement or fire
impulse or at the end of the Fire & Move-
ment Segment if they do not move or fire.
Removal does not require the use of an im-
pulse.
11.3.132 Exhausted Infantry—Any Person-
nel unit marked as Winded applies a +1/
1L modifier to all fire it takes part in when
marked (only ONE 1L shift is applied, not
one PER Winded Personnel unit
Firegroup and there is no modifier/shift
AGAINST Winded units). There is no effect
on Melee.
11.3.2 Platoon Movement
11.3.21 Platoon Formation—A Movement
Impulse may also be used to create a ‘Pla-
toon’, to allow Personnel units in up to 3
accessible adjacent hexes to move simulta-
neously (using the same movement impulse).
To qualify for multi-hex Platoon movement,
The turret marker placed on
Pzkw IIIg ‘A’ in the top example
is there to illustrate placement
oriented in the same direction
the AFV is. ‘A’ and ‘B’ are ex-
actly the same as regards sta-
tus. A turret marker is not
needed for this facing UNLESS
the AFV is Suppressed.
If ‘A’ chose to turn its turret ONE
hexspine during the Direct Fire
Phase, a +1 HPN DRM would
be added to its to hit attempt. A
one column shift LEFT would
also apply to any Casualty Table
fire using its coaxial machine-
gun ONLY (it is in the turret) in
the same impulse. If the turret
was turned another hexspine, a
+2 HPN DRM (and two column
shift LEFT) would be applied. If
this was a slow turret, a +2 HPN
DRM would apply for the FIRST
TCA change (and TWO column
shifts LEFT) and a +1 HPN DRM
for each additional hexspine
change that impulse. Note, a hit
from ‘C’ at ‘A’ that strikes the tur-
ret aspect is a FLANK hit.
at least one location must contain a LEADER
Trucks provide no cover to accompanying
moving with the rest of the Platoon. In or-
Personnel.
der to take part, each hex needs to be adja-
11.3.25 Leader Bonus—Any Platoon using
cent to at least one of the other hexes (or
non Crawling movement may add one MP
locations) in the Platoon at the start of the
to their available total if accompanied by a
Fire & Movement Segment and it must be
Leader.
possible to move BETWEEN all hexes ‘con-
11.3.3 Carrying Light and Medium
necting’ the Platoon.
weapon —Weapons never move by them-
Example: A Platoon cannot be formed be-
selves. Each Personnel unit may carry a
tween hexes separated by a Cliff. Players
number of Light and Medium weapons equal
should announce all units of the Platoon that
to its Stacking Points value. A Light weapon
will be moving prior to moving ANY.
has a Stacking value of 1, a Medium of 2.
11.3.211 Same Stack Platoon—Personnel
Any two 1 Stacking Point units may com-
units stacked in the SAME location may al-
bine to carry a Medium weapon.
ways move together as a Platoon. No leader
11.3.31 Movement Restrictions —Light
is needed.
Weapons may be carried by any Personnel
11.3.22 Movement—When using multi-hex
unit using Crawling, Assault, or Running
Platoon Movement, all Personnel units must
movement. Personnel units may not use
use the same movement type (e.g., Assault;
Running movement when carrying MEDIUM
Running; Crawling). Units using Platoon
weapons.
Movement may not enter a hex in violation
11.3.32 Assault Fire Restrictions—Me-
of stacking at any time during the move. If
dium and Heavy weapons may not fire us-
the Platoon leader is unable to continue mov-
ing Assault Fire. However, any remaining
ing for any reason, (e.g., no MP left due to a
Gunfire Factors (after deducting for the car-
Wounded result; Broken; pinned-down;
ried Weapon) left to the carrying Personnel
Eliminated) all units in the Platoon must im-
unit may be used.
mediately stop moving unless there is an-
11.3.33 Pick Up and Carry Routine—Units
other leader moving in one of the Platoon
spend one MP to ‘pick up’ weapons in their
hexes. When moving as a Platoon, all units
location (or position, e.g., on top of or un-
expend MP simultaneously hex-by-hex (and
der an emplacement) at any point during
location-by-location within hexes). Excep-
movement. A unit that intends to use Crawl-
tion: All units in the Platoon pay the SAME
ing movement may pick up a weapon dur-
MP cost as the HIGHEST expenditure of
ing the same Fire & Movement Segment and
ANY Platoon unit.
still move one hex (i.e., it does not have to
11.3.23 Cohesion—Once Platoon movement
be carrying the weapon already to carry it
in a is initiated, individual units may not volun-
to a new hex or location that turn).
tarily ‘break off’ from the Platoon that turn.
11.3.331 Transfer—Weapons may also be
All units must move to the next adjacent
transferred between units in the same lo-
hex or location together, and all units must
cation if neither unit is moving or marked
stay adjacent to one another in no more than
as moved or fired. The unit that ‘gives up’
three hexes. If any unit(s) of the Platoon are
the Weapon is still free to move. The trans-
unable to continue moving, the remainder
fer of a weapon from one unit to another is
must use their next MP expenditures to
not considered movement by BOTH units,
‘close up’ and qualify for multi-hex Platoon
just the one receiving the weapon, and costs
status again before any other movement is
1 MP for the receiving unit. The receiving
conducted (otherwise all immediately stop).
unit IS treated as moving for the purposes
11.3.24 With AFV/APC
of triggering Opportunity Fire.
Vehicles—Personnel us-
11.3.332 Close Assault Segment—A unit
ing Platoon Movement
may also pick up a weapon in its location
may also combine with
during Infiltration or after all Melee is com-
AFVs and APCs using Ve-
pleted in a hex without expending MP.
hicle Platoon Movement or
11.3.34 Pushing Guns —Heavy weapons
any type of vehicle in a
Convoy, creating one
may be moved, or ‘Pushed’ (Exception: Large
mixed unit Platoon. All
target type; they must be towed) during the
Personnel and vehicles
Fire & Movement Segment by their crew (or
must follow their Platoon
manning Personnel unit). Heavy weapons
may not be moved during Infiltration and
(or Convoy) movement
may never enter a Water or Swamp hex.
rules, and at least ONE
For H weapons that have NO target size
vehicle of the Platoon
modifier, treat the pushing unit as if using
must be in the same hex
Running movement (i.e., mark as Winded;
of at least ONE Person-
apply Running cover for Opportunity Fire),
nel unit at all times, in-
however, the gun may ONLY be pushed ONE
cluding ‘closing up’ to con-
hex. Personnel pushing a SMALL or VERY
tinue to qualify as a Pla-
SMALL target size Heavy weapon may use
toon if any vehicles or
Assault movement to Push it ONE hex, with-
Personnel are unable to
out being marked as Winded, or Running
move further. An Elite
movement to Push it TWO hexes (mark as
Tank Commander allows
Winded), treating each movement type ac-
the Personnel portion of
cordingly.
the Platoon to continue
Example: A Personnel unit stacked with a
moving even if other
leader pushing a SMALL H weapon may not
Leaders aren’t present.
enter a hex that would cost SIX or more MP
11.3.241 Cover Bonus—
while using Assault movement as it only has
An AFV/APC provides
FIVE MP available (4 for Assault movement
cover for any fire into or
+ 1 bonus MP from the leader).
through its hex, including
11.4 VEHICULAR MOVEMENT
during Platoon movement.
11.4.1 Movement Types —Each vehicle
26
counter has a set of two Movement Point
values printed on it in the following format:
‘Cross Country’ movement | Assault move-
ment. Assault movement is used to allow a
moving vehicle to conduct a variety of ac-
tions, e.g., load or unload Personnel for
transport; Overruns; move and fire during
the same impulse using Assault Fire. Cross
Country movement is used mainly for ve-
hicles wishing to travel from one place to
another as quickly as possible, eschewing
all fire and Overrun capabilities.
11.4.11 Markers—Place a Moved arrow on
top of a vehicle using assault movement and
behind a vehicle using cross-country move-
ment. When placing a Moved arrow behind
a moving vehicle, place the marker in the
hex just vacated by the unit.
11.4.2 Facing and Covered Arc—Each ve-
hicle has a Front, Rear, and Flank orienta-
tion determined by the hexspine to which
the front of the unit’s silhouette is pointed.
This is known as its ‘facing’, also referred
to as ‘Covered Arc’ (CA). A separate Cov-
ered Arc is used for any turret, and is known
as ‘Turret Covered Arc’ (TCA). The facing of
a VEHICLE, usually referred to when being
differentiated from its turret facing, is known
as ‘Vehicle Covered Arc’ (VCA). Note TCA
and VCA may be different from one other.
Both TCA and VCA must always face to-
wards one definite hexspine. When a tur -
reted vehicle has NO turret marker placed
on it, the turret is always considered to face
toward the FRONT VCA (unless stated to
be a rear -facing weapon, via an ‘R’ super -
script on the value on that counter).
11.4.3 Movement Direction Vehicles may
move FOR WARD into one of the two
hexsides it is facing. Vehicles may also use
REVERSE movement, to enter one of the
two hexsides to its rear. Reverse movement
costs DOUBLE the normal MP expenditure
(Exception: wheeled vehicles move in reverse
at 1.5 x CoT per hex). A Vehicle may use
both Forward and Reverse movement in the
same Fire & Movement Segment.
11.4.4 Pivoting—A Vehicle may change its
VCA/TCA to any hexspine within a hex dur-
ing a movement or fire impulse. During a
movement impulse, a unit may ‘pivot’ to face
its VCA to any other hexspine at the cost of
ONE MP per hexspine change. Pivoting is a
‘trigger’ for Opportunity Fire whether con-
ducted during a firing or movement impulse.
When using an impulse to fire, a unit may
also pivot one (including turret) or more
hexspines before firing. Note: The act of fir-
ing itself does not trigger Opportunity Fire;
pivoting does (including turret). When piv-
oting, the shot taken during THAT impulse
pays the appropriate HPT DRM or Casualty
Table shift. For fire using a subsequent
impulse (i.e., an additional ROF use for the
weapon or another weapon in the turret),
as long as the facing is not changed AGAIN,
the penalty for the pivot is not paid. Note: A
turret or vehicle may NOT be pivoted with-
out at least ONE weapon firing unless it is
moving (or marked as moved if all it does is
pivot).
Example: A fast turreted tank with a gun
and CMG in the turret pivots its turret one
hexspine during an impulse to fire at a squad,
firing its CMG. It pays the applicable ONE
LEFT shift. It may choose NOT to fire its main
armament during that impulse. Later during
the turn, it may fire its gun, and does NOT
pay for the pivot made during the
earlier impulse.
11.4.5 Continued Movement—A
vehicle marked as Moved may opt
to ‘continue’ moving during the
marker removal portion of the End
of Turn Segment. Keep the exist-
ing Moved marker on or behind the
vehicle (and treat it as a moving
target during the next Fire & Move-
ment Segment). During the next The squad in the example above uses FIVE move-
Fire & Movement Segment, so- ment points, one to enter the first hex, OPEN
marked vehicles must use a move- GROUND, and two MP to enter each SCRUB hex.
ment impulse, but may move using This move may ONLY be made by using Running
ANY movement type. Vehicles us- movement since it exceeds the 4 MP available for
ing Continued Movement may not Assault movement. Mark the squad with a Winded
use a fire impulse during the sub- marker. If a leader accompanied the squad it COULD
sequent Fire & Movement Segment. use Assault movement to make this move.
They may Assault Fire if using As-
toon at all times. A Platoon may use Contin-
sault movement. They may not take part in
ued movement.
a Gun Duel nor may they use Opportunity
11.4.71 Starting Limitations—Platoons are
Fire.
created at the beginning of each Fire &
11.4.51 Stalling—The owning player is free
Movement Segment by an appropriate num-
to use MORE than the necessary MP for a
ber of adjacent vehicles. Each must be ad-
VEHICLE to enter a location.
jacent at all times during that Fire & Move-
11.4.52 Minimum Move—In the rare event
ment Segment. If one or more of the AFVs
a vehicle lacks the needed MP to enter an
in the Platoon are unable to continue move-
adjacent hex but is OTHERWISE eligible to
ment (e.g., due to M-KILL, K-KILL, or F-
enter, a one-hex ‘minimum move’ is allowed
KILL results) all remaining AFVs in the Pla-
as its only movement. A vehicle may NEVER
toon may continue moving. Any ‘gap’ be-
fire a weapon nor conduct an Overrun when
tween remaining AFVs must be ‘closed up’
using a minimum move (but it may be con-
by immediate movement to bring them ad-
sidered Assault Movement if that type of
jacent again. No AFV may voluntarily ‘break
movement is called for, e.g., when towing).
off’ from a Platoon once using Platoon Move-
11.4.6 Convoy Movement—When allowed
ment in a Fire & Movement Segment (Ex-
to by SSR, vehicles may set up or enter
ception: An F-KILLed AFV is no longer re-
play using ‘Convoy Movement.’ Convoy ve-
stricted by the AFVs in the Platoon and stops
hicles must set up or enter play in adjacent
immediately; it will have to exit normally,
hexes, with no more than ONE vehicle per
beginning with the next available movement
hex. A Convoy moves in the same manner
opportunity, i.e., the following turn).
as a Platoon, remaining adjacent, never ex-
11.4.72 Overrun and Fire Restrictions—
ceeding one vehicle per hex and using As-
AFVs using Platoon Movement may conduct
sault movement (only) of the SLOWEST ve-
overruns and use Assault Fire, and they may
hicle in the Convoy.
conduct Overruns and use Assault Fire at
11.4.61 Off-road Movement—Convoys are
different times and at different targets dur-
not required to remain on Roads.
ing the course of moving as a Platoon. Each
11.4.62 Disbanding—No Vehicle may move
AFV is marked individually after it fires.
independent of the Convoy, including the
11.4.73 MP Expenditure—When moving as
voluntary loading or unloading of transported
a Platoon, all AFVs expend MP simulta-
Personnel or Towed weapons, until at least
neously, hex by hex, paying the same cost
one unit in the Convoy is fired on or has a
as the highest expenditure of any AFV in
LOS (within Spotting Range when the Spot-
the Platoon for any location entered and
ting Table is in use) to a non FOW-side en-
action conducted.
emy unit. Once a Convoy disbands, its ve-
Example: One AFV may spend one MP to
hicles may remain in Convoy or may move
enter a new hex while another spends one
normally. In the event the Convoy has al-
MP to change VCA, at the same time, at a
ready begun moving when first disbanded,
cost of ONE Movement Point for the Platoon.
the owning player may continue to move ONE
11.5 TOWING AND TRANSPORTING PER-
eligible vehicle during the movement impulse
SONNEL
the Convoy disbanded. Make note of MP
11.5.1 Carrying Capacity—Vehicles that are
already expended; the remaining vehicles
used primarily for TRANSPOR T have a maxi-
of the Convoy may be moved, using one
mum capacity in Stacking Points listed on
movement impulse for each, during subse-
their counters in the following format: [Cover
quent impulses that turn.
State] | [Stacking Points]. Other vehicles
11.4.63 Continued Movement—All units in
(without printed transport capacity) are listed
the Convoy MUST use Continued Movement
on the TOW | CARRY TABLE. Transported
between turns until the Convoy is eligible
or Towed units are referred to as ‘passen-
to move independently.
gers’ (for those that ride IN a vehicle) and
11.4.7 AFV/APC Platoon Movement—A
‘riders’ for those that ride on (e.g., a tank) a
group of 2-5 adjacent Russian, American,
vehicle.
Italian, Japanese, or German or 2-3 British
11.5.11 Riding IN Transport—Personnel
or French AFVs/APCs (not trucks) may
ride IN vehicles that have S (usually trucks)
move together as a multi-unit ‘Platoon’. This
or G-F (usually APC) printed on them. They
form of Platoon movement represents the
receive Stationary, Good, or Full cover
use of ONE Movement Impulse during the
states.
Fire & Movement Segment. The Platoon (or
11.5.12 Riding ON Transport—Personnel
‘Troop’ for British AFVs) must use the MP
ride ON vehicles that lack any S, G, or F
allowance of the slowest vehicle in the Pla-
notation (usually tanks).
27
11.5.13 Transporting Leaders and L/M
Weapons—Vehicles may also carry (i.e., not
tow) leaders as well as LIGHT and MEDIUM
weapons. These are carried within the
vehicle’s listed Carrying Capacity. However,
the Carrying Capacity of a vehicle is applied
SEPARATELY for Personnel and weapons/
leaders.
Example: A vehicle capable of Carrying
THREE Stacking Points may ALSO carry three
‘L’ weapons AND three leaders OR one ‘M’
weapon, one ‘L’ weapon and three leaders
in addition to a squad.
11.5.2 Towing capacity-Vehicles may also
TOW Heavy weapons. Note H weapons may
also be pushed by Personnel (Exception:
LARGE target type H weapons may only
move via towing). The Tow | Carry Person-
nel Table lists the ability of each vehicle type
to carry personnel and tow an H weapon.
Note: An H weapon’s crew is counted to-
wards Personnel carrying limits when trans-
ported. Vehicles towing other vehicles may
only use Assault movement. Units towing
Heavy weapons may use Cross Country
movement ONLY when moving along a Road.
11.5.21 Towing Vehicles—Vehicular units
may hook up to tow another vehicle, regard-
less of their apparent facing in respect to
the unit being towed. Once hooked up, turn
the towed vehicle counter so the VCA of the
vehicle being towed matches that of the tow-
ing vehicle and place it on top of the towing
vehicle. There is no cost for this change in
VCA.
11.5.22 Towing Restrictions —A vehicle
may never tow a ‘larger’ (measured by tar-
get size modifier) vehicle. Exception: Wheeled
vehicles may tow larger WHEELED vehicles
when moving along a Road. Otherwise,
Wheeled vehicles may only tow normal (no
target size modifier) or SMALL tracked or
half-track vehicles, in addition to other non-
wheeled vehicles that do not exceed the size
of the towing vehicle.
11.5.3 Loading and Unloading Procedures
Loading and Unloading procedures are the
same for Passengers, Riders, H weapons
and Towed Vehicles.
11.5.31 Loading—To Load a Passenger, the
transporting Vehicle and its Passenger must
be in the same hex Location. The transport-
ing Vehicle must use Assault movement
during the turn it wishes to ‘pick up’ a Pas-
senger; it is then placed on top of the trans-
porting Vehicle counter. No movement is
allowed in the turn of Loading by the trans-
porting Ve h i c l e once it enters the
Passenger’s location.
11.5.32 Unloading—Place Unloaded units
under the transporting Vehicle. Only Ve-
hicles using Assault movement may willingly
Unload Passengers. No movement is allowed
in the turn of Unloading by the transport-
ing Vehicle once it Unloads its Passenger. A
Heavy weapon Unload with any CA.
11.5.4 Broken
Any Personnel unit that is Broken or Sur -
renders when attempting to load or hook a
Heavy weapon up for towing may not do so
and remains in the hex. Any Personnel unit
that fails a morale check while being trans-
ported must drop into Full cover in the ve-
hicle if available (i.e., denoted by an ‘F’) or
unload in the hex immediately. Place an FC
marker on Personnel units that drop into ‘F’
vehicle cover. Vehicles carrying Broken or
Surrendered Personnel are not restricted
from moving closer to enemy units.
11.5.5 Infiltration
Personnel may unload from a vehicle into
the ground level of their OWN hex as a form
of Infiltration during the Close Assault Seg-
ment of the same turn, even if the vehicle
used Cross Country Movement that turn.
They may NOT unload and Infiltrate out of
their hex or into a non ground level location
of their hex.
11.5.6 Transport and Passenger Fire and
Movement Restrictions
Passengers may NOT fire or move during
the Fire & Movement Segment they are
loaded/unloaded. Towed Heavy weapons
may never fire while being Towed. Person-
nel units and Light weapons may use direct
fire when in GOOD cover in half-tracks.
Vehicles previously carrying or towing are
still eligible to fire using Assault Fire during
the Fire & Movement Segment they load/
unload.
11.5.7 Passengers as Targets
Small arms attacks against their vehicle also
attack Passengers, noting their cover state,
independent of their transport vehicle, as
follows.
11.5.71 In APC—Personnel units in ‘G-F’
vehicles are considered in Good cover, but
may drop into Full cover (in the same man-
ner as a Hedgehog) when fired on. Mark
them with an ‘FC” marker. Personnel already
marked as ‘FC’ when riding in any eligible
APC are not affected by small arms attacks
against their transporting vehicle. Excep-
tion: Grenade Attacks affect them normally
even when marked ‘FC’.
11.5.72 In Truck Type Vehicle—Person-
nel in ‘S’ vehicles are in Stationary cover.
11.5.73 On AFV—Units riding on AFVs re-
ceive Assault cover.
11.5.74 Towed Heavy weapons —Towed
Heavy weapons must be targeted separately
for hits using the HPT, using any appropri-
ate modifiers. They are not fired on as part
of an attack against the towing vehicle or
its passengers.
11.5.8 Passengers’ Fate
See 12.5.82 for procedures on determining
the fate of Passengers when their vehicle is
attacked.
11.5.9 Riding ON Automatic Unload
Whenever an AFV is hit by an AP hit from a
weapon of a Gun Size of 20 (i.e., 20mm) or
larger, any Personnel riding ON the AFV
must immediately suffer the specified at-
tack and then immediately unload. Person-
nel units riding on an AFV also unload im-
mediately when it fires any non-AAMG
weapon. This unloading does not require
use of a movement impulse but IS consid-
ered using Running movement (mark accord-
ingly) for the unloading unit(s). They are oth-
erwise treated normally as units that used
Running movement (e.g., may Infiltrate that
turn).
12.0 COMBAT
12.1 OUTLINE
While complex in appearance, vehicles, Per-
sonnel, guns, and aircraft use intuitive, com-
mon routines to conduct ATS battles. Com-
bat consists of the following categories:
a) Direct Fire—The firing unit can see the
target unit (see 12.5).
b) Indirect Fire—The firing unit is off-board
artillery or on-board mortars or mortars/
28
howitzers using On Board Spotted Indirect
Fire (see 14.6.7 and 12.11).
c) Overrun—An AFV enters an enemy loca-
tion (see 12.14).
d) Close Assault —Personnel units make
Grenade Attacks or enter enemy locations
to conduct Melee (see 12.15).
e) Aircraft Attacks—Aircraft attack ground
units, and anti-aircraft units attack aircraft
(see 12.16).
12.2 ATTACK CLASSIFICATION
All on-board units are classified as either
small arms or guns.
12.2.1 Small Arms
The term ‘small arms’ refers to the values
for Gunfire Factors (GF) printed on Person-
nel, Light machine-guns (L|MG), Medium
machine-guns (M|MG) and Light anti-tank
rifles (L|ATR). Many vehicles and aircraft
are also equipped with machine-guns, and
have GF values printed on their counters.
Flamethrowers, while different in use from
small arms, also have a GF value.
12.2.2 Guns
The term ‘Gun’ refers to all direct firing M
and H weapons that must obtain a hit on
the HPT before affecting a target. Guns al-
ways have a Gun Size (representing their
bore in millimeters, e.g., ‘75’ depicts a
75mm gun) and Gun Value (A-D) instead of
a GF value on their counters. Vehicular -
mounted main armament (MA) and H weap-
ons are always Guns (Exceptions: when a
vehicle’s MA is an MG). Rules that apply to
Guns also refer to L and M weapons such
as M|MG and L|AT when using their own
HPTs (found directly under the main HPT).
12.3 ELIGIBLE ATTACKERS
Whether a unit is an eligible attacker de-
pends on the type of unit and the type of
attack it will use.
12.3.1 Direct Fire Attackers
Any on-map unit (except mortars) may use
Direct Fire if it:
a) Has an LOS to the target;
b) Is within Spotting Range of the target (if
using Spotting);
c) Is not Broken or Surrendered;
d) Has not moved except by Crawling or
Assault move (may only fire during the im-
pulse it is moving);
e) Is not F-KILLed; and
f) It has not used up its entire Rate-of-Fire.
Example: A gun has a ROF of ‘2’ (and is not
using a BOT marker). It is marked as Fired to
show it fired once. It still has one ‘shot’ left,
and may fire again. Once it fires twice, no fire
opportunities remain for that turn.
12.3.2 Indirect Fire Attackers
On-board mortars (MTR), howitzers (HOW),
and off-board artillery batteries use Indi-
rect Fire if the manning crew or an eligible
FO or Personnel unit serving as a Spotter:
a) Has an LOS to the target hex;
b) Is within Spotting Range of the target—if
using Spotting Rules—not used in non
desert scenarios unless NIGHT/FOG Spot-
ting Conditions are in effect or by mutual
player agreement;
c) Is otherwise eligible to fire, and is not
moving.
12.3.3 Overrun Attackers
An AFV/Armed APC/Armed Truck may con-
duct an Overrun if it:
a) Is eligible to move;
b) May enter the overrun hex (note that en-
tering terrain that entails a check on the
Immobilization Table may render the vehicle
unable to move, and thus unable to make
an Overrun attack in the hex it just entered);
c) Has enough Assault MP to enter and
spend 1 MP per enemy unit being Over -
run—not ALL enemy units in the hex must
be Overrun.
12.3.4 Close Assault Attackers
Eligible Personnel units may choose ONE
of two actions during the Close Assault Seg-
ment:
a) Grenade Attack—A Personnel unit may
make a Grenade Attack if it is not Broken
or Surrendered, and is not marked as Fired;
b) Infiltration—Any Personnel unit may use
Infiltration if not Broken or Surrendered.
12.4 ELIGIBLE TARGETS
Whether a unit is an eligible target depends
on the type of unit and the type of attack.
All Personnel (except surrendered units),
vehicles, and weapons are eligible targets.
There are five exceptions:
a) Armor Piercing (AP)—Guns capable of
firing AP ammunition may use it to attack
Personnel units in bunkers, H weapons, and
vehicles (this ammunition limitation is indi-
cated by a white circle or square behind
the unit’s Gun Size, and on the available
ammunition portion of an AFV Card and the
Gun & Mortar Ammo Table for each nation-
ality).
b) Shaped Charge Weapons (SCW)/L|AT—
In addition to H weapons and vehicles, SCW
may attack Personnel in non rooftop build-
ing locations, under Bunker/Cave Dugout
markers or behind Wall (including High Wall)
hexsides (Exception: Personnel denied wall
cover, see 7.22).
c) Units in Full cover—These are only eli-
gible targets for Indirect Fire, direct firing
guns using the HPT (HE/FRAG is halved
against Full cover units), and adjacent and
same-hex attackers (see 12.5.661 for ex-
ceptions).
d) Air Attacks—Aircraft may not attack tar -
gets in building or woods hexes if all six
adjacent hexes are also Woods or building
hexes (Exception: If the target hex is an
Open Roofed building; also see 12.16.2).
e) AA Fire—Only anti-aircraft (AA) guns, anti-
aircraft machine-guns (AAMG), and medium
machine-guns (M|MG) may attack aircraft.
They may do so only from hexes aircraft
German squad ‘15’ and Italian squad ‘1’ may
form a same-hex firegroup because German
leader ‘7’ is eligible to lead the Firegroup (other-
wise, German and Italian units may not form
Firegroups).
The Axis player may instead opt to use the
1|1|7 ‘7’ to form a Firegroup with Sd 250 ‘B’ and
6|5|7 ‘9’ (or 2|3|8 ‘8’, noting the crew can only
use its 2 GF in the firegroup since a mortar
requires the HPT to fire and may not be part of
a Firegroup) to fire at any ONE of the British
squads. Squad ‘9’ is reduced by 1 GF for car-
rying the MG 34, but the MG may add its 5 GF to
the attack of the firegroup. The Sd 250 half-
track IS allowed to firegroup with Personnel.
The Axis player may also choose to make a
series of separate attacks instead of one large
firegroup. Squad ‘10’ and ATR ‘C’ may fire at
British squad ‘21’, OR squad 3 using 6 GF (5 +
1). If the German player chose to fire at British squad ‘13’, the attack would fire using 3 GF due to the range of SIX hexes, which reduces the printed
GF by HALF (6 MINUS 1 HALVED = 2.5 [round fractions down]); the ATR is still within its range of 16 and provides 1 GF. If any unit fires on British
squad ‘13’ it may ‘drop’ into FULL cover under the hedgehog and avoid the attack. The firing unit(s) is still marked as fired.
can attack as per ‘d’ above.
12.4.1 Non-Eligible Targets—Units may not
fire into locations containing friendly units,
nor those containing surrendered units un-
less the target location also contains at least
one non-surrendered enemy unit.
12.4.2 Direct Fire Targets
Small Arms attack all eligible units in a lo-
cation. Guns firing at a vehicle do not affect
other units in the vehicle’s location, except
its Passengers. Guns firing HE at Person-
nel units do not affect any vehicles in the
target location.
12.4.3 Indirect Fire Targets
Indirect Fire and aircraft bombs make one
die roll to attack every location in a hex.
Example: Indirect Fire hits a hex that has a
building with two levels. Make ONE roll on
the Casualty Table and apply casualties to
units on any level in the hex.
12.4.4 Overrun Targets
The only eligible targets for overrun are
Personnel units, H weapons and for FULLY
TRACKED AFVs, Truck type vehicles. The
vehicle must expend 1 MP for each unit it
overruns, counting an H weapon and its crew
as ONE unit. The attacker chooses which
units he overruns if he does not (or cannot)
expend Assault MP to overrun all eligible
targets in a location.
12.4.5 Close Assault
Grenade and Melee attacks affect all eligible
Personnel units or any ONE vehicle in a lo-
cation.
12.5 DIRECT FIRE ATTACK ROUTINES
Use the following routines to conduct a Di-
rect Fire attack.
12.5.1 Attack Routine for Small Arms
a) Determine the range from the firing unit
hex to the target hex (see 12.5.3);
b) Determine GF of each attacking unit,
modified by any applicable conditions, and
total all GF (see 12.5.4 and 12.5.5);
c) Use the Cover State Effects Table to de-
termine applicable column shifts for each
unit in the target location (see 12.5.6);
d) Determine the final column to use on the
Casualty Table for each target unit, roll a
die, and cross-reference the result on the
appropriate column (see 12.5.7);
e) Apply casualties among ALL Personnel
units in the targeted location, INCLUDING
29
Passengers (exception: do not apply casu-
alties against those passengers that are not
eligible to be targeted by Small Arms; i.e.,
those in FULL cover; the fate of these units
depends on the effects [if any] of the attack
against their vehicle, usually a Half-track),
riders (i.e., Personnel units being trans-
ported on a vehicle [usually a tank or SP
Gun] that does not provide GOOD or FULL
cover), and crews manning H weapons (see
12.5.9);
f) For vehicles and H weapons in the target
location, use the Small Arms (GF) vs. Ve-
hicles and H Weapons Table (C6) to see if
the Casualty Table roll has any effect on
these units (see 12.5.8);
g) Place a Collateral Fire (‘C’) marker in any
hex that receives at least SIX NON
FLAMETHROWER Gunfire Factors (see
12.5.10).
12.5.2 Attack Routine for Guns
Guns make attacks using a two-step rou-
tine: first determine if the gun hits the tar-
get, and then determine the hit’s effect on
the target.
12.5.21 Using the HPT—Use the following
routine to determine if a gun hits a target.
a) Determine the range from the firing unit
hex to the target hex (see 12.5.3);
b) Determine the Hit Probability Number
(HPN) (see 12.5.11);
c) Determine applicable HPT DRM;
d) Roll a die, and apply any HPT DRM to
the die roll;
e) If the DRM-modified die roll is less than
or equal to the HPN, the attack hits the tar-
get; if greater, the attack missed and has
no effect.
12.5.22 Gun Attacks vs. Personnel—After
obtaining a hit on a Personnel target, use
the following routine:
a) Determine the appropriate column to use
on the Casualty Table for the Gun’s HE
equivalency (see 12.5.7);
b) Apply column shifts for Airbursts if in
applicable terrain (see also Time Fuzed HE,
14.11);
c) Determine the final column to use on the
Casualty Table for each target unit, roll a
die, and cross-reference the result on the
appropriate column;
d) Apply Casualties to Personnel units in
the target location, followed by the required
morale check (see 12.5.9).
e) Place a Collateral Fire (‘C’) marker in any
location that is attacked by SIX FRAG fac-
tors or more on the Casualty Table (see
12.5.10).
12.5.23 Gun Attacks vs. Vehicles—After
obtaining a hit on a vehicle target, use the
following routine:
a) Make a roll on the Hit Location Table (B)
to determine the target aspect struck (see
12.5.12);
b) Determine the firing weapon’s Penetra-
tion (PEN) value using the Gun Penetration
Values Table for that nationality (repeated
on each AFV Card) and the target vehicle’s
Armor Factor (AF), and calculate the AF to
PEN Differential (DIFF);
c) Make a die roll on the appropriate DIFF
column of the K-KILL Table (C1) (see
12.5.13);
d) Apply the result of the die roll using the
K-KILL Table;
e) Resolve effects on passengers in accor -
dance with 12.5.82;
f) Make a roll on the Suppression Table if
applicable (see 12.5.17).
12.5.24 Gun Attacks/L|AT vs. H Weap-
ons—After obtaining a hit on an H weapon,
use the following routine:
a) Guns (including L|AT; e.g., 88mm PF)
greater than 20mm automatically eliminate
any H weapon they hit;
b) Resolve attacks by ATR, and guns ≤ instead of firing, he may provide his lead-
20mm on Table C4 (see 12.10.5);
c) If the attack F-Kills or eliminates the H
weapon, attack any manning crew on the
Casualty Table using the AP column (4 GF)
if firing AP or the column for the HE equiva-
lent (exception: use the 1 GF column for
L|ATRs); if the attack made a roll on Table
C4, use the same die roll on the Casualty
Table.
12.5.3 Range and LOS
Determine the range by counting the num-
ber of hexes in the shortest contiguous path
from the firing unit to the target hex. Do
not include the firing unit’s hex, but include
the target unit’s hex. When firing at a ve-
hicle that is in the same hex or location as
the firing unit, the range is zero. Determine
if there is an LOS between the firing unit
and its intended target. If the LOS is found
to be blocked after declaring intent to fire,
do not mark the firing unit as fired. The
firing player is considered to have ‘passed’,
i.e., his impulse is lost and reverts to the
opponent. The units he wished to fire are
free to fire or move during a later impulse if
otherwise eligible (e.g., have not been de-
stroyed in the interim).
12.5.31 Range Limits—Personnel and MG
have an effective range printed on their
counters, their maximum range being double
this value. Some other weapons (e.g., L|AT
and L|ATR) have a maximum range printed
on their counters. Mortars and some guns
have a ‘#minimum-maximum’ range (and
some simply a #maximum) printed on their
counters. Other guns do not have a maxi-
mum or minimum range limit. They may fire
at any range, unless the cumulative HPN is
ZERO or less due to HPT DRM (on the HPT
‘-’ denotes a zero per -cent chance of obtain-
ing a hit). A die roll is NOT made on the
HPT in this case.
12.5.4 Firegroups
Two or more units may combine their GF to
attack the same target with small arms fire
(i.e., the HPT is never used in a Firegroup).
This combination of units is known as a
Firegroup. A Firegroup may attack only one
location. AFVs may not form Firegroups with
other units, but all of an AFVs MG (includ-
ing a gun using semi-automatic fire) may
combine their GF to form a one unit
‘Firegroup’.
12.5.41 Eligibility—All units in a Firegroup
must be in the same location, or in adjacent
accessible locations. Axis units of different
nationalities may form a Firegroup together
only if a German leader is part of the
Firegroup (Exception: Finnish leaders may
form Firegroups with German Personnel).
Allied units may form Firegroups together
freely.
12.5.42 Multi-Hex F i r e g r o u p s —A
Firegroup may be made of a maximum of
THREE contiguous hexes and each hex
must contain at least one unit that is part of
the Firegroup. Each location containing at
least one unit of the Firegroup must be ad-
jacent and accessible to at least one other
location containing another unit of the
Firegroup.
12.5.421 Leadership—There must be a non-
Broken/Surrendered friendly leader in at
least one hex of a multi-hex Firegroup. At
least one unit in each location must be eli-
gible to fire and take part in the Firegroup
(Exception: A leader may be alone in a hex;
ership shift to the Firegroup’s attack). Ap-
ply the highest number of left shifts for
Obscuring terrain along the LOS of any
unit(s) in the Firegroup.
12.5.43 Impulse Use —A Firegroup uses
ONE impulse for all units and weapons in
the Firegroup to fire once (or use one ROF).
Units in the same location that wish to fire
at the same target hex need NOT utilize a
Firegroup. Same location units may com-
bine freely, using separate fire impulses.
12.5.44 Leaders and Firegroups —One
friendly leader (only) may apply its leader-
ship to a Firegroup attack. A leader must
have a LOS to the target and be otherwise
eligible to fire; he may not use his GF or
fire a carried weapon. Additional leader units
provide no additional benefit, but they may
add their printed GF or that of any weap-
ons they fire to the Firegroup’s attack.
12.5.441 Leader Effects —Once a leader
applies its shift/DRM to any unit in a
Firegroup it may continue to modify any fire
later in the SAME segment, by units that
were part of the Firegroup AND any eligible
weapons they carry. It may not lead any
additional units that were not part of the
original Firegroup and must remain other-
wise eligible to provide leadership (e.g., it
may not be Broken in the interim).
Example: An NCO and two squads, each car-
rying an L|MG, form a Firegroup to fire dur-
ing an impulse. The owning player decides
to fire one squad and TWO L|MG ONLY, dur-
ing the fire impulse. The leader’s shift is ap-
plied to this attack. Later in the same seg-
ment the second squad fires an L|AT it is
carrying. Its also receives an HPT DRM from
the leader. If instead the second squad
wished to form a NEW Firegroup with an-
other, third squad adjacent to it, the original
leader could NOT be part of (or form) that
new Firegroup. However, the squad COULD
still fire, including as part of a Firegroup, if
30
another leader was available.
12.5.442 Leader-Only Firegroups—Two or
more leaders may form a Firegroup by them-
selves. If another leader (in addition to the
two required to form a Firegroup) provides
leadership (i.e., does not contribute any GF
or fire a weapon), the Firegroup receives
applicable leadership column shifts.
12.5.5 Modifications to Small Arms
The following rules describe conditions that
modify Gunfire Factors.
12.5.51 GF Reduction—A Personnel unit
subtracts inherent GF equal to the SP of
CARRIED L (-1 GF) and M (-2 GF) weapons
(even if the weapon is not fired, the reduc-
tion is made for all carried weapons). To
fire, an M weapon must be manned by at
least 2 SP of Personnel (e.g., two leaders; a
crew; a squad). Reductions for weapons are
made before any modifications for Long
Range and Assault Fire. There is no penalty
for carrying weapons during Melee, but
there is for Grenade attacks (see 12.15.21).
A Personnel unit may not fire its printed GF
or any L or M weapons if crewing a HEAVY
weapon.
12.5.52 Long Range Fire—Personnel Gun-
fire Factors, L|MG, M|MG, and vehicular-
mounted MG may fire at a range greater
than their printed range. This is known as
Long Range Fire. They may fire at half GF
(total all of the attack’s GF, and then divide
in half) for hexes beyond normal range and
up to double the printed range (see 15.2.45
for the range of vehicular -mounted MGs).
Other weapons may NOT fire beyond the
maximum range printed on their counter,
designated by a number following a ‘#’ on
L|ATR, L|AT. L|MTR, M|MTR, and L|FT
counters (and vehicles equipped with these
weapons).
12.5.53 Assault Fire—Firing during move-
ment is known as Assault Fire. Personnel
using Crawling or Assault movement may
fire their Gunfire Factors and any carried L
weapons while in the act of moving. Vehicles
using Assault movement may also fire their
weapons. GF are halved during Assault Fire
(calculated before applying any reduction for
Long Range Fire). Personnel firing L|AT and
L|ATR on the HPT using Assault Fire must
apply a +3 HPT DRM. Vehicles must apply
a +5 HPT DRM.
12.5.6 Cover States
Cover State represents vulnerability to an
attack. Some cover states affect both Per -
sonnel and vehicles. Others affect only Per -
sonnel.
12.5.61 Cover State Modifiers—Cover state
modifies EITHER :
a) Column used on the Casualty Table; OR
b) The chance of obtaining a hit on the Hit
Probability Table (HPT).
Exception: Apply the modifier for certain
states (e.g., Air Bursts) only on the Casu-
alty Table after obtaining a hit.
12.5.62 Cover State Effects Table (F1)
Table F1 provides Casualty Table column
shifts and HPT DRM for different cover
states. On the HPT, each ‘L’ shift equals a
+1 modifier to the die roll; each ‘R’ shift
equals a -1 modifier.
Example: A unit in Good cover benefits from
a shift of ‘1L’. For an attack using the ‘14’
column on the Casualty Table, resolve the
fire one column to the left, in the ‘10’ column.
If the attack instead requires a roll on the
HPT to obtain a hit, apply a +1 DRM to the
HPN. If a hit results, do not apply a column
shift to the subsequent Casualty Table roll.
12.5.621 Table Usage—Refer to Table F1
to obtain a cover state’s applicable column
shifts and HPT DRM.
a) Cover states denoted with a ‘P’ only apply
to Personnel units;
b) Apply all applicable shifts cumulatively,
but apply only one shift for hex terrain,
hexside terrain, and emplacements. Excep-
tion: AFVs/APCs and non-burning wreck
markers provide Good cover in the ground
level of their hex, but only if no other ter-
rain in the hex provides a cover DRM/shift
(see 6.2.71).
Example: A Personnel unit using Running
movement is fired on while in Good cover.
The modifiers are –2/2R for Running and
+1/1L for Good cover, the combination of
which results in –1/1R.
12.5.63 Personnel Movement—The follow-
ing cover states only apply to Personnel
units:
12.5.631 Stationary—A Personnel unit that
is Crawling, not moving, or transported by
a Vehicle affording S cover to Passengers is
in a Stationary cover, which provides a modi-
fier of zero (no shift or DRM).
12.5.632 Assault—Personnel units using
Assault movement are in Assault cover,
which provides a -1/1R modifier. Note: A
Personnel unit riding on an AFV is in As-
sault cover; guns firing HE on the HPT may
not separately target such units. Any hit by
HE on the AFV also affects riding Person-
nel units, using the Casualty Table for the
latter AND applying a 1R shift INSTEAD of
a -1 HPT DRM in this special case.
12.5.633 Running—Personnel units using
Running movement are in Running cover,
but only when targeted by Opportunity Fire.
Personnel units pushing H weapons may
also be considered to be in Running cover
(see 11.3.34). Running cover provides a -
2/2R modifier. Once a Running unit com-
pletes its movement impulse, it receives
assault cover for the purposes of modifiers
and being targeted, until the end of the turn.
12.5.64 Cover & Terrain—The terrain rules
and Terrain Chart provide the cover state
for each terrain type. Emplacements may
supersede the cover state of terrain for units
in or on them. The use of the term “appli-
cable terrain” specifies cover provided by
terrain and emplacements.
12.5.641 Good Cover —Provides a +1/1L
modifier;
12.5.642 Improved Cover—Provides a +2/
2L modifier;
12.5.643 Masonry Cover—Provides a +3/
3L modifier AND halves ALL HE/FFE/OBA/
Aircraft Bomb attacks as per 12.5.71c,
EXCEPT FOR the purpose of possible cre-
ation of rubble (see 8.3.9);
12.5.644 Full Cover —Provides a +3/3L
modifier (there are restrictions on firing at
units in Full cover; see 12.5.661).
12.5.65 Other Cover Modifiers
Other factors affect cover state. In addition
to those listed below, there are modifiers
listed below the HPT that refer only to fire
on that table (and how Casualty Table shifts
are applied as HPT DRM).
12.5.651 Obscuring—Some terrain types
disrupt fire through them. (e.g., Rock
Strewn terrain; Crops). Each obscuring ter-
rain type (or in some cases the hex contain-
ing the terrain or any hexside touched, as
per the rules for individual terrain types)
along an LOS provides a +1/1L modifier.
12.5.652 Smoke—If a unit fires into, out
of, exactly along a hexside, or through a
hex with smoke in it, apply a +4/4L modi-
fier. Burning wrecks, flame markers, and
smoke markers create smoke. Multiple
sources of smoke in the same hex do not
increase the smoke modifier.
12.5.653 Leader directed—Eligible attacks
receive a –1/1R modifier if directed by an
NCO and –2/2R if directed by an Officer.
Commissars do not ‘direct’ attacks (i.e., they
provide no benefit).
12.5.654 Airbursts—Instead of the normal
LEFT shift(s), any Personnel unit in Airburst
terrain has its Cover treated as ‘1R’ on the
Casualty Table for all mortar/OBA/aircraft
bomb/Indirect fire attacks AFTER a hit is
obtained on the HPT. HPT DRM are applied
normally. Airbursts do not provide a 1R shift
against Personnel units in Full Cover in
APCs that provide FULL cover (marked with
‘F’ on their counter), Bunkers, Blockhouses
or Buildings (must be UNDER Bunker/
Blockhouse or MARKED with a green Full
Cover (i.e., ‘F’) marker.
12.5.655 Cushion—An HE attack against
Personnel in cushioning terrain receives a
1L modifier. Cushion does not produce HPT
DRM; it only provides a column shift on the
Casualty Table after a hit is obtained by HE
or aircraft bombs.
12.5.656 Fog of War—Fire at the following
units receives a +2/2L modifier:
a) An H weapon with its FOW side up;
b) The original manning crew under an H
weapon with its FOW side up;
c) A vehicle with its FOW side up (noting
that it must be non-moving, since moving
within an enemy LOS [or a moving enemy
unit moves within LOS and Spotting Range]
will flip a vehicle to its non-FOW side in all
cases).
12.5.66 Full Cover—A unit under a Full
Cover (FC) marker or eligible Emplacement
is in Full cover.
12.5.661 Attacking at Units in Full
Cover—Units marked as ‘FC’ or in FULL
cover under an emplacement are only eli-
gible targets for Indirect Fire, direct-fire
using the HPT, and fire from adjacent hexes
(e.g., GF; Grenade attacks). A unit in FC in
a non-emplacement may be attacked using
Melee normally. Units need not move UN-
DER an emplacement providing FULL cover
to initiate Melee, they may attack in Melee
from on TOP of the emplacement. See the
rules for each emplacement type for restric-
tions on Melee (e.g., Blockhouses).
12.5.6611 Direct Fire—When using direct
fire, apply a +3 HPT DRM. FRAG factors
are HALVED on the Casualty Table for any
hit obtained. SCW may also attack using
direct fire against bunker occupants, ap-
plying the +3 and halving effects.
12.5.66111 GF/Grenade Attacks—When
using GF directly on the Casualty Table,
including Grenade attacks, a 3L shift ap-
plies.
12.5.6612 Indirect Fire vs. Full Cover—
All HE/FRAG attacks resulting from INDI-
RECT fire (including OBA and aircraft
bombs) are HALVED as per 12.5.71c. Ex-
ception: Indirect fire attacks against units
marked as ‘FC’ due ONLY to being behind
Bocage/High Wall hexsides (see 12.5.663)
do so at full strength (i.e., do NOT halve).
31
12.5.662 Units Firing From Full Cover—
A unit in Full cover may fire at adjacent units
only. Exception: Mortars may fire normally
from Full cover when under a hedgehog or
AT -Trench; mortars may also fire normally
from Full cover in ‘down’ Linear Depression
hexes, but doing so requires using a Spot-
ter (14.6.7).
12.5.663 Full Cover Set Up—Personnel may
set up in Full cover under eligible emplace-
ments. Vehicles and Personnel may set up
marked with an FC marker in the following
types of terrain:
a) Any non-roof location of a multi-hex build-
ing;
b) Behind Level +10 hexsides (e.g., High
Wall/Bocage hexsides) if all enemy units with
LOS to the hex trace LOS ACROSS a Level
+10 hexside. Remove the FC marker when-
ever an enemy unit has an LOS to the hex
(and is in Spotting Range), and the LOS is
not traced across a Level +10 hexside.
A unit never PLACES an FC marker for ‘a’
and ‘b’ above during the course of play. FC
markers are ONLY placed in terrain hexes
during set up. After set up, units may only
obtain Full cover under an emplacement or
in a vehicle affording FULL (as denoted by
an F on the vehicle counter) cover.
12.5.664 Dropping Into Full Cover—Eli-
gible Personnel units may ‘drop’ into Full
cover when an enemy unit fires on them.
12.5.6641 Eligible Units—Units are eligible
to drop into Full cover when not already
marked with a fired or moved marker, if
they are fired on by any direct fire, aircraft,
or NON mortar OBA and indirect fire and
they are:
a) on top of Hedgehogs or other emplace-
ments specifically listed as providing full
cover in their rules;
b) Passengers in a Vehicle affording F cover.
Units NEVER drop into full cover in build-
ings.
12.5.6642 Sequence —Use the following
sequence when firing on units eligible to drop
into Full cover:
a) Enemy unit declares an attack using ANY
type of fire except MOR TAR (including mor-
tar OBA);
b) The owning player of the targeted Per -
sonnel unit declares if it will drop into Full
cover;
c) Fire is resolved if any effect can be ob-
tained. If the Personnel unit dropped into
Full cover, it benefits from that cover state
against the just-declared fire.
12.5.6643 Movement—Units use Crawling
movement when dropping into Full cover,
but dropping into Full cover is not an Op-
portunity Fire trigger. Mark the unit with a
movement marker; it may not move or fire
during that turn’s Fire & Movement Seg-
ment after dropping into Full cover.
12.5.6644 Leaving Full Cover—A unit may
exit Full cover in the following ways:
a) The unit exits the location in which it set
up marked with an FC marker;
b) The unit spends 1 MP or uses crawl/
Infiltration to remove the FC marker or to
move on top of an emplacement marker.
12.5.67 HE vs. Personnel Cover State
When using the HPT to attack a hex loca-
tion containing multiple Personnel units in
differing cover states, some may be hit and
others missed depending on the applicable
HPT DRM. Make one die roll on the HPT
and apply the appropriate DRM to deter -
mine the units hit, noting that Casualty Table
shifts are not applied since the DRM are
used on the HPT (except in the case of Cush-
ion, Air Bursts, and other column shifts that
are only applied on the Casualty Table). Note:
When targeting Opportunity Fire against
Running Personnel units the attack does not
affect non-Running units in the location, nor
do any resulting morale checks resulting
from casualties.
12.5.7 Casualty Table (F2)
The Casualty Table is used for all fire ex-
cept when guns and FT fire at vehicles, H
weapons and buildings (i.e., instead of at
the building’s occupants).
12.5.71 Determine the Initial Column
a) Gunfire and FRAG Factors: Use the high-
est numbered column in the GF|FRAG row
that is not greater than the attack’s total GF
or FRAG Factors (see 12.5.661 for excep-
tions). Example: A Firegroup totaling 28 Gun-
fire Factors uses the ‘24’ column.
b) Indirect Fire and Guns Firing HE: Use
the highest numbered column in the HE row
that is not greater than the attacking unit’s
Gun Size. Example: An 88|A Gun uses the
‘80’ column (equivalent to the ‘20’ GF|FRAG
column).
c) HE-Half FRAG Equivalent: When re-
quired to use half the FRAG Factors for an
HE attack (e.g., vs. Full Cover units;
12.5.6612) find the GF|FRAG column
equivalent to the Gun Size, and then use
the highest column which is not more than
one half that value.
Example: A 76mm mortar fires in a case that
requires use of half the FRAG Factors. Nor-
mally the mortar would use the ‘75’ column
on the HE row, which is the same as the ‘14’
column on the GF|FRAG row. Half of 14 is 7.
Use the ‘6’ column in the GF|FRAG row.
12.5.72 Notes Row—The top row contains
abbreviations to remind players of the col-
umn used for certain attacks.
a) AP: An AP attack that K-KILLs a vehicle,
targets Personnel in a bunker, or destroys
an H weapon attacks passengers, manning
crews, and Personnel in a bunker on the ‘4’
column in the GF|FRAG row (see 11.5.82).
b) CF: Place a Collateral Fire marker in a
location that receives Direct Fire from at
least six GF or FRAG factors (see 12.5.10).
c) SC: Satchel Charges attack Personnel on
the ‘20’ column in the GF|FRAG row (see
12.15.22).
d) FT: Flamethrowers attack Personnel on
the ‘30’ column in the GF|FRAG row (see
14.7).
e) DOZ: Dozers attempting to destroy ter -
rain, emplacements, and wrecks make a roll
on the ‘50’ column in the GF|FRAG row,
and use the result on the Demolition Table
(DT) (see 14.13.12);
f) BT: A Bangalore Torpedo attempting to
destroy emplacements make a roll on the
‘40’ column on the GF|FRAG row and use
the result on the Demolition Table (DT) (see
14.13.12).
12.5.73 Determine the Final Column—
Apply all applicable column shifts on the
Casualty Table for the cover state of the
target unit(s). Column shifts are listed in
the ‘Sh’ column of Table F1; corresponding
HPT DRM (for attacks using the HPT) are
listed in the ‘HPT DRM’ column (they are
also listed below the HPT). Cover States that
are only used on the Casualty Table have
‘na’ listed in the HPT DRM column. Apply
any left or right column shifts to derive the
attack’s final column.
Example: A Firegroup totaling 12 GF, directed
by an NCO fires on a target in Improved cover.
The starting column is the ‘10’ column on the
GF|FRAG row. The improved cover gives two
shifts left (2L) and the leader provides one
shift right (1R) for a final modifier of one shift
left. Use the ‘8’ column.
12.5.731 Final Column Off Table—If shifts
result in a final column to the left of the ‘1’
column on the GF|FRAG row, an announced
attack has no effect (mark attacking units
as fired). If shifts move an attack to the
right of the ‘50’ column, use the ‘50’ column
(Exception: Heavy Payload).
12.5.732 Heavy Payload—In the case of
HE direct and indirect fire hits of 300+mm
(including aircraft bombs) apply a -1 DIE
ROLL MODIFIER on the Casualty Table for
EACH fraction of 100mm in excess of
200mm. Treat modified rolls less than ‘1’
as ONE.
Example: A ‘300’ Gun Value HE hit receives a
-1 DRM on the Casualty Table, i.e., a roll of
‘7’ on the 50+ column is modified to a ‘6’.
12.5.74 Roll the Result
Cross-reference a die roll on the appropri-
ate column. A ‘-’ means the fire has no ef-
fect. A ‘C#’ means the fire generates casu-
alties equal to the number represented by
the ‘#’ following the ‘C’.
12.5.741 Multiple Targets
Note that small arms attack all eligible tar-
gets in the targeted location. Make ONE roll
on the Casualty Table and distribute any
resulting casualties among ALL Personnel
(to include crews manning H weapons and
eligible passengers/riders). Use the Casu-
alty Table result on Table C6 to determine
effects on vehicles and H weapons.
12.5.8 Small Arms (GF) vs. Vehicles And
H Weapons Table (C6)
Use this table to determine damage when
Small Arms attack locations containing ve-
hicles and H weapons. Small Arms GF
NEVER use vehicle size (e.g., Very Small)
or Moving Vehicle DRMs as shifts on the
Casualty Table. After resolving the attack
on the Casualty Table, use the appropriate
row of Table C6 for the target type to deter -
mine any results:
a) AFV/APC: A C1 or greater calls for a roll
on the Suppression Table (see 12.5.175).
For effects on passengers, see 12.5.82;
b) Truck Type: A Casualty Table result equal
to a C1 results in an M-KILL; a C2-3 re-
sults in a K-KILL; a C4+ a Burning wreck.
For effects on passengers, see 12.5.82;
c) H Weapon: A Casualty Table result of C8+
calls for a roll on the F-KILL Table (see
12.5.15).
12.5.81 Small Arms F-KILL—A large vol-
ume of small arms fire may damage an AFV’s
optics. If a small arms attack against the
front facing of an AFV/APC (must be front
of the turret for turreted AFV/APC) results
in a C8+ make a roll on the F-KILL Table
(see 12.5.15).
12.5.82 Passengers’ Fate
If a transport vehicle is targeted, Passen-
gers (including those that survive or are oth-
erwise unaffected by Small Arms fire) suf-
fer the following fates:
a) Transport Vehicle Burned by Direct
Fire —Eliminate Personnel and L and M
weapons. Place H weapons in the hex with
the burning wreck, marked with F-KILL
marker;
b) Transport K-KILLed or Burned by Indi-
rect Fire or Aircraft Bombs —Eliminate
Personnel and L and M weapons. H weap-
ons undergo separate attacks (see 12.11.2b);
c) Transport Vehicle K-KILLed by Direct
Fire—Place H weapons in the hex with the
wreck. Eliminate L and M weapons. Attack
Personnel units as follows, depending on

It is the German impulse of a Fire & Movement Segment. The German

player decides to combine the GUNFIRE FACTORS of Squad ‘6’ (a 6|5|6 squad)
with his MG 34 L|MG (a 5|8 Light Weapon). Instead of 11 GF, this attack comes
to a total of 10 since 1 GF is deducted from the squad for carrying the L|MG.
Use the 10 GF column on the Casualty Table. The targeted hex, SS2, is OPEN
GROUND, and thus, the Russian 1|1|7 NCO and 6|4|8 squad derive no column
shift benefit when fired on in this terrain type. The German player marks BOTH
the squad AND the L|MG with a 'Fired' marker to denote that each unit has fired
ONCE during the turn. Immediately after rolling for the shot, a Collateral Fire 'C'
marker is placed in the hex since the firepower meets the requirement of 6 GF
or more needed for the placement of this marker. Note, the 'C' marker is placed
in the HEX, not on the units fired on. There is no connection between the
outcome of the attack and the placement of a 'C' marker. The German L|MG may
use another ROF to fire AGAIN at SS2 during the same impulse OR it may use
its 5 GF during a later impulse. If a leader was stacked in RR3, its column shift
benefit would apply to BOTH shots by the L|MG, even if the second ROF was
used in a later impulse. Since the L|MG is in a building, as per 12.6.33 it could
NOT change its COVERED ARC this turn to fire on hex QQ2 as its CA would
have to be set to QQ3/RR2 to fire on QQ2.

32
the type of weapon that produced the K-
KILL (place surviving passengers in the hex
with the wreck after resolving the attack):
Gun Firing AP: Make a roll on the Casualty
Table using the AP row of the Casualty Table
for K-KILLs from AP/APCR/APDS ammu-
nition.
Gun Firing HE and HEAT: Use the die roll
from the K-KILL Table on the Casualty
Table, using the gun’s HE equivalent and
the column shift for the passenger’s cover
state (see 11.5.7). The shifts and halving
effects of GOOD (‘G’) and FULL (‘F’ receive
HALF FRAG and 3L shift) cover positions
apply for passengers in these cover states
in vehicles that are K-KILLed.
Small Arms: Use the die roll from the small
arms attack that caused the K-KILL, apply-
ing the column shift for the passenger’s
cover state.
ATR/MG Using an HPT: Transported Per -
sonnel and weapons are not affected. Place
them in the hex with the wreck;
d) Transport Not K-KILLed —Attack Per -
sonnel units as follows, depending on the
type of weapon that attacked the vehicle:
Gun Firing AP: Transported Personnel and
weapons are not affected.
Gun Firing HE: Use the same die roll from
the K-KILL Table on the Casualty Table,
using the gun’s HE equivalency and the col-
umn shift for the Passenger’s cover state
(Exception: Personnel in ‘F’ cover are unaf-
fected).
Small Arms: Use the die roll from the Small
Arms attack vs. the vehicle, applying the
column shift for the Passenger’s cover state.
ATR/MG Using an HPT: Transported Per-
sonnel and weapons are not affected.
12.5.9 Personnel Casualties
Use the following routine to apply casual-
ties to Personnel units.
12.5.91 Personnel Units and Steps—Per-
sonnel units have a number of ‘steps,’ each
representing a state of combat effectiveness.
Each time a unit ‘absorbs’ a ‘C1’ in casual-
ties, it takes one step loss.
12.5.911 Squads—Squads have four steps.
1st step loss: Place a Casualties marker
on the squad.
2nd step loss: Remove the Casualties
marker and flip the squad to its reduced
side (the back side, with two figures).
3rd step loss: Place a Casualties marker
on the reduced squad.
4th step loss: Remove the reduced squad
from play.
12.5.912 Other Personnel Units—Crews,
FOs, BAR gunners, commissars, and lead-
ers have two steps.
1st step loss: Flip the unit to its reduced
side (the reduced side of leaders, FOs, com-
missars, and BAR gunners is called its
Wounded side).
2nd step loss: Remove the reduced/
Wounded unit from play.
12.5.92 Casualty Effects
Casualties affect Personnel units as follows:
a) The placement of a Casualties marker
reduces printed Gunfire Factors and mo-
rale level of squads and reduced squads by
ONE (Exception: Only the GF of Japanese
Personnel is reduced).
b) A wounded leader, FO/Commissar/BAR
gunner may not use Running movement.
c) The ROF of H and M weapons is reduced
to ONE if manned by a reduced crew.
d) A non-small arms attack that eliminates
a Personnel unit also eliminates any L or M
weapons the unit was carrying.
12.5.93 Targets in the Same Cover State—
The owning player chooses the units to ab-
sorb casualties among targeted units in the
same cover state.
12.5.94 Targets in Different Cover
States—If units (including transported Per-
sonnel and manning crews of H weapons)
in a targeted location or hex are in more
than one cover state, use the following rou-
tine:
a) Cross reference the die roll with the ap-
propriate column on the Casualty Table for
the units in the least beneficial cover state;
b) All Personnel in the least beneficial cover
state absorb all casualties called for;
c) If all Personnel units in the least benefi-
cial cover are eliminated and there are still
casualties to be absorbed, cross reference
the original die roll with the column for the
least beneficial cover among all surviving
units. Apply this result (if any), less any
casualties already absorbed;
d) Continue this process until no further
casualties need to be absorbed, or no
friendly units remain in the attacked loca-
tion.
12.5.95 Casualty Morale Check— Person-
nel units that survive a C# result must
check morale, as must other same-location
friendly Personnel units. Use the C# as a
morale check +DRM, and apply any other
applicable Morale Table modifiers (Excep-
tion: Japanese Personnel do not use the C#
as a DRM). If target units are in different
cover states, use the C# obtained with the
least-protective cover state modifier as a
morale check +DRM for ALL survivors.
Exceptions: Non-Running units do not have
to check morale if they are in the same lo-
cation as Running units targeted by Oppor-
tunity Fire; Full cover Personnel units who
are not eligible targets or are missed by an
HPT shot ignore combat results, including
morale checks resulting against other units
in the hex or location.
12.5.10 Collateral Fire—Place a Collateral
Fire (‘C’) marker in any hex that receives at
least 6 GF (or their equivalent in FRAG Fac-
tors) on the Casualty Table, after applying
all shifts, from a NON MOVING firing unit
using Direct Fire on the Casualty Table.
12.5.101 Entering a ‘C’ Marker—Any Per-
sonnel unit that enters a ‘C’ marker hex
without using Crawling movement must take
an immediate morale check. The unit suf-
fers casualties equal to the amount by which
it fails the check. Treat all Collateral Fire
morale checks as normal morale checks for
all other purposes. A unit with a morale of
‘10’ or greater need not roll when entering a
‘C’ marker hex.
Example: A unit may receive a Courage re-
sult from a ‘C’ marker morale check; morale
modifiers apply normally (e.g., friendly and
enemy units within MSR).
12.5.11 Hit Probability Table (A1)
Guns use this table to determine if their
shots hit the target. MG and L|AT use their
own HPTs, Tables A2 and A3 (see 12.10.1
and 12.10.2). Roll once on the HPT each
time a weapon fires.
12.5.111 Determining the Hit Probabil-
ity Number (HPN)—Cross-index the range
with the Gun Rating. Guns have a rating of
A, B, C or D (L|ATRs use the D row;
M|ATRs use the B row). If the range is 17
33
hexes or greater, use the appropriate col-
umn according to the Gun Size of the firing
unit. Use the resulting HPN to determine if
a target is hit.
Examples: A gun firing at a range of 2 hexes
uses an HPN of 9. A 57|B gun firing at a
range of 18 hexes uses an HPN of 4; a 76|B
gun firing at a range of 18 hexes uses an
HPN of 6.
12.5.112 Die Roll Modifiers (DRM)—There
are a variety of HPT DRM. DRM are listed
beneath the HPT. Most are self-explanatory;
others are explained below.
12.5.1121 Moving Vehicle—If the target is
a moving vehicle, there is a +2 modifier.
Exception: if the range to the target is 16+
hexes and the firing unit previously placed
a BOT marker on the target, there is no
moving vehicle modifier.
12.5.1122 Burst On Target (BOT)—Any H
weapon, mortar, ATR, and vehicle Main Ar -
mament acquires its target when it secures
a HIT on the HPT. Place a Burst on Target
(BOT) marker of the firing player’s choice of
color (Note: No other weapons, including
aircraft, place BOT markers). When hit us-
ing direct fire, place the BOT in the specific
location of the target. When hit using indi-
rect fire, place the BOT in the hex. A spe-
cific weapon only benefits from BOT mark-
ers it places via hits on the HPT. Subse-
quent shots at a BOT -marked target receive
a -3 HPT DRM.
12.5.1123 BOT Removal—Remove a BOT
marker if the firing weapon fires at a target
outside the current target’s location, moves,
becomes newly suppressed, is rendered
ineligible to fire, or the LOS to the hex is
blocked for any reason (e.g., smoke along
the LOS). If the BOT -marked unit is de-
stroyed or leaves the location, the placing
player may:
a) Remove the BOT marker;
b) Leave the BOT marker in the current
LOCATION for use against newly entering
enemy units;
c) If eligible, transfer the BOT marker to a
new target in the same location, or track a
moving target (see 12.5.1127).
Assault Moving units NEVER place BOT
markers.
12.5.1124 BOT & Spotting—When using
the Spotting Rules, targets marked with BOT
may be spotted at any range by the BOT -
placing units.
12.5.1125 BOT & Hit Location—When fir-
ing at targets in Hull Defilade, apply a -3
BOT DRM on the Hit Location Table after
obtaining a hit on the HPT (this is in addi-
tion to the -3 BOT HPT DRM).
12.5.1126 BOT & ROF—As long as a Gun
fires at its BOT -Marked target, double its
ROF (including any remaining ROF for the
turn in which it places the BOT marker).
Exception: some units, as shown on their
AFV cards, do not receive an increase in
ROF because they have a BOT (e.g., Ger -
man sIG II SPG). However, such units still
receive the BOT –3 HPT DRM.
Example: A ROF 2 weapon fires at, hits, and
K-KILLs an AFV. The gun may use its remain-
ing ROF of one, now doubled to two, in the
BOT marker hex if other units are in the same
location as the just-hit AFV. It may fire again,
twice, this impulse against these other units
(or at the AFV if it was not K-KILLed). If it
decides to use its second ROF to fire at a
target outside the BOT-marked location, its
remaining ROF would be ONE and it will lose
the just-placed BOT. If it keeps firing at the
same BOT-marked location the next turn, its
ROF is doubled from 2 to 4.
12.5.1127 BOT Tracking and Transfer—A
BOT placed by DIRECT fire may remain on
the target if the target moves (or follow one,
owning player’s choice), unless the target
exits the LOS of the placing unit. In that
case, remove the BOT unless there is an-
other enemy unit(s) in the last location the
originally targeted unit occupied, in which
case the firing unit may transfer the BOT to
another target. If the original unit is elimi-
nated, any Direct fire-placed BOT marker
may also be transferred to another same-
location target. BOT markers placed by In-
direct fire may never be transferred or track
a moving unit.
12.5.113 HPT Die Roll—Make a die roll on
the HPT for each shot. Apply any cumula-
tive HPT DRM to the die roll (i.e., these DRM
never modify the HPN, just the die roll that
is compared to the HPN needed for a hit). If
the resulting DRM-applied die roll is equal
to or less than the HPN needed, the shot
hits the target. If a shot fails to hit the tar-
get, it is a miss and has no effect.
Example: An HPN of ‘6’ receives a +2 HPT
DRM. The firing player rolls a ‘5’. Adding the
+2 DRM results in a final die roll of ‘7’, greater
than the HPN. The shot is a miss. If a ‘4’ was
rolled instead, the +2 HPT DRM would result
in a ‘6’, and a HIT would have occurred.
12.5.114 Critical Hit (CH)—Whenever an
HE or AP attack is made a devastating ‘Criti-
cal Hit’ may occur. Following an original HPT
or OBA die roll of ‘0’, make another roll. If
another 0 is rolled (i.e., 00), a Critical Hit
has occurred. Players may not ‘roll for’ CH
if the HPN is less than ZERO (after apply-
ing all HPT DRM) or ‘-’.
12.5.1141 AP/HEAT—Whenever any form
of AP or HEAT (i.e., includes L|AT) is fired
the PEN number is DOUBLED for use on
the K-KILL Table.
12.5.1142 HE—When firing HE ignore all
applicable LEFT cover shifts (including those
for bunkers/blockhouses) on the Casualty
Table AND apply a 2R column shift.
12.5.1143 OBA/Aircraft Bombs—To deter -
mine if a CH results, roll two dice; on a roll
of ‘00’ a Critical Hit results.
12.5.12 Hit Location Table (B)
Use this table after hitting an AFV or a Hull-
Defilade (H-D) APC/truck (use NON-TUR on
the table for ALL non-turreted vehicles). Roll
one die on the appropriate column (Non-
Turreted or Turreted). The result is the as-
pect struck: Turret, Upper Hull (UH), Lower
Hull (LH), or Track. If the target is H-D,
modify the die roll for target size and BOT.
12.5.121 Track Hit—When a Track aspect
is hit, immediately make a roll on the M-
KILL Table (see 12.5.14); do not make a
roll on the K-KILL Table.
12.5.13 K-KILL Table (C1)
Use this table for non-track hits on AFVs,
and for all hits on APC and trucks. This
table has two sections: one for attacks us-
ing AP, APCR, APDS, HEAT, and L|AT (SCW)
ammunition, and one for attacks using HE
ammunition (MGs and ATRs use the AP sec-
tion).
12.5.131 PEN vs. AF Differential (DIFF)—
Subtract the target’s AF from the gun’s PEN
to obtain the Differential (DIFF). Use the
appropriate DIFF column on the K-KILL
Table, using the AP or HE section of the
table depending on the type of ammunition
that secured the hit (if the DIFF is less than
‘–1’, the shot has no effect).
12.5.132 Armor Factors (AF)—The armor
factor of an AFV varies for each aspect and
facing combination (AF for APC/trucks does
not vary by aspect/facing, see 12.5.1322).
Determine an AFV target’s facing in relation
to the firing weapon. By definition, this is
the target’s hexside that the LOS crosses.
If the LOS is traced exactly between the
flank and the front, the facing is front if the
target is MOVING and flank if it is STA-
TIONARY. If the LOS is traced exactly be-
tween the flank and rear, it is rear if sta-
tionary and flank if moving. On the AFV
Card, cross-reference the target facing and
aspect to determine the AF (remember that
facing is different from aspect: the LOS as
it enters the target hex determines the
former; the Hit Location Table determines
the latter). If an AFV has a black dot for an
AF, the AF for that aspect & facing is con-
sidered ‘un-armored’ and is always -1.
12.5.1321 Facing of Same Hex Vehicle
Targets—When firing at a vehicle that is in
the same hex or location as the firing unit,
determine the target facing by using the
direction the vehicle was moving when it
entered the hex. If both units occupy the
same hex at the beginning of an impulse,

C AS U ALT Y TAB L E MOD IF IE D GU N F IR E E X AMP L E L IN E OF S IGH T E X AMP L E

ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GF GF GF GF GF GF GF GF GF 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
- -
1 - 4 - 4 2 - - 1 2
2 ● ● - ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 6 - - 6 6 1 6 6 6
3 - - ● - ● - - - -
3 - - - - 4 - - - -
4 ● ● - ● ● ● - ● -
4 8 8 - - 6 2 - 8 -
5 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
5 4 6 6 4 - 1 6 2 6
6 ● ● - ● ● ● ● ● -
6 2 6 - 4 1 - 6 6 -
7 - ● - - ● ● ● - ●
7 - 8 - - 8 2 - - 4

8 1 4 - 4 1 - - - - 8 ● ● - ● ● ● - ● -

9 6 8 - - 8 2 4 - - 9 ● ● - - ● ● ● - ●

N u mb er = C asu alty Tab le co lu mn u sed fo r attack ● = L OS IS GOOD

The tables above use the example at right (on page 35). The Line of Sight
Example provides for a simple review of the inter-relationships of differ-
ent terrain on varying levels. The Casualty Table Modified Gunfire Example
table uses the actual Casualty Table column used for each GF attack. For
example, squad ‘8’, with ‘5’ printed Gunfire Factors, uses the ‘4’ column on
the table prior to any shifts due to terrain.
Squad ‘3’ only has a LOS to ‘5’ due to its LOS following the continuous
Sunken Road from R36 to R37, then as it exits the sunken road to R38,
with the R37/R38 hexside acting as a Linear Depression contour between
the lower and higher levels. It would also have a LOS to any adjacent units
(e.g., hex S37; Q37). A unit in any hex adjacent to ‘3’ would fire at hex R36
as if it were open ground. A squad in Q37 would receive the one column
shift LEFT for the hedge on the Q37-R36 hexside if fired at by ‘3’ in R36.
Squad ‘7’ cannot see ‘8’ due to the SAME LEVEL Blocking terrain in the
form of the +5 levels-high Hedge on the Q36-R35 hexside.
Squad ‘4’ fires at ‘1’ using its full ‘8’ Gunfire factors since it’s up on a hillock,
providing an unobstructed LOS over the Obscuring terrain, Crops, in O38-
P38. When an LOS between two hexes of terrain goes right down the
hexside, only ONE Obscuring terrain hex is added to the shot, i.e., not a
TWO column shift LEFT.
The Wall hexsides in hex O35 have no impact on fire at or by squad ‘6’
since it is at Level +10, above the +5 level walls on ground level. For the
same reason, Squad ‘2’, UP on a partial hillock, can see Squad ‘7’ and fire
at it ignoring the hedge in R37/Q38 as well as any Crops that may be along
its LOS. Squad ‘6’ cannot exit its hex from its current location. It will have
to use 1 MP (or Infiltration) to move ‘downstairs’ to the ground level loca-
tion. If ‘6’ was in the ground level now, the only squads it could see would
be ‘8’ and ‘7’ AND ‘2’ (since it is UP on the Hillock at Level +5). Note fire at
‘6’ would either receive the benefit of the wall OR the building (squad ‘6’
owning player’s choice), not both.
If squad ‘3’ was in hex R35, it could exit the sunken road moving along the
road, into Q35, at the cost of 1 MP. Hex R35 is at the same level as Q35.
If it wanted to move from R35 directly to R34, it would pay 1 MP + CoT.

34
use the facing when the last moving unit
entered the hex.
12.5.1322 APC and Truck AF—APCs and
Trucks use generic AFs: 0 for APCs; -1 for
Trucks/H weapons. These AF do not vary
with facing/aspect.
12.5.133 Non-HE Penetration Number
(PEN)—When firing non-HE ammunition,
determine the Penetration Number of the
weapon by cross-referencing the Gun Size,
ammunition, and range on the Gun Penetra-
tion Values Table (Play Aid 5) provided for
each nationality (this information is repeated
on individual AFV Cards for convenience).
Example: An American 75|B gun using AP
ammunition and firing at a range of 2 hexes
has a PEN of 10.
12.5.1331 HE Penetration Number
(PEN)—The HE Penetration Table (HE) pro-
vides the Penetration Number for HE am-
munition from all guns. This PEN does not
vary by range. Note that HE PEN is doubled
when targeting APCs and trucks.
12.5.134 K-KILL Results—Make a roll on
the appropriate DIFF column. The die roll
must be less than or equal to the number
for a result to apply from the following:
BURN —The target vehicle is ‘brewed up’.
Replace the target vehicle with a burning
wreck marker (the back side of a wreck
marker, with red flames).
K-KILL—The crew or multiple vehicle sys-
tems are out of action. The vehicle is
knocked out permanently, but not burning.
Replace the target vehicle with a wreck
marker. For ef fects on passengers, see
12.5.82.
POSS K-KILL—A portion of the crew or ve-
hicle system may be out of action. POSS K-
KILL results are always treated as K-KILLs
for APCs and Trucks. For AFVs use the
POSS K-KILL Results Matrix (PK) to cross-
reference the Vehicle Type with the Aspect
& Facing hit to determine the result:
a) Immediate K-KILL : The target is K-
KILLed;
b) Roll for M-KILL: Make a roll on the M-
KILL Table (D2). See 12.5.14;
c) Roll for F-KILL: Make a roll on the F-
KILL Table (D1). See 12.5.15.
Note that some results on the POSS K-KILL
Results Matrix call for rolls on both the M-
KILL and F-KILL Tables.
12.5.14 M-KILL Table (D2) —An M-KILL
result destroys a vehicle’s mobility, i.e.,
suspension or track integrity is lost. Use
this table when specified on the POSS K-
KILL Results Matrix AND whenever a roll
on the Hit Location Table results in a Track
hit and in any instance a roll on the M-KILL
Table is called for. An M-KILLed vehicle is
NOT considered a ‘moving’ HPT target.
12.5.141 Procedure—Use the column for
the aspect struck. A roll less than or equal
to the number provided results in an M-
KILL; mark the vehicle with an M-KILL
marker. If the target is M-KILLed, also make
a roll on the Bail Out Table (see 12.5.16; if
an M-KILLed vehicle has already received
an F-KILL, the crew AUTOMATICALLY bails
out) and the Suppression Table (see
12.5.17).
12.5.142 M-KILL Effects—Vehicles may not
move or pivot for the remainder of the game.
Any turret or 360 degree gun with which
the vehicle is equipped may still rotate, al-
though the vehicle counter itself may not
move or change its vehicle covered arc.
12.5.143 Failure to M-KILL—A roll on the
M-KILL Table that does not result in an M-
KILL instead generates:
a) a K-KILL result for non-track hits;
b) a no effect result for TRACK hits; make a
roll on the Suppression Table.
12.5.15 F-KILL Table (D1)—An F-KILL re-
sult represents a unit’s loss of firepower. In
addition to using this table when specified
on the POSS K-KILL Results Matrix, use
this table if a small arms attack against the
FRONT facing of an AFV (must be FRONT
of the turret for turreted AFVs) or against
an H weapon results in a C8 or greater.
12.5.151 Procedure—Use the row on Table
D1 appropriate for the attack (the ‘C8+ GF
F-KILL’ row for small arms attacks, the ‘F-
KILL’ row for all others). A roll less than or
equal to the number provided results in an
F-KILL; mark the vehicle with an F-KILL
marker. If the target is F-KILLed, also make
a roll on the Bail Out Table (see 12.5.16; if
an F-KILLed vehicle has already received
an M-KILL, the crew AUTOMATICALLY bails
out) and the Suppression Table (see
12.5.17).
12.5.152 F-KILL Effects—F-KILLed units
may not fire ANY weapon for the remainder
of the game. If the F-KILLed vehicle passes
the Bail Out check, it exits along the near-
est friendly map-edge at its earliest oppor-
tunity.
12.5.153 Failure to F-KILL—A roll on the
F-KILL Table that does not result in an F-
KILL instead generates:
a) a K-KILL for non-Mortar HPT attacks;
b) a No Effect result for small arms attacks;
c) a No Effect result for Indirect HE/FFE/
Bomb/Rocket attacks.

7
The example at left is used for the Line Of Sight
Example and the Casualty Table Modified Gun-
LOS+10marker fire Example on page 34. The map used in this
example is Scottish Corridor mapsheet 1.
6
Squad ‘1’ is in a crops hex on Level +10. It has no
LOS to squad ‘3’ since the latter is down in a
sunken road. It also cannot see ‘7’ due to the
hedge in the R36-Q37 hexside. The hedge is +5
levels high and blocks same level (or lower) LOS.
Squads ‘1’ and ‘7’ are both on Level +10.
8 3
Squad ‘6’ has a LOS to ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘4’, ‘5’, and ‘8’ be-
cause it is up in the steeple in hex O35. It has to
pay for the crops in hexes O37 and O38 when
firing on ‘1’, with each reducing its fire by one
column LEFT. Its shot on ‘4’ is reduced by one
column due to the crops in P36. It ignores the
hedge on the P36-O36 hexside as it is lower than
4
the firing and target unit. The hedge is on Level
0. Squad ‘6’ does not pay for any crops along the
LOS to ‘2’ since the latter is on a hillock in hex
9 Q39, raising it up +5 levels and allowing it to see,
and be seen, over +5 terrain like crops, hedges,
walls, and wrecks.
Squad ‘3’ can ONLY see ‘5’ since the former is
5 down in a sunken road. And since a sunken road
is -10 levels below the terrain it cuts into, ‘5’ is
treated as if fire from ‘3’ crosses a +10 hill hex,
1 2 providing a one column shift LEFT from ‘3’. If
squad ‘3’ was a gun instead, a +1 HPN DRM
would be applied against ‘5’ instead of the col-
umn shift.

35
12.5.16 Bail Out Table (E)
Use this table when an AFV, APC, OR
ARMED TRUCK has been M-KILLed or F-
KILLed. Cross-reference the M- or F-KILL
Result with a die roll. A ‘B’ result on this
table means the vehicle crew has bailed out;
mark the vehicle with a ‘Bail Out’ marker.
Vehicle crews are not represented by a
counter and never appear on the battlefield.
A vehicle marked with a ‘Bail Out’ marker
may not move or fire for the remainder of
the scenario, except if re-manned. While it
is not considered K-KILLed for Victory Point
purposes, the same quantity of VP are
awarded (note that another attack that K-
KILLs a bailed-out AFV earns ANOTHER 6
VP).
12.5.161 Re-Manning Bailed Out Ve-
hicles—A friendly full strength crew may
enter a Bailed Out vehicle in the same man-
ner as Personnel entering a vehicle for trans-
port. The vehicle remains marked as Bailed
Out (place the marker to the side of the
vehicle, and remove the Personnel crew from
the map). If the vehicle is not F-KILLed, the
new crew may fire its weapons. The vehicle
may NOT move, or change the vehicle or
turret covered arc. If the re-manned vehicle
sustains another Bail Out result, do not place
the Personnel crew back on the map; elimi-
nate it in the same manner as a Bailed Out
vehicle crew.
12.5.17 Suppression Table (D3)—When-
ever a hit fails to K-KILL an AFV or APC
(including after M-KILL and F-KILL results),
make a roll on the Suppression Table, us-
ing the appropriate row for Gun Size or C#
(for casualties-produced checks on the
table). On a roll less than or equal to the
required number, mark the target with a
Suppressed marker, orienting the marker
with the turret facing (or ignoring facing for
non-turreted vehicles).
12.5.171 Elite Tank Commander DRM—
Vehicles with an Elite Tank Commander (see
15.6) receive a +1 DRM on Table D3 when
checking for their own suppression.
12.5.172 Turret Aspect Automatic Sup-
pression—Automatically suppress an AFV
when it is hit in the Turret by HE/AP of
75mm or greater.
12.5.173 Suppression Effects —A Sup-
pressed vehicle uses the Suppressed row
on the Spotting Table (if Spotting is in ef-
fect), has a maximum ROF of ONE, loses
any BOT it PREVIOUSLY placed on a target
unit, may not fire its AAMG, and incurs a
+2/2L modifier. Note: This 2L modifier is
ALSO applied to FT attacks by vehicles. Note
that already suppressed vehicles may place
new BOT markers on targets they hit.
12.5.174 Additional Suppression Effects—
Passengers carried by a suppressed vehicle
are also suppressed; they may not fire in
any manner, nor may they serve as an FO
or Spotter. A suppressed OT vehicle may
not fire any of its weapons.
12.5.175 Casualty Table Suppression—
When FRAG or HE attack an AFV/APC, roll
on the appropriate row of the Casualty Table.
On a C1 or greater result, ALSO make a roll
on the Suppression Table using the ‘C# Re-
sult*’ row. A roll less than or equal to the ‘#’
portion of the C# results in Suppression.
Example: On a C2 result a roll of two or less
will result in Suppression.
Non Suppressed AFVs and APCs may also
be attacked on the Casualty Table by GF in
an attempt to Suppress them, as may OT
vehicles at ALL times (even if already marked
as Suppressed).
12.5.176 Removing Suppressed Markers—
During the End of Turn Segment, vehicles
may remove Suppressed markers by pass-
ing a morale check. No morale modifiers
apply to Suppression removal morale checks.
AFVs have their morale levels listed on their
AFV Cards. All APCs have a morale level of
7. Personnel inside a suppressed APC do
not roll to remove suppression; they become
unsuppressed when the APC passes its mo-
rale check.
12.6 FIRE RESTRICTIONS
Certain restrictions limit fire opportunities
and reduce ROF and GF during attacks. No
unit or weapon may split one ‘shot’ of GF or
one hit attempt on the HPT between two
different target hexes, but units with a ROF
greater than one, vehicles with multiple
weapons, and Personnel carrying weapons
may target different hexes.
12.6.1 Impulse Use
When one unit or Firegroup uses direct fire,
it uses one impulse, even if using multiple
weapons.
Example: An AFV may fire its main arma-
ment and its machine-guns during one im-
pulse, and may target more than one hex in
the process.
Note: A unit so-used may draw a Gun Duel
before it can finish using its weapons during
an impulse.
12.6.2 Rate of Fire
Units may not fire more than their available
ROF. Units lacking a ROF value (provided
in a blue square) have a ROF of ‘1’. A Per-
sonnel unit may thus fire its GF only once
per turn. Units with multiple weapons (e.g.,
an AFV with gun, CMG and BMG weapons)
may fire each weapon separately during one
impulse (or Opportunity Fire attack), noting
any ROF restrictions that apply to that unit
or weapon type.
12.6.21 ROF Restrictions —All L and M
weapons, as well as any AA weapon, may
fire any available ROF during the same im-
pulse (noting covered arc ROF restrictions;
see 12.6.33). All other weapons may not
use more than one ROF per impulse, un-
less it places a BOT on its target. Excep-
tions: Assault Fire (see 12.8.21), Opportu-
nity Fire (see 12.7.2), Gun Duels (see 12.9).
12.6.3 Covered Arc
All H and vehicle-mounted weapons have a
restricted field-of-fire known as a Covered
Arc (CA). These weapons must pivot to fire
at any target outside of their current CA:
the FRONT two hexes for all vehicles, un-
less marked with a TURRET marker (in
which the CA of the turret is used instead),
and the front two hexes of all Guns. All L
and M weapons may fire in any direction
(Exception: Terrain-based CA restrictions;
see 12.6.33).
12.6.31 Vehicle and H Weapon Cover Arc—
During Direct Fire (or Opportunity Fire), a
vehicle or H weapon may change its Vehicle
Covered Arc (VCA; separate from that of its
turret) and/or rotate its turret any number
of hexspines before it fires. Apply appro-
priate HPT DRM (or Casualty Table column
shifts for non-HPT fire) to any fire conducted
during the impulse (or Opportunity Fire
shot). When moving, a vehicle pays one
36
Movement Point for each hexspine it pivots
its VCA. It may independently rotate its tur-
ret one hexspine for each MP it spends while
IN a hex (not total MP spent during the
move).
12.6.32 Changing Covered Arc Without
Firing—Vehicles and H weapons may change
their CA without firing. A unit that changes
its CA without firing is considered to have
moved (crawling movement for H Weapons,
assault movement for vehicles); mark the
unit with a Moved marker. If hidden, a unit
changing CA without firing may stay hidden
if not in the LOS (and Spotting Range if in
use) of an enemy unit.
12.6.33 Terrain-Based ROF Covered Arc
Restrictions—When in a Building (Excep-
tion: Rooftop), Rubble, or Woods location,
or under a Bunker, all multiple ROF weap-
ons have a special covered arc restriction.
The weapon’s first attack determines its CA.
Orient the weapon to face any CA that in-
cludes the target hex (noting there is no shift
or HPT DRM for setting the CA for a L or M
weapon). The weapon may not change its
CA, or fire at targets outside its CA, during
the remainder of the current phase or seg-
ment (Exception: They may fire at vehicles
that enter their hex from any hexside with-
out reference to this set CA).
12.6.4 Counter Orientation
When pivoting, turn the entire gun or ve-
hicle counter to face its new covered arc,
or rotate the turret of a vehicle that has
one. A player may change a vehicle’s CA
even when the vehicle has a turret (e.g., to
face its stronger frontal armor to an enemy
threat); any combination of vehicle AND tur-
ret CA changes apply cumulatively to any
shot taken immediately following the pivot.
12.6.5 DRM for Changing CA
The DRM for changing CA varies by type.
a) Non-turreted units incur a +3/3L modi-
fier for the first hexspine change, with an
additional +1/1L per hexspine change there-
after;
b) Units with a dashed-line circle around
their Gun Size (‘Slow’ traverse turrets) in-
cur a +2/2L modifier for the first hexspine
change, and +1/1L per hexspine thereaf-
ter;
c) Units with a solid circle around their gun
Size (‘Fast’ traverse turrets/guns) incur a
+1/1L modifier for the first and all subse-
quent hexspine changes.
12.6.6 Covered Arc DRM and ROF
When a stationary weapon with multiple
ROF changes its CA, apply the HPT DRM
for a pivot only on the FIRST HPT die roll
following the CA change. Subsequent shots
receive no HPT DRM, unless the unit
changes CA AGAIN before making a new
die roll on the HPT. Treat any vehicle-
mounted MG with multiple ROF in the same
manner when changing CA.
12.7 OPPORTUNITY FIRE
Eligible units may use Opportunity Fire to
attack enemy units that move in the firing
unit’s LOS (and Spotting Range if in use)
during the Fire & Movement Segment. The
firing player may check if he has an LOS to
the moving unit; there is no penalty if none
exists (unlike when using an impulse to fire,
which results in a pass when no LOS ex-
ists). The following actions ‘trigger’ Oppor-
tunity Fire:
a) Any expenditure of a Movement Point;
b) Transport Loading/Unloading Personnel;
c) Pivoting vehicles, turrets, and Heavy
weapons (see 12.9.4 for First to Fire re-
strictions on the use of Opportunity Fire in
these instances). Opportunity Fire may not
be used until after the triggering unit makes
a minimum of one hexspine change in its
facing/covered arc/turret covered arc.
12.7.1 Opportunity Fire Eligibility
A unit that wishes to use Opportunity Fire
must be otherwise eligible to use Direct Fire.
All rules for Direct Fire apply normally. Note
that only the non-impulse player may use
Opportunity Fire.
12.7.2 Opportunity Fire ROF Limit
A unit may not use more Opportunity Fire
ROF against a moving unit than the target
unit spends in MP while:
a) entering the targeted location it is first
fired on in using Opportunity Fire;
b) using MP to pivot or change any CA (e.g.,
VCA) of a vehicle or turret.
12.7.3 Opportunity Fire Routine
Opportunity Fire takes place in the follow-
ing order:
1) Enemy unit triggers Opportunity Fire per
12.7 above;
2) Opportunity firing units use ONE avail-
able firing opportunity (unlike firing during
an impulse, which may allow a unit to fire
all of its ROF);
3) Surviving moving unit may continue its
movement impulse (to include firing one shot
using Assault Fire, if eligible);
4) Repeat 1-3 above as long as Opportunity
and Assault firing unit(s) want to use re-
maining ROF. Place a Fired ‘F’ marker nor-
mally on units that use Opportunity Fire.
12.7.4 Target Using Running Movement
Opportunity Fire against Running Person-
nel units (including Personnel pushing guns)
does not affect other non-Running Person-
nel units in the location, including morale
checks following Casualties results.
12.8 ASSAULT FIRE
In certain cases, units using Assault move-
ment may move AND fire. This is known as
Assault Fire. An Assault moving unit may
use Assault Fire before moving, during its
move (after it spends any MP), or in the last
hex it enters. A unit may use Assault Fire
only during its movement impulse; it can-
not save its Assault Fire for later use.
12.8.1 Personnel Assault Fire
Personnel units utilizing Crawling or Assault
movement may fire their printed Gunfire
Factors at half their normal Gunfire (note
that Running units may never use Assault
Fire).
12.8.11 Platoon Use—Personnel units mov-
ing as a Platoon may use Assault Fire as a
Firegroup, but units in a Platoon are NOT
required to all fire at the same time, nor at
the same target. An Assault firing Platoon
may not form a Firegroup with other units.
12.8.12 Light Weapons and Assault Fire—
A Personnel unit carrying an L weapon may
fire the weapon using Assault Fire, although
the L weapon does NOT have to fire at the
same time as the unit, nor at the same tar-
get, as long as ALL Assault Fire is con-
ducted during the unit’s movement impulse.
When fired using Assault Fire, L Weapons
fire at half their normal Gunfire Factors for
non-HPT attacks, have a reduced ROF of
one, and must add a +3 HPT DRM for at-
tacks on the HPT.
12.8.2 Vehicle Assault Fire
Vehicles may fire all available
weapons when using Assault
Fire. Vehicle weapons must
add the Assault Fire +5 HPT
DRM; the GF of non-HPT fire
is HALVED.
12.8.21 Vehicle ROF —Ve-
hicles with multiple ROF
weapons may use their entire
ROF during Assault Fire, but
may only use ONE shot of its
ROF for each MP spent in the
hex from which it fires. Any
combination of different weap-
ons may fire during the same
MP expenditure. Vehicles may
spend more MP than a hex re-
quires for entrance to increase
ROF opportunities
12.8.22 Platoon Use —AFVs
moving as a Platoon may use
Assault Fire. AFVs of a Platoon
are neither required to all fire
at the same time, nor at the
same target.
12.9 GUN DUELS
In some cases, a gun-armed
vehicle or H weapon may ini-
tiate a ‘Gun Duel’ and return
The above AFV 'standoff' example will be used to illumi-
fire immediately when fired on
nate a number of points. It is the German Impulse and his
using the HPT during the Fire
StuG IIIg is parked up on a Hill hex, +10 levels higher than
& Movement Segment. The
two American M4A1 Shermans. If the StuG fires on the
unit returning fire is the ‘re-
M4A1 in hex R14, the latter is in Hull Defilade to the SP-
sponding’ unit. A player initi-
gun's fire. Thus, the facing of the Turret ONLY is consid-
ating a Gun Duel does not use
ered AND only a Turret (TUR) aspect will result in a hit.
an Impulse. A unit that is fir -
ing may also use the Gun Duel
The StuG IIIg is also in H-D position, up on the Hill, for return
process to assert his ‘right’ to
fire from both M4A1 'C' in hex R14 and 'D' in hex O13. To
fire BEFORE any Opportunity
obtain an effective hit on the H-D M4A1 'C' in hex R14, a TUR
Fire may take place. Mark ‘re-
aspect must be rolled. Table 'B' is consulted after a hit is
sponding’ units that fire in a
obtained using the HPT. On a die roll of 1-3, a Turret aspect is
Gun Duel with an ‘F’ marker. struck, resulting in a hit. However, there are some die roll
Once initiated, complete a Gun modifiers provided on Table B, for use only on that table. One
Duel before any other actions. is for target size. The M4A1 is a 'Large' target, and a -1 DRM
12.9.1 Eligibility is applied, making it EASIER to obtain a TUR hit (and thus hit a
To initiate a Gun Duel, the large H-D tank). Thus, on an aspect die roll of 1-4, the Sherman
responding unit must be oth- is hit in its turret. An aspect die roll of 5-0 results in an ineffec-
erwise eligible to fire AND cur - tive result and is treated in the same manner as a 'miss'.
rently have a BOT marker on
For Gun Duels involving AFVs with spon-
the firing enemy unit (Exception: Elite Tank
son-mounted (e.g., Grant; Lee) or turret MA
Commanders may initiate a Gun Duel with-
and hull-mounted Guns (Char B1 bis; Pzkw
out having a BOT marker on the firing unit)
B2), BOTH weapons may duel indepen-
AND not otherwise restricted by failing to
dently with two different targets (or one tar -
be the First to Fire (see 12.9.4) unit due to
get) if they have BOT markers in place.
comparing HPT DRM.
12.9.4 First to Fire—In the event of a Gun
12.9.2 Gun Duel Routine
Duel or Opportunity Fire against an H
Use the following routine for a Gun Duel.
weapon/turreted gun/vehicle using the
a) A gun initiates direct fire on a unit eli-
HPT, a unit may fire FIRST if its total DRM
gible to declare a Gun Duel:
for pivoting/changing Covered Arc is less
b) The responding player declares a Gun
than the opposing unit.
Duel following the announcement of the fir-
12.10 ADDITIONAL COMBAT TABLES
ing player’s shot, but before the firing player
This section provides detailed explanations
makes a roll on the HPT;
of the other tables used to conduct combat.
c) Both players simultaneously make their
12.10.1 MG Hit Probability Table (A2)
HPT die roll;
This table is a separate HPT for MG attacks
d) The player rolling lowest (use the FINAL,
against vehicles. This table may be used
i.e., modified die roll) fires first (i.e., if the
for M|MG and ALL vehicle MG when firing
shot renders the enemy unit unable to fire
against vehicles. The HPT DRM found un-
for any reason, the enemy’s shot is consid-
der the HPT (A1) apply normally. Note that
ered to have never taken place). If the roll
MGs using Small arms fire on the Casualty
is a tie, the firing player fires first;
Table against vehicles may opt to use the
e) If still able to fire, the losing unit’s attack
HPT (the A2 table) or use their GF on the
then takes place;
Casualty Table and compare any C# results
f) The opposing player’s unit may fire again
obtained there with the appropriate target
if eligible, and so on.
row on the Small Arms (GF) vs. Vehicles
12.9.3 Sponsons And Multiple Weapons
and H Weapons Table (C6).
37
12.10.11 MG PEN Value—Machine-guns use
a PEN value of ‘1’ for calculating the PEN
vs. AF Differential (DIFF) and are treated
as K-KILL Table AP.
12.10.2 L|AT Hit Probability Table (A3)
This table is a separate HPT for Light AT
Weapons. Use this table when L|AT fire at
vehicles or eligible Personnel targets (see
14.4.3), and use any applicable HPT DRM
from the HPT (A1).
12.10.3 Indirect HE | FFE | Aircraft
Bomb | Rocket Attacks vs. Vehicles and
H Weapons Table (C2)—Use this table to
determine damage when FFE, on-board in-
direct fire, Aircraft Bombs or rockets at-
tack a vehicle or H weapon on the Casualty
Table. Use the row for the appropriate tar-
get type; a Casualty Table C# result equal
to a C# on Table C2 generates the indicated
M-/F-KILL chance (roll on the correspond-
ing M-/F-KILL table) OR an automatic K-
KILL or Burn (apply the Casualty Table re-
sult to Personnel in the targeted location
normally).
12.10.4 Flamethrower vs. Vehicles and H
Weapons Table (C3)
Use this table to determine damage when a
flamethrower attacks a vehicle or H Weapon.
Flamethrowers do not use the HPT or K-
KILL Table. Make a roll directly on this table,
using the appropriate row for the target;
any roll less than or equal to the listed num-
ber results in a burning wreck (i.e., the
equivalent of a BURN result on the K-KILL
Table) or H weapon elimination (AND place
a Flame marker in any location that is Flam-
mable (see 7.1, under ‘Flam’). Automatically
Suppress any vehicle that survives
flamethrower attack. Note: When
flamethrowers attack manned H Weapons
and vehicles with passengers, make one die
roll and use the result on both the FT Col-
umn of the Casualty Table (to determine the
result for Personnel) and Table C3 (to de-
termine results for H weapons or vehicles).
When firing a flamethrower there is always
the possibility it will run out of fuel (see
14.7.5).
12.10.41 Smoke in target hex or along
LOS—Apply a +4 DRM for EACH smoke hex
in/along the LOS to the target location.
12.10.5 H Weapon Destruction Table HPT
Hits By Weapons ≤ 20mm (C4)
Use this table to determine damage when
non-MG weapons (e.g., ATR; 20|B H|AA
guns) of 20mm or less obtain a hit on the b) H weapons;
HPT against an H weapon. Use the row for c) Vehicles (Note the effects on Passengers
the type of ammunition that hit the H when a vehicle is destroyed), noting any
weapon and roll a die; an ‘F’ result on this shifts from the Indirect Fire vs. Vehicle Shifts
table F-KILLs the H weapon. table;
12.11 INDIRECT FIRE d) Unoccupied building locations (for cre-
On Board Mortars and off-board artillery ation of rubble and Flame).
ALWAYS attacks during the Indirect Fire Absorb casualties suffered by Personnel
Segment. Howitzers (HOW) may use either units; refer results from the attack roll
Direct or Spotted Indirect Fire. On board against other targets to the Indirect
mortars may also use Spotted Indirect Fire. HE|FFE|Aircraft Bomb Attacks vs. Vehicles
All other Guns must use Direct Fire. and H Weapons Table (C2) (see 12.10.3).
12.11.1 Indirect Fire Segment Attack Rou- 12.11.21 Indirect Fire vs. Vehicle Shifts
tines Table (IS) —This table specifies Casualty
There are three types of attacks that take Table shifts for Indirect Fire attacks against
place during the Indirect Fire Segment: vehicles. These shifts are cumulative with
a) On-Board Mortar with LOS to target: all applicable cover state modifiers.
Use the routine outlined in 12.5.21 to de- 12.11.22 Full Cover Units—Units in Full
termine hits using the HPT. See 14.6 for cover under an emplacement receive a HE-
additional rules relating to the use of mor- Half FRAG Equivalent for indirect fire. Units
tars; in Full cover in an APC share the fate of
b) On Board Mortar/Howitzer Using Spot- their vehicle. Units under FC markers re-
ted On Board Indirect Fire: There must be ceive NO additional cover benefit. See
an adjacent Spotter (see 14.6.7) or FO with 12.5.661 for exceptions.
an LOS to the target; use the routine out- 12.11.23 Terrain—Hexside terrain does not
lined in 12.12.2 (i.e., place CFF/FFE and provide cover against Indirect Fire. In-hex
attack one target hex); A minimum range of terrain provides cover normally.
TEN hexes applies for howitzers (M|HOW 12.11.24 FFE vs. 12+ SP of Personnel—
and H|HOW weapons). See 14.6 for addi- Make an additional roll on the Casualty Table
tional rules relating to the use of mortars when OBA attacks a location containing 12+
and howitzers; SP of Personnel. Make this roll AFTER all
c) Off-board artillery battery (OBA): Use others the FFE attack requires; apply any
the routine outlined in 12.12.2 (i.e., place results as casualties and morale checks
CFF/FFE and attack a seven hex cluster). ONLY (i.e., ignore rubble, flame, etc.)
An FO assigned to the battery must have 12.11.3 Forward Observers (FO)
an LOS to the target. FOs (one man Personnel units [usually
12.11.2 Spotted Indirect Fire/OBA Attack 1|1|8] with an FO triangle icon) direct off-
a Resolution board artillery fire. Each off-board battery
Consult the Indirect Fire Effects Table (G) in a scenario has one FO counter (if an OOB
to determine the number of separate adja- lists a battery but no FO, add an FO to that
cent HEXES an Indirect Fire attack affects side’s OOB). FOs are treated as Leaders
(e.g., an FFE usually attacks six adjacent for carrying/firing L and M weapons, and
hexes centered around one target hex, for being used as an alternate crew ONLY (i.e.,
a total of seven hexes; an on board mortar they may not lead Firegroups or otherwise
or howitzer [HOW] attacks one hex). All FO affect an attack by another friendly unit).
directed/Spotted Indirect Fire uses the They may self-rally.
12.12.2 routine and makes ONE roll on the 12.11.31 Battery Assignment—Assign one
Casualty Table for each target HEX (includ- FO to a battery or gun on a side note. These
ing empty hexes that contains terrain that assignments are permanent. An off-board
may result in rubble/flame). Casualties are battery may not fire for the remainder of
applied normally among units in the entire the game if the battery’s FO is eliminated
hex. Indirect Fire attacks the following units (Exception: A battery may fire if a leader or
in a hex: FO assigned to a different battery calls in a
a) Personnel units (including non FULL cover Barrage; see 12.11.35).
Passengers and crews manning guns); 12.11.32 Set Up—If optional hidden set up
In the example at left, the Tiger tank pays 1 Movement Point to enter
hex BB5. It enters the hex across the AA5-BB5 hexside, following the
road as if entering the hex normally (i.e., as if no building was present).
Once it enters BB5 it may head into CC5, reverse back into AA5, or
follow the road along the hexside, entering CC6. For our example, the
tank moves into CC5, spending another 1 MP. Once there, it continues
to DD4, spending another 1/2 (half) MP. When moving along a road +
building hex (or a hexside road) the cost is DOUBLED (to 1 from 1/2 MP
on a road) and ONLY Assault movement may be used.
The 6-pdr in BB6 does NOT have a LOS to the Tiger tank when it moves
along the road in hex BB5 since the LOS, drawn normally by using a
straight-edge between the sighting dots of BB6-BB5, hits the building in
BB5 before touching the road. When the tank continues to CC5, the 6-
pdr can see it, since the LOS can be drawn to touch BOTH a hexside
crossed by the tank when it entered CC5 AND the road IN hex CC5.
Opportunity Fire ONLY could be used when the Tiger first entered CC5.
If it stopped there, the LOS would have to be traced normally to the
sighting dot in CC5 (i.e., not to the hexside as can be done against a
moving target). The ability to trace a LOS to the hexside also applies
against personnel.
38
rules are in use an FO may always set up
SSR. Players fire their OBA batteries dur-
hidden in allowable terrain.
ing the Indirect Fire Segment using alter -
12.11.321 Off-Map Set Up—FOs may set
nating impulses. There is no limit to the
up off-map by SSR. Set up the FO in a map-
number of attacks an OBA battery may
edge hex in accordance with the SSR; the
make during a scenario.
only function of an FO’s hex is to serve as
12.12.1 Registration
the source of the FO’s LOS; the FO cannot
SSRs may provide one or more ‘Registra-
be attacked in any way.
tions’ for an OBA battery or on-map gun. A
12.11.33 FO Spotting—FOs must be sta-
registration is a target hex the battery or
tionary to observe their targets. They may
gun has ‘ranged’ and may hit more easily.
not observe and then move in the same turn.
Before play begins, but after all set up, play-
Mark an FO with an ‘F’ marker when their
ers make a side note of their registered tar-
corresponding battery or gun fires. Note:
get hexes and the battery/gun to which they
Sponson-mounted guns (e.g.,
Being marked as ‘Fired’ does not change
belong. Players may not change registration
75|C in Grant and Lee tanks)
the range at which units may Spot an FO. If
hexes or battery/gun assignments after play suffer from a restricted Field-of-
the FO is in Full cover or hidden, do not
begins. Fire HPT DRM. Any hex on the PORT side of
place a marker (thus giving away its loca-
12.12.11 Registration DRM—When OBA the VCA adds a +1 HPT DRM.
tion); make a side note instead.
targets a registration hex, apply a -20 DRM
12.11.331 Spotting Range—An FO’s Spot- CFF is removed during the End of Turn
to the roll on the Accuracy Diagram (IA).
ting Range is double the result listed on the Segment if it is outside of the LOS of its
12.12.2 OBA Attack Routine
Spotting Table in all columns (due to the FO. For the purposes of seeing a CFF (after
OBA batteries may fire HE or smoke (see
assumed use of binoculars or other optics). initial placement; the FO must be able to
6.4.4). Use the following routine to make
12.11.332 Obstructed LOS—If HPT DRM see a location of the hex it wishes to place a
an OBA attack:
from smoke and Obscuring terrain between CFF in), a CFF is considered to rise to a
a) Make Battery Contact by rolling less than
the FO and target hex is eight or greater, ‘blast height’ +20 levels higher than the
or equal to the Battery Contact number (Ex-
the battery or gun may not fire into the hex. ground level of the target hex (or the high-
ception: Barrage attacks do NOT require a
If the LOS to a target hex becomes ob- est obstacle level of a building hex entirely
contact roll). See 12.12.3;
structed (8+ HPT DRM) after an FO places surrounded by building hexes of the same
b) Place a Call for Fire (CFF) marker in the
an FFE, the battery may still fire normally building).
intended target hex and announce the type
(e.g., smoke FFE is placed); the FO may 12.12.41 FFE Lands Out of Play—If a CFF/
of ammunition employed (HE or smoke) (see
not shift an existing CFF out of that hex FFE lands out of the playing area (i.e., off
12.12.4);
until the HPT DRM is seven or less (i.e., a map or beyond the playing area listed for a
c) Make a roll on the Accuracy Diagram (IA)
new CFF may be placed instead). scenario) it is immediately removed from
using two dice. Align the chart in any man-
12.11.34 FO Movement & Melee—If an FO play UNLESS one or more of the hexes at-
ner so players agree on the direction it faces
moves, including Infiltration (and taking part tacked by an FFE are IN play.
on the game map. Roll two dice, one for
in Melee), an existing CFF/FFE it placed 12.12.5 Using an Existing CFF Marker—
‘tens’ and the other for ‘ones’. Apply any
remains in its current hex. An FO may use an existing CFF placed dur-
applicable Registration DRM and DRM for
12.11.35 Leaders as FOs—Leaders (and FOs ing a previous turn. However, it may not be
obscuring terrain along the LOS between
assigned to other batteries) may call in Bar- placed OR REMAIN in a hex that has no
the FO and the target hex; modifiers that
rage attacks (see 12.12.62) regardless of location within the LOS of the FO. Thus, if
create results less than one are treated as
whether or not the firing battery has an the CFF blast height is the ONLY part of
a roll of ‘1’.
assigned FO. Leaders may not function as the current hex within the FO’s LOS, the
d) Move the CFF to its final hex. If the final
an FO for ANY other purpose (and do not CFF must be moved to a hex with an in-
hex (or an adjacent hex) has one or more
receive the additional Spotting Range of LOS location and is further subject to the
locations within the FO’s LOS that contain
12.11.331). Mark leaders that call in Bar - following:
enemy units the owning player MUST flip it
rages with ‘F’ markers, except when in Full a) Use CFF in current or adjacent hex: Do
to its Fire for Effect (FFE) side (even if the
cover or hidden (make a side note instead). not make an accuracy roll when a CFF
attack will also affect friendly units); other-
12.11.4 Observation Post (OP) Vehicles marker remains in its current hex, or moves
wise, it remains a CFF and the impulse is
FOs may spot while being transported by to an adjacent hex within the FO’s LOS. The
over;
vehicles. When an FO is adjusting fire from CFF simply remains in its hex or is moved
e) Resolve attacks as specified in 12.11.2;
an OP vehicle, the vehicle may not move or to an adjacent hex and attacks normally,
FFE also attack any units (friendly and en-
fire any turret weapons that turn. An FO assuming no other limitations prohibit use
emy) in its multi-hex blast area and that later
may not adjust fire from a Suppressed ve- (e.g., failed contact die roll; newly blocked
enter any attacked FFE hex;
hicle or when transported in ASSAULT cover LOS).
f) Flip the FFE back to its CFF side during
(i.e., riding ON a tank). b) Move CFF two to six hexes: Apply a -20
the End of Turn Segment (see 14.6.72 for
12.11.41 Loading/Unloading —An FO DRM to the accuracy roll. This DRM is NOT
Spotted units). Make a side note of the bat-
loads/unloads from a vehicle normally. When cumulative with a Registration DRM.
tery each CFF/FFE marker represents (or
loaded on an AFV or APC, the FO is INSIDE c) Move CFF seven hexes or more: Roll for
on board unit(s) using Spotted Indirect Fire).
the vehicle; remove the FO counter from accuracy as if newly placing a CFF.
12.12.3 Battery Contact
the map and make a side note of the FO’s 12.12.6 Types of OBA Attacks
The Accuracy Diagram provides a Battery
OP Vehicle. An FO using a truck as an OP There are four types of OBA attacks: Con-
Contact number for each nationality. A Bat-
vehicle adheres to all normal passenger centration, Barrage, Line Barrage, and Roll-
tery Contact roll must be made each turn a
rules. ing Barrage, the last three provided by SSR.
player wishes to place a new CFF, new FFE,
12.11.42 OP AFV/APC K-KILL, Bail Out, 12.12.61 Concentration—Attack all units
or move an existing CFF. Roll a die, and
& F-KILL —Eliminate FOs when their OP in the FFE hex and adjacent hexes (7 hexes
apply any ammunition supply DRM. If the
AFV/APC is K-KILLed. For a Bail Out re- total).
modified result is greater than the Battery
sult, place the FO in the hex in which the 12.12.62 Barrage—A Barrage requires the
Contact number, the FO may not place a
vehicle rolled the Bail Out. If a vehicle is use of a Registration hex. Do not roll for
new CFF marker, and must remove a previ-
forced to exit due to an F-KILL, remove the Battery Contact or place a CFF; simply place
ously placed CFF marker.
FO from play. the FFE in the Registration hex. Roll for
12.12.31 Ammunition Supply DRM
12.12 OFF-BOARD ARTILLERY SUPPORT accuracy and place the FFE in its final hex.
A battery may have a level of ‘ammunition
Many factors influencing a tactical battle Attack all units in the FFE hex and within
supply’ designated by SSR. If a battery has
occur beyond the physical limits of the map. two hexes of the FFE hex (19 hexes total).
‘High Ammunition Supply’, apply a -1 DRM
Off-Board Artillery (OBA) rules represents 12.12.63 Line Barrage—Attack a line of
to its Battery Contact rolls; ‘Low Ammuni-
Indirect Fire from artillery batteries located seven adjacent hexes, centered on the FFE
tion Supply’, generates a +1 DRM
off-map. OBA is not represented on map marker (three on each side). A Line Barrage
12.12.4 Results out of FO’s LOS—Once
except for their FO counters and CFF/FFE is otherwise identical to a Barrage (e.g., no
an FFE has been resolved a newly-flipped
markers. OBA support is only provided by contact needed, and requires a Registration

39
hex). Place the barrage FFE and two Bar -
rage Limit markers (one in each of the end
hexes of the seven-hex string of the Line
Barrage) and attack units in these seven
hexes ONLY.
12.12.64 Rolling Barrage—A Rolling Bar-
rage is a Line Barrage that has the follow-
ing movement rules.
12.12.641 Movement—The seven-hex long
barrage must be set up in keeping with a
map orientation listed in the SSR providing
the rolling barrage capability. The SSR will
also state how many turns the barrage
moves forward, how many hexes per turn,
and in what direction if accurate. A Rolling
Barrage only attacks the hexes in its line
after it moves, not all those between the
two lines. A Rolling Barrage moves and at-
tacks FIRST during the Indirect Fire Seg-
ment.
12.12.642 Accuracy and Duration—A Roll-
ing Barrage never flips to its CFF side. As
long as it is in play, its FFE and end-hex
markers remain on the map. During the End
of Turn Segment of the turn it is to be ‘lifted’
(removed permanently), a Battery Contact
roll must be made for removal. Otherwise,
the Rolling Barrage continues into the next
turn, when another lift attempt must be
made, and so on. Until lifted, the Rolling
Barrage continues to move and attack. It
does not roll for accuracy after an initial
accuracy roll when its FFE is first placed.
Note: The Registration DRM no longer ap-
plies once a Rolling Barrage has moved from
a Registration hex.
12.13 COUNTER-BATTERY FIRE
OBA (and aircraft; see 12.16.9) may con-
duct ‘counter-battery fire’ to engage enemy
OBA and attempt to interrupt their fire.
Counter -battery fire takes place during the
Indirect Fire Segment.
12.13.1 Battery Limits
Batteries may only use counter-battery fire
against certain types of enemy OBA. Con-
sult the Off-Board Counter -Battery Matrix
(CB) to determine counter-battery fire eligi-
bility.
12.13.2 Counter-Battery Effects and Pro-
cedure
Counter -battery fire does not destroy en-
emy OBA; it temporarily neutralizes their
fire.
The example above right serves two purposes. It depicts the eligible hexes for machine-gun fire using the ‘A’ and ‘B’ method from the above example.
It also depicts the LIMIT the machine-gun sub-turret on an A9 may turn. In this example the starboard side turret is shown. The port side turret is treated
in the same manner, transposing all ‘A’ and ‘B’ marked hexes in a ‘mirror image’ to the other side of the AFV.
Thus, the machine-gun sub-turrets in an A9 (and A9 CS) cruiser tank may not pivot their facing more than one hexspine AND each sub-turret may
ONLY pivot to the side it is on, i.e., the port sub-turret may only turn to the left and the starboard (depicted in the example) to the right.
Note also the machine-gun sub-turrets on an A9 pay +1 for each hexspine pivoted when changing facing to fire. In keeping with the ‘chrome’ provided
in the ATS in the form of model-specific turret markers, a supply of A9 turrets is provided with TOBRUK EXPANSION #1: Wavell’s 30,000.
12.13.21 Locating Enemy OBA—Enemy
batteries must be located before they may
be affected by counter -battery fire. Only
enemy OBA that fires (i.e., places a FFE)
during a turn may be located in that turn.
Locating attempts are conducted at the end
of the Indirect Fire Segment in which the
enemy OBA fires. Roll one die for each en-
emy battery that fired. A die roll of 1-2 means
the enemy battery has been located. Once
located, an enemy battery remains located
for the remainder of the game. Make a side
note or use the provided markers.
12.13.22 Acquisition—A friendly battery
may initiate counter -battery fire against lo-
cated enemy OBA as an attack during the
Indirect Fire Segment. Counter -battery fire
has a two-turn acquisition procedure. At the
beginning of the second turn after declar -
ing counter -battery fire, the enemy OBA is
neutralized and may not fire. Make a side
note or use the provided markers to indi-
cate this status.
12.13.23 Duration—Batteries remain neu-
tralized while the counter -battery fire is
maintained, and for two turns after it ends.
If the friendly battery resumes counter-bat-
tery fire, it must re-acquire (via 12.13.22)
the target OBA. Once a friendly battery is
no longer maintaining counter -battery fire,
it may be used normally. Markers are pro-
vided to make note of the status of locating
and neutralizing enemy OBA.
12.14 OVERRUN
Overrun attacks take place when a non-F-
KILLed AFV/APC/Armed truck enters a hex
occupied by enemy Personnel or weapons
and declares an Overrun attack. Overrun
has no effect on other unit types.
12.14.1 Overrun Attack Routine
Use the following routine to make an Over-
run attack:
a) Impulse player moves an eligible vehicle
into an enemy-occupied hex using Assault
Movement and places an Overrun marker
(see 12.14.3);
b) Vehicle spends an additional MP in the
target hex for each unit/unmanned weapon
it wishes to overrun;
c) Eligible units may use Opportunity Fire
against the vehicle (see 12.14.4);
d) Eligible H weapons in the target hex may
execute Final Defensive Fire (see 12.14.5);
The example at left depicts the limitations
of the starboard side machine-gun turret
on the A9 (and A9 CS) cruiser tank. The
‘4’ Gunfire Factors of the starboard side
bow machine-gun may fire into any hex
marked with a ‘B’. It may NOT fire into
any hex marked with an ‘A’. The port side
machine-gun is likewise restricted, with
a ‘mirror image’ to the left of the AFV as
regards ‘A’ and ‘B’ marked hexes.
40
e) If the vehicle does not suffer a K-KILL,
M-KILL, or Bail Out due to Opportunity or
Final Defensive Fire (or due to Immobiliza-
tion upon entering a hex requiring a roll on
the Immobilization Table), resolve the Over-
run attack (see 12.14.6);
f) The vehicle may end its impulse in the
target hex or, if eligible, exit the hex and
continue its movement impulse. It may con-
duct additional Overrun attacks against
other hexes (see 12.14.7).
12.14.2 Assault Fire Restriction
Overrunning vehicles may conduct Assault
Fire before entering an enemy hex; upon
entering an enemy hex, the overrunning
vehicle may not fire any weapons for the
remainder of its movement impulse.
12.14.3 Movement into an Enemy Hex
Vehicles that conduct overruns must use
Assault movement. After entering an enemy-
occupied hex, the vehicle must pass any
required check on the Immobilization Table
for terrain in the hex. It may then place an
Overrun marker and spend one additional
MP for each Personnel unit and un-manned
H weapon it wishes to Overrun. A vehicle
in an enemy-occupied hex is not required
to conduct an Overrun, nor must it Over -
run all eligible enemy units.
12.14.4 Opportunity Fire vs. Overrunning
Vehicle
Enemy units may use Opportunity Fire
against an Overrunning vehicle for each MP
it uses in the target hex. Opportunity Fire
attacks that do not use the HPT affect all
units in the Overrun location (friendly and
enemy), even those not targeted by the
Overrun attack.
12.14.41 Personnel Fire Restriction —A
Personnel unit may use Opportunity Fire or
Direct Fire vs. a same-hex vehicle only if it
is otherwise eligible to fire. It may NOT fire
outside of its location while an enemy ve-
hicle is within.
12.14.5 Final Defensive Fire
H weapons in an Overrun hex may use a
restricted form of Opportunity Fire against
the overrunning vehicle. An H weapon may
fire one ‘Final Defensive Fire’ HPT shot (only
HPT) at the Overrunning vehicle as long as
the weapon does NOT have to pivot to face
the hex the Overrunning vehicle used to
enter the H weapon’s hex. H weapons may
take a Final Defensive Fire shot even when
already marked as fired, if otherwise eli-
gible to fire. Prior to making the Final De-
fensive Fire HPT roll (but prior to resolving
the Overrun attack) a die roll is made. On a
roll of 1-4, a surviving H weapon is free to
use Final Defensive Fire against the Over -
running vehicle. On a roll of 5-0, it is not.
Final Defensive Fire applies a +2 HPT DRM.
12.14.6 Overrun Resolution
12.14.61 Overrun vs. Personnel—Overrun
attacks affect targeted Personnel (to include
crews manning H weapons) by causing them
to take a morale check. Apply a -4 Morale
modifier for each vehicle Overrunning the
Personnel unit that turn, to a maximum
modifier of -8 in any one turn (one Overrun
marker indicates a -4 modifier; two mark-
ers indicate a -8 modifier). This modifier is
cumulative with other Morale Table modifi-
ers (Exception: Do not count the Overrun-
ning vehicle; the -4 modifier accounts for
it). An Overrun Morale modifier remains in
force for the remainder of the turn, even
after the Overrunning vehicle has exited the
hex, at which time enemy vehicles once again
affect MV of a Personnel unit for any mo-
rale checks not caused by an Overrun. Units
that fail the MC are broken, but they do not
surrender solely due to the overrunning
vehicle being in their hex. Already broken
units that fail a morale check due to over-
run surrender.
12.14.62 Overrun vs. Weapons— Automati-
cally eliminate any H weapon, and any un-
possessed L/M weapons not in FULL cover
under an Emplacement marker, that an over-
running FULLY TRACKED AFV/APC (only;
not Truck type, halftrack or wheeled) at-
tacks.
12.14.621 Track Damage—When a fully
tracked AFV/APC destroys an H weapon in
an Overrun, there is a chance of track
breakage. After resolving the Overrun, roll
a die for each H weapon eliminated. On a
die roll of ‘1’, the AFV/APC is M-KILLed in
the target hex; check for Bail Out normally.
12.14.7 Vehicle Ends Impulse in Overrun
Hex
If the vehicle ends its impulse in the Over-
run hex, all Personnel and weapon units in
the overrun location may not move out of
the location during the remainder of that
turn’s Fire & Movement Segment, make a
Grenade attack, or Infiltrate out of the hex.
They may engage the vehicle in Melee nor-
mally. Units that broke as a result of an
Overrun attack may attempt to rally even if
the vehicle remains in the location at the
end of the End of Turn Segment. A hex with
an overrunning enemy vehicle does not af-
fect units in another in-hex location, i.e.,
outside of the Overrun location UNLESS ALL
positions/locations of the hex are consid-
ered ONE for stacking purposes (e.g., Wadi).
Personnel and vehicles may move and fire
normally the following turn unless the ve-
hicle declares it is continuing the Overrun
as per 12.14.71. Personnel firing at a same-
hex enemy vehicle must adhere to
12.14.41.
12.14.71 Continuing Overruns—After com-
pleting an Overrun attack, a vehicle may
Overrun the same location the next turn by
remaining in the hex and announcing Con-
tinued movement during the End of Turn
Segment. Do not remove the Overrun
marker during the End of Turn Segment.
The same vehicle cannot overrun the same
unit more than once during the same im-
pulse. If a vehicle does NOT declare a con-
tinued Overrun, it must exit the hex and
re-enter to Overrun it again during the fol-
lowing turn. When using Continued Over-
run a vehicle may NOT use Assault Fire prior
to exiting the hex. It may once it leaves.
12.15 CLOSE ASSAULT
During the Close Assault Segment, eligible
Personnel units may Infiltrate OR conduct
Grenade Attacks. Players make a roll to
determine which side receives the Initiative
at the start of the Infiltration Phase. The
Close Assault Segment consists of the Infil-
tration Phase and the Melee Phase.
12.15.1 Infiltration
Even if marked as moved or fired, a Per -
sonnel unit (or stack of Personnel units in
the SAME location) that is otherwise capable
of moving may Infiltrate as follows:
a) Move into an accessible location of the
same hex or an adjacent hex;
b) Move under or on top of an emplacement
counter;
c) See 11.5.5 for Passengers.
Notes: A unit may Infiltrate into an adjacent
hex but may NOT move under an emplace-
ment in the newly entered hex. A unit may
not enter an adjacent building hex at ground
level AND move to a higher level of newly
entered hex.
12.15.2 Grenade Attacks
Personnel units may make grenade attacks
against accessible ADJACENT enemy units
during the Infiltration Phase if the Person-
nel unit meets the following criteria:
a) It did not fire during the Combat Seg-
ment;
b) It is otherwise eligible to fire; (it may be
marked as Moved and still make a grenade
attack);
c) It did not Infiltrate in the current Infiltra-
tion Phase;
d) It is not in a location containing an en-
emy vehicle (see 12.14.7);
e) The target location is not more than level
+10 higher than the attacking unit’s loca-
tion.
12.15.21 Grenade Attack Routine—Use the
following routine, including c-e, below, to
conduct grenade attacks:
a) The impulse player selects the attacking
units, indicates the target location, and an-
nounces the type of weapons employed;
b) Calculate the attack’s FRAG factors:
Grenades: Multiply the Stacking Points of
the unit by THREE. Deduct any Stacking
Points for carried weapons. Personnel units
in the SAME location may combine their
FRAG Factors for one attack, or may use
their FRAG Factors separately to attack dif-
ferent hexes (noting only ONE impulse is
used per location of attacking units);
Satchel Charge: Attacks with 20 FRAG fac-
tors (see 12.15.22). May also be used to
seal CAVE DUGOUT emplacements (see
9.6.65). A unit may only use ONE Satchel
Charge per Grenade Attack.
Gammon Bomb: Adds four FRAG factors
to a normal Grenade attack (see 12.15.23);
c) If the attack includes a Satchel Charge,
one enemy Personnel unit may attempt Hurl
Back (see 12.15.24);
d) Resolve the attack (see 12.15.25);
e) Place Rubble and Flame markers as ap-
propriate (see 12.15.26-27).
A unit may only use ONE Gammon Bomb
41
per Grenade Attack.
12.15.22 Satchel Charges—Some scenarios
provide Satchel Charges in a specific quan-
tity by SSR. Each Satchel Charge may be
used only once, and is not assigned to a
specific unit. A Personnel unit eligible to
make a Grenade Attack may instead make
a Satchel Charge attack. A unit making a
Satchel Charge attack may not combine this
attack with other attacks taking place dur-
ing the impulse.
12.15.221 Engineer Use—A Personnel unit
designated as a ‘Combat Engineer’ by SSR
receives a 2R modifier when using a Satchel
Charge.
12.15.222 Satchel Charge Counters—
Satchel Charge counters are provided in
some ATS scenario OOBs. A scenario will
list the total number of Satchel Charges that
may be used during play in a side’s OOB
portion of the scenario card; these counters
are simply used as markers during Satchel
Charge attacks and their reference in the
OOB serves the same purpose as SSR in-
formation.
12.15.23 Gammon Bombs —Some sce-
narios provide Gammon Bombs by SSR.
Each Gammon Bomb provided may be used
only once, and is not assigned to a specific
unit. Use of a Gammon Bomb adds to an
otherwise normal Grenade Attack and has
additional effects against terrain and ve-
hicles.
12.15.24 Hurl Back —An eligible enemy
Personnel unit (i.e., NON Broken/Surren-
dered) in an attacked location may attempt
to ‘Hurl Back’ a Satchel Charge prior to the
attack’s resolution. If the Hurl Back roll is
successful, the Satchel Charge instead af-
fects the attacking unit’s location. If the Hurl
Back fails, the unit that attempted Hurl Back
suffers an ADDITIONAL 1R modifier (this
additional modifier does not affect other
units in the target location or rubble cre-
ation) on the Casualty Table. Hurl back at-
tacks do not receive Engineer 2R shifts.
12.15.241 Hurl Back Die Roll—To be suc-
cessful, a Hurl Back die roll must be less
than or equal to the Stacking Point value of
ONE of the Personnel units being attacked
(owning player’s choice of unit). There may
be only one Hurl Back attempt per Satchel
attack.
12.15.25 Grenade Attack Resolution —
Resolve grenade/Satchel Charge/Gammon
Bomb attacks as follows:
a) Resolution vs. Personnel: Use the ap-
propriate column on the GF|FRAG row on
the Casualty Table, applying applicable shifts
from the Cover State Effects Table;
b) Resolution vs. other units: Use the
Small Arms (GF) vs. Vehicles and H Weap-
ons Table (see 12.5.8).
12.15.26 Satchel Charge Rubble and Flame
Creation —Satchel Charge attacks create
Rubble and Flame in the same manner as
an HE attack (see 8.3.9).
12.15.27 Gammon Bomb Flame Cre-
ation—Any Casualty Table die roll of ‘1’ by
a Grenade attack that includes a Gammon
Bomb also places a FLAME marker in the
target location if in applicable terrain.
12.15.3 Melee vs. Personnel
Whenever a Personnel unit enters a loca-
tion occupied by an enemy Personnel unit,
they must Melee (i.e., engage in hand-to-
hand combat). All Personnel units in the
Melee location must take part in the Melee.
When conducting melee between Person-
nel apply all appropriate cumulative MV
modifiers identified as ➀ (the list of modifi-
ers is found directly beneath the Personnel
Vs. Vehicle Melee Table).
12.15.31 Personnel vs. Personnel Attack
Routine— Use the following routine to en-
gage in Melee vs. Personnel:
a) The impulse player moves Personnel units
into an enemy-occupied location during the
Infiltration Phase and places a Melee marker
in the location.
b) Additional units from both sides may In-
filtrate into the Melee location (there is no
penalty for overstacking).
c) Resolve Melee attacks by calculating a
ratio of GF Factors for each side (after ap-
plying modifiers and rounding as per
12.15.34) and rolling a die on the Melee
Table.
d) Recalculate the Melee odds at the new
strength levels for surviving participants and
conduct another round of Melee. Continue
until one side is eliminated.
e) If there is more than one Melee hex in
play, they are resolved in the order they
were initiated or by mutual player consent.
12.15.32 Frozen In Melee—All enemy units
in a location with a Melee marker may not
Infiltrate, or make a Grenade/Satchel
Charge attack. Units in a bunker may use
Infiltration to exit the bunker and move into
a Melee location in the hex.
12.15.33 Attacker and Defender Designa-
tion—The player that first enters the en-
emy hex is the attacker. The other player is
the defender. Place all attacker units on top
of defender units.
12.15.34 Melee vs. Personnel Resolution—
Total each side’s Personnel Gunfire Factors
in the Melee location. Use only the GF
printed on Personnel units; reduce GF for
Casualty markers, but NOT for carried
weapons. State the totals as a ratio, attacker-
to-defender, apply any modifiers, and round
down in the defender’s favor to obtain a ratio
that conforms to the columns on the Melee
Table (ME). If Melee odds are worse than 1
to 2 or greater than 4 to 1 (after rounding),
automatically eliminate the weaker side.
12.15.341 Melee Casualties—Roll one die.
Cross-index the roll on the appropriate Me-
lee Table column. The result is each side’s
casualties.Casualty Morale Checks are NOT
taken following Melee casualties.
Example: A roll of 4 on the 1 to 1 column
results in a ‘AC1 | DC1.’ The attacker AND
the defender sustain a C1. The owning player
may distribute casualties in any manner.
12.15.4 Melee vs. Vehicles
Personnel have a chance of destroying AFVs,
APCs, and armed Trucks, or capturing un-
armed Trucks in their location. A vehicle
may undergo more than one Melee attack
in a segment, noting Personnel units may
not combine their MVs against vehicles and
must attack separately. Melee Values are
NOT rounded down when attacking vehicles
and all applicable modifiers are listed for
table ➁, directly beneath the Personnel Vs.
Vehicle Melee Table.
12.15.41 Melee vs. Vehicles Attack Rou-
tine—Use the following routine to engage
in Melee vs. a Vehicle:
a) The impulse player Infiltrates Personnel
units into an enemy vehicle’s location and
places a Melee marker (or a vehicle is al-
ready in the location due to entering during
an earlier segment or turn).
c) Moving Vehicle—If the attacked vehicle
b) Additional units from both sides may In-
is MOVING, HALVE the MV, rounding frac-
filtrate into the Melee location. If an enemy
tions up. Thus, an attack against a moving
Personnel unit infiltrates into the Melee lo-
Close Topped AFV/APC would be QUAR-
cation, Melee may not be conducted against
TERED, (halved, then halved again, then
the vehicle (see 12.15.42).
rounding fractions up);
c) If the enemy vehicle is an unarmed truck
d) Leader —Add two to the MV for an ac-
without passengers, the Personnel unit cap-
companying officer and one for an NCO (AND
tures the truck (see 12.15.43).
double the MV of the non-leader Personnel
d) In the Melee Phase, attacking units con-
unit if the leader is marked with a Courage
duct Melee vs. vehicle morale checks (see
marker as per ‘a’ above); this MV addition
12.15.44).
is applied even for leaders that assisted in
e) Resolve Melee by calculating the Melee
Melee vs. Vehicle Morale Checks;
Value (MV) of each attacking unit (or unit
e) Explosives—Add two to the MV for an
plus leader combination), applying any modi-
available Satchel Charge, or one for a
fiers listed for table ➁, and rolling a die; if
Gammon Bomb (not both). Vehicles may not
the die roll is less than or equal to the final
attempt to Hurl Back Satchel Charges;
MV, the attack is successful (see 12.15.45).
f) High Morale—Add one to the MV if ALL
f) If an attack against a vehicle carrying
attacking Personnel units (e.g., two 7|5|8
Passengers is not successful, the Passen-
squads + an accompanying 1|1|8 leader
gers unload. A Melee vs. Personnel then
[noting only ONE squad may attack a ve-
takes place (see 12.15.46).
hicle at a time]) have a printed (i.e., the value
12.15.42 Enemy Personnel in Location—
printed on the counter; not modified) Mo-
Melee vs. a vehicle cannot occur if there
rale Value of eight or greater;
are non-transported enemy Personnel units
g) Combat Engineer—Add one to the MV if
in the same location as the vehicle, to in-
the attacking Personnel unit(s) (i.e., either
clude when enemy units Infiltrate into a lo-
the Personnel unit or an accompanying
cation in which a Melee marker has already
leader) is specified by SSR to be Combat
been placed. Instead of attacking the ve-
Engineers.
hicle, use the routine outlined in 12.15.31
12.15.452 Attack Resolution—Roll one die,
to resolve the Melee vs. Personnel (Person-
and compare the result to the MV.
nel friendly to the vehicle are the defender).
a) Result is less than or equal to half the
Even if the enemy Personnel units are elimi-
MV: K-KILL the vehicle and replace it with
nated in the Melee, no Melee attack takes
a burning wreck;
place against the vehicle.
b) Result is less than the MV: K-KILL the
12.15.43 Trucks— A Personnel unit (of any vehicle and replace it with a non-burning
size) may automatically capture an unarmed
wreck (Exception: If an attack uses a
truck when it Infiltrates into the truck’s lo-
Gammon Bomb, all K-KILLs result in burn-
cation. The capturing player simply takes
ing wrecks);
control of the vehicle. If the truck is armed
c) Result equals the MV: M-KILL the ve-
or carrying Passengers, resolve Melee in the
hicle and roll for Bail Out;
same manner as vs. an Open Topped ve-
d) Result is greater than the MV: the ve-
hicle. If there are non-passenger enemy
hicle is unaffected.
Personnel units in an unarmed truck’s lo-
12.15.46 Melee & Passengers/Riders —
cation, resolve as Melee vs. Personnel. The
Passengers cannot participate in Melee.
side that wins captures the truck.
Eliminate them if their vehicle is K-KILLed.
12.15.44 Melee vs. Vehicle Morale Check—
If their vehicle survives the Melee attack, a
Personnel units conducting Melee vs. a ve-
modified Melee vs. Personnel takes place
hicle must undergo a morale check. There
as follows:
are NO modifiers to morale EXCEPT those
a) Unload the Passengers (Exception: FOs
provided by LEADERS (i.e., use the unit’s
do not unload) in the Melee location. The
printed morale). A leader may affect ALL
unloaded Personnel units always represent
friendly Personnel units in a location that
the defender;
are making a Melee vs. Vehicle Morale
b) Resolve the Melee vs. Personnel. Defend-
Check. If the morale check is unsuccess-
ing units defend at half their normal GF in
ful, mark the failing Personnel unit as Bro-
the first ‘round’ after they unload. If they
ken; they may NOT attack and remain Bro-
survive the first round, they use their nor-
ken in their current location.
mal strength in any subsequent rounds;
12.15.45 Melee vs. Vehicle Resolution—
c) If the Passengers were in an unarmed
Melee resolution involves a comparison be-
truck, the side that wins the Melee controls
tween an attacking unit’s Melee Value (MV)
the truck.
and a die roll. Personnel units always at-
12.15.47 Unsuccessful Melee vs. Vehicle—
tack vehicles separately, but a leader can
Personnel and vehicles left in a hex follow-
aid an attack. Not all Personnel in a hex
ing an unsuccessful Melee may move and
must take part, but all units that declare an
fire normally the following turn. Personnel
attack and pass their morale check MUST
firing at a same-hex enemy vehicle must
attack.
adhere to 12.14.41.
12.15.451 Melee Value (MV)—The MV of a
12.16 AIRCRAFT
Personnel unit is equal to its Stacking Points.
Some scenarios provide aircraft in the OOB
Modify the MV in the order specified be-
of one or both sides. Aircraft counters rep-
low:
resent ground-attack aircraft armed with a
a) Courage —Double the MV (prior to any
combination of bombs, rockets, cannon, and
other MV modifiers) if the attacking Per -
MGs. SSR may allow aircraft to exchange
sonnel unit (and/or an accompanying leader)
bombs for Napalm. Aircraft counters may
is marked with a Courage marker;
also be used to represent unarmed OBA
b) CT AFV and APC —If the attacked ve-
Spotter planes. A GF on the counter indi-
hicle is a close-topped (CT) AFV/APC, HALVE
cates the aircraft is armed with MG (e.g.,
the MV, rounding fractions up;
42
 and place the aircraft in the resulting Final
the P-47 has a -|10 MG denoting a fixed AA machine-guns on Vehicles, and M|MGs
Target Hex;
CA machine-gun that may only fire along its are eligible to use AA fire if in a hex an air -
f) Resolve the aircraft attack using the pro-
flight path). A Gun Size that uses a Gun craft is eligible to attack (e.g., AA weapon is
cedures for each type of attack (see
value of A-B indicates an aircraft is armed not surrounded by woods or building hexes;
12.16.8). Attacks against hexes [e.g., open
with cannon (e.g., the Russian IL 2M has a see 12.16.2 a, b, and c). Note: some weap-
ground] that are empty and otherwise do
37|B cannon). A Gun Size that uses Gun ons that historically were anti-aircraft guns,
not contain terrain subject to rubble or
values of C-D indicates ROCKET armament such as the 88mm Flak 36, are not classi-
flame, are ignored;
(e.g., the 127|D F4U-4; see 12.16.824). fied as AA Guns in ATS; these guns were
g) Place Cease Fire markers on attacked H
The SSR may also specify an aircraft is used for high-altitude anti-aircraft fire,
and M weapons (see 12.16.83);
armed with Napalm (see 12.16.812). which is beyond the scope of the game.
h) Remove the aircraft from the board (un-
12.16.1 Entry and Duration 12.16.611 Continued Movement —AA
less it has unused weapons remaining, in
Aircraft enter the game on the first turn weapons mounted on Vehicles that are
which case it may attack during a subse-
unless specified otherwise by SSR. Ground- marked with a continued movement marker
quent impulse [or a later turn unless re-
attack aircraft are available on the turn of are NOT eligible to conduct AA fire.
moved due to time limit on board]).
entry and are removed (not eliminated; they 12.16.62 AA Range & ROF —An eligible
12.16.4 Placement
are assumed to return to their base) when- weapon may attempt to ‘shoot down’ any
When not attacking, place aircraft aside, out
ever they have dropped all available ord- enemy aircraft in any hex of its Flight Path
of play. They may not be attacked in any
nance or SSR-specified Napalm has been that is within AA range. The maximum AA
manner when out of play.
used or after two turns have elapsed after range in hexes for each weapon is as fol-
12.16.41 Aircraft Placement for ALL
their FIRST attack, whichever comes first. lows:
Ground Attacks—Align the Aerial Accuracy
Spotter aircraft remain in play as long as a) Maximum range of 3 for M|MGs;
Chart (Table NR) with the intended target
their battery is available to place a CFF or b) Maximum range of 4 for 20mm AA H
hex (even if making a bomb attack) and the
make a barrage attack, or until shot down. weapons;
flight path chosen, place the aircraft in the
12.16.11 Off-Board Interceptors—In any c) Maximum range of 8 for 37mm+ AA guns
intended target hex and announce the type
scenario that has Interceptors provided by and is marked on all AA-eligible H weap-
of attack to be made. This represents the
SSR, roll one die for each group of three ons.
completion of step ‘a’ above. Each aircraft
enemy aircraft entering the game. A die roll A unit may fire at as many aircraft as its
may only bomb one hex per turn, but other
of 1 means that group has been intercepted ROF will allow, but may fire at a particular
forms of armament (e.g., rockets; Napalm;
en route to the target and may not enter the ground-attack or Spotter aircraft only once
strafing) may attack multiple hexes during
game (they are not destroyed for victory point per aircraft attack impulse, in its current
one aircraft attack impulse. Aircraft may not
purposes). hex.
choose a target in a hex for bomb attack
12.16.12 Aircraft Impulse Use—One air - 12.16.63 Changing Covered Arc—An AA
that has friendly units in any of the hex’s
craft may use multiple impulses during the Gun may pivot any number of hexsides to
locations within LOS of the aircraft.
same turn, one to make a strafing attack, bring an aircraft into the Gun’s covered arc.
12.16.42 Flight Path—An aircraft’s flight
and yet another to use Cannon or rockets However, this CA change does NOT gener -
path is the row of hexes immediately along
on the HPT. However, only ONE of each ate HPT DRM.
the hexgrain in front of and behind an air -
type of attack may be made per turn and 12.16.64 AA Fire Resolution—Resolve AA
craft once placed. This is the path of the
ONLY MG and cannon GF may be combined fire by rolling a die on the Anti-Aircraft Fire
aircraft’s movement across the map.
in the same strafing attack. Note: MG and Table (C5), applying a +1 DRM if the firing
12.16.5 On-Board Interceptors
rockets may be used during the same im- weapon is an M|MG, and apply the results
If both sides have ground-attack aircraft,
pulse, along the same flight path. as follows:
the non-impulse player may declare that one
12.16.2 Aircraft LOS a) Die roll of 1: Eliminate the aircraft;
or more of his aircraft will make an Inter-
Aircraft have a LOS to all hexes on the map b) Die roll of 2-3: The aircraft is driven off;
ceptor attack after the impulse player de-
except: remove from play with no attack made; Note:
clares an aircraft attack. Stukas (and any
a) Any Woods hex entirely surrounded by Driven off aircraft are not considered elimi-
other aircraft denoted as ‘non interceptors’
adjacent Woods/building hexes; nated for Victory Point purposes and may
by SSR) may not make Interceptor attacks.
b) A building hex entirely surrounded by be used again during a subsequent turn;
12.16.51 Impulse Use—An Interceptor at-
adjacent building/Woods hexes, unless the c) Die roll of 4-9: The aircraft may make its
tack is a form of Opportunity Fire, and does
target unit is on the roof or if the target hex attack, but must add a +10 DRM on the
not count as an impulse used. An aircraft
and at least ONE adjacent hex is roofless Aerial Accuracy Chart (NR) (or the Accuracy
that conducts an Interceptor attack may not
(i.e., aircraft have LOS to two adjacent Diagram [IA] for the CFF/FFE placed by
conduct a normal Aircraft attack that turn
roofless building hexes but not to one such Spotter aircraft).
and is set aside after its use in the manner.
hex); d) Die roll of 0+: No effect on the aircraft’s
12.16.52 On-Board Interceptor Resolu-
c) The cellar of a building; attack.
tion—Place one or more Interceptor aircraft
d) A unit under a Cave Dugout may not be 12.16.7 Accidental Attack
in the same hex as the attacking aircraft
attacked if the aircraft’s LOS crosses the If there are any on-board units, friendly or
and roll a die for each Interceptor, applying
same or higher level than the Cave. enemy, within three hexes of the target hex
results from Table C8 as follows:
12.16.3 Aircraft Attack Routine and within the aircraft’s LOS, roll a die. On
a) Die roll of 1: Eliminate the target aircraft;
Use the following routine to make an air - a roll of ‘1’, the aircraft has mistaken the
b) Die roll 2-3: The target aircraft is driven
craft attack: target. Align the Accuracy Diagram (IA) with
off. Remove intercepted aircraft from the
a) During the Aircraft Attacks portion of the the target hex and make a roll. If the result
map, but it may attack during a subsequent
Indirect Fire Segment, the impulse player is a hex that contains ANY units of EITHER
turn;
places an aircraft in its target hex for all side, the resulting hex becomes the NEW
c) Die roll 4+: Interceptor attack fails.
forms of attacks and announces the weap- target hex. Otherwise the OPPONENT may
12.16.53 DRM—Apply a -2 DRM when an
ons/bombs that will make an attack; the choose the nearest hex (that contains ANY
Interceptor without a bomb load attacks an
aircraft also needs to face a specific units without reference to side) to the re-
aircraft with a bomb load. Apply a cumula-
HEXSIDE representing the owning player’s sulting hex and the aircraft is placed in THAT
tive -1 DRM when an Interceptor attacks
choice of ‘Flight Path’ (see 12.16.41); hex, using it as the new target hex. After
a Stuka (or other SSR designated non-in-
b) The non-impulse player may declare that placing the aircraft for the accidental attack
terceptor).
one or more of his aircraft will attempt an the owning player chooses the flight path in
12.16.6 Anti-Aircraft (AA) Fire
Interceptor attack (see 12.16.5); the new target hex. Following a roll on the
Anti-aircraft fire is a form of Opportunity
c) Resolve all anti-aircraft fire against the Aerial Accuracy Chart (found on the Aerial
Fire conducted during the Aircraft Attacks
aircraft in its current hex (see 12.16.6); Attack Diagrams [Table NR] on Play Aid #2)
portion of the Indirect Fire Segment. Mark
d) If there are any units within three hexes the aircraft attacks using its originally an-
weapons that use AA fire with an ‘F’ marker
of the target, determine if an Accidental At- nounced armament.
normally.
tack occurs (see 12.16.7); 12.16.8 Aircraft Attack Resolution
12.16.61 Eligible Weapons—H|AA weap-
e) Roll on the Aerial Accuracy Chart (NR) Aircraft may attack during one impulse us-
ons with a PRINTED AA VALUE (only), the

43
ing bombs OR strafing by MG/cannon, rock-
ets OR Napalm
12.16.81 Bomb Attacks —Some aircraft
have a bomb-load on their counter, listed in
HE factors. Two HE factors separated by
the ‘|’ pipes symbol indicates the aircraft
has TWO sizes of bombs on board (referred
to as ‘large’ and ‘small’ [or ‘bomblets’] with
the smaller of the two ALWAYS to the right
of the ‘pipes’ symbol. An ROF to the imme-
diate right of the bomb-load indicates the
TOTAL number of bombs, with ONE ROF
always representing the large bomb and THE
REMAINDER representing bomblets. In the
absence of bomblets, ROF represents mul-
tiple large bombs.
Example: Stuka aircraft have a bomb load
listed as 500|50 with a 5 ROF, indicating
that this aircraft has one large bomb (500
HE factors) and four smaller bombs (50 HE
factors each). In a bomb attack impulse, an
aircraft may drop its large bomb, or ALL
smaller bombs, or all available bombs. There-
fore, each Stuka may make, at most, two
bombing attacks per game (although only
ONE bomb attack IMPULSE per turn).
12.16.811 Bomb Attack Resolution—Air-
craft bombs attack all locations in the tar-
get hex (similar to Indirect Fire; see 12.11.2)
and are resolved as follows:
a) Conduct the actions in 12.16.3 until step
‘f’ is reached;
b) Attack the FINAL target hex by making a
roll directly on the Casualty Table for EACH
bomb (e.g., four rolls on the ‘50’ column
[same as 6 GF] for a Stuka bomb attack
using the four ‘50’ bombs or once on the
‘200+’ [same as 50 GF and noting the Heavy
Payload DRM] AND four times on the ‘50’
columns), using the appropriate HE column
and applying appropriate column shifts for
terrain and emplacements. If the hex is de-
void of units, roll on the Casualty Table
ONLY if there is any terrain that may be
affected by rubble or flame results; note
the DRM for Heavy Payloads;
c) For Vehicles and H weapons in the target
hex, refer Casualty Table results to the In-
direct HE | FFE | Aircraft Bomb Attacks
vs. Vehicles and H Weapons Table (Table
C2, see 12.10.9).
12.16.812 Napalm Strike—A Napalm Strike
is available by SSR only. If available, air -
craft may exchange their bomb load for
Napalm. A Napalm Strike attacks ALL units
in all locations of three adjacent hexes (the
Final Hex and the next two adjacent hexes
along its Flight Direction) in the same man-
ner as a Flamethrower (i.e., 30 GF and no
terrain shifts). Each aircraft may only make
ONE Napalm Strike per scenario and is re-
moved IMMEDIATELY after using Napalm.
12.16.82 Strafing Attack—Ground-attack
aircraft armed with machine-guns or can-
non (using Semi-Automatic fire, noting the
method for determining strafing PEN for
cannon, see 12.16.823) may use an impulse
to make a strafing attack.
12.16.821 MG/Semi-Automatic Strafing—
During one impulse aircraft armed with MGs
may use their MG/Semi-Automatic (see 14.8)
GF to attack the target hex and a number
of adjacent consecutive hexes along the flight
path, traced forward from the final target
hex (found as per 12.16.3 ‘e’). The total
number of HEXES attacked by one ‘straf-
ing run’ is equal to HALF the MG/Semi-Au-
tomatic GF for that aircraft (round fractions
down), noting ALL hexes are attacked by
the FULL MG/Semi-Automatic GF and if one
type of attack exceeds the other, continue
the attack into the additional hexes apply
ONLY that weapon.
Example: A P-47 10 GF MG strafes five hexes,
and each are attacked by 10 GF on the Ca-
sualty Table.
12.16.822 Aircraft Cannon HPT Use—Air-
craft cannon are treated in the same man-
ner as GUNS. All cannon-armed aircraft may
fire either HE or AP (and may use semi-
automatic fire, see 14.8) at the owning
player’s option. When using the HPT to fire,
check for Accidental Attack (12.16.7) ONLY
(i.e., they hit or miss the chosen target based
on the HPT roll only).
12.16.8221 HPT Fire— Aircraft cannons
must apply a +3 HPT DRM to all HPT hit
attempts. All other target DRM are applied
normally and the full ROF available to an
aircraft cannon may be used against ANY
targets within range, in LOS and along its
flight path using ONE impulse.
12.16.8222 Aircraft Range—When count-
ing hexes to the target hex, count each hex
outside the final target hex as TWO hexes
for the purposes of ALL range calculation.
12.16.823 Aircraft Attack vs. Vehicles
Resolution—Resolve hits from aircraft can-
non vs. vehicle targets using the Attack
Routine for Guns (12.5.2). Modify routine
as follows:
a) Deck Armor: To reflect the thinner Deck
Armor on close-topped AFVs and APCs, dis-
regard the Vehicle’s AF for the aspect and
facing hit. Instead, HALVE the target’s low-
est AF (rounded down to a minimum of ‘0’).
ALL OT vehicles (including AFVs) have Deck
Armor of 0. All trucks have ‘Deck Armor’ of
-1.
Example: a CT AFV with a 2 as its lowest AF
uses Deck Armor of 1; a 5 lowest AF pro-
duces Deck Armor of 2.
b) Strafing PEN: For MG, use the MG PEN
of ‘1’ when strafing. Cannon using semi-
automatic fire use HALF their normal PEN
(noting the manner aircraft attack ranges
are calculated, see 12.16.822). Both attacks
use Deck Armor AF for an attacked vehicle.
12.16.824 Rocket Armed—Rocket-armed
aircraft uses their armament in the same
manner as Aircraft Cannon on the HPT (Ex-
ception: Rockets are considered HE only)
and may use Aerial Rocket Strike and Rocket
Strafe attacks (owning player’s choice). MGs
may also be fired by aircraft using rockets,
and MGs and cannon may be fired using
the same final target hex obtained as per
12.16.821.
12.16.8241 Aerial Rocket Attacks—When
not using the HPT an aircraft armed with
127|D Rocket Armament must attack in the
form of an Aerial Rocket Strafe OR Rocket
Strike.
a) Rocket Strafe—Each hex listed on the
AERIAL ROCKET STRAFE diagram receives
an attack by the quantity of FRAG Factors
listed for each hex. Treat Rocket FRAG in
the same manner as an HE FFE attack.
b) Rocket Strike—Each hex listed on the
AERIAL ROCKET STRIKE diagram receives
an attack by FRAG Factors listed for each
hex. Treat Rocket FRAG in the same man-
ner as an HE FFE attack.
12.16.83 Cease Fire—An aircraft attack (re-
gardless of outcome) forces all M and H
44
weapons in the target hex to cease fire for
that turn. Mark such units with a ‘Cease
Fire’ marker, and remove all BOT markers
they have placed. Also remove any BOT
markers placed by L|MTR or L|ATRs tar -
geted by aircraft attacks.
12.16.9 Aircraft Counter-Battery Attacks
Ground attack aircraft may make counter-
battery attacks against OBA batteries. Air-
craft assigned to counter -battery operations
may not make any on-board attacks. Re-
move them from play after they locate an
enemy OBA battery.
12.16.91 Aircraft Required—One aircraft
is required to make a counter -battery at-
tack against one enemy battery. More than
one aircraft may be assigned in order to
increase the likelihood of locating a battery.
12.16.92 Counter-Battery Attack Rou-
tine—To conduct a counter -battery attack,
use the following routine.
a) The owning player assigns one or more
available aircraft to counter -battery duty (at
least ONE non-MG weapon/ordnance must
be announced as being used by each air -
craft for counter -battery);
b) During the Aircraft Attacks portion of the
Indirect Fire Segment, the impulse player
makes one location attempt (see 12.13.21)
for EACH assigned aircraft. Aircraft may
attempt to locate enemy batteries that have
not yet fired and more than one aircraft may
be used against a particular battery;
c) Neutralize a located enemy battery for the
current and following turn, after which the
battery may resume normal function;
d) Aircraft used for counter -battery attacks
return to play normally if otherwise allowed
(i.e., have NOT used all ordnance).
12.16.10 Spotter Aircraft
Some scenarios have Spotter aircraft in the
OOB, or provided by SSR. Certain ATS
products provide counters for Spotter air -
craft; otherwise use any spare aircraft
counter.
12.16.101 Battery Assignment —Assign
Spotter aircraft to an OBA Battery in the
same manner as an FO (see 12.11.31).
12.16.102 Aerial Spotting for OBA—Place
a Spotter aircraft on-board in any hex dur-
ing the Aircraft Attacks Segment of the turn
it is available. It may be placed in a new
hex during the Aircraft Attacks Segment of
later turns. Spotter aircraft may place a CFF
marker in any hex the aircraft has an LOS
to.
12.16.103 Spotting Range —A Spotter
aircraft’s Spotting Range is double the re-
sult listed on the Spotting Table (if in use)
or in LOS.
12.17 Gliderborne Assault:
12.17.1 Gliders—These aircraft are treated
as TRUCK type vehicles for all purposes
except MOVEMENT. In any scenario where
one side enters via a Gliderborne assault,
the OOB provided glider counters enter play
using a unique sequence. A glider is AL-
WAYS considered to use ONE MP in its
placement hex and any hex entered along
its glide path.
12.17.2 Troop Loads—Before any gliders
enter play, the owning player makes a side
note of the unit(s) carried in each glider. No
glider may enter play empty. The reference
S|5 on each glider counter refers to its stack-
ing limits in the same manner as a TRUCK
counter.
12.17.3 Entry—Units carried by gliders do
not enter play by setting up or entering from
off-board. They ‘land’ on the map. After all
enemy units have set up, the player mak-
ing the gliderborne assault places his glider
counters in their intended hexes within his
set up area, with no more than ONE glider
per hex and each pointing in the same Flight
Path. Play then begins on turn one with the
side making a gliderborne assault receiving
the Initiative automatically. His first impulse
must be used to land ALL his gliders. Op-
portunity Fire is allowed normally at gliders
during this landing impulse, including their
original placement hex and all hexes along
their Flight Path.
12.17.31 Landing —The owning player
makes a roll for each glider, in the order of
his choosing, using the Aerial Accuracy Chart
(NR). On a roll of 01-55 the glider lands in
its original hex safely (Exception: Unless it
is a NON open ground hex). If it lands out-
side its original target hex (or if the original
hex is not open ground) make a roll as per
12.17.32 to determine if a crash landing
occurs.
12.17.32 Crash Landing —Whenever a
glider fails to land safely a crash landing
may occur in its final landing hex. The glider
is considered to move through a glide path
of connected adjacent hexes indicated by
the Aerial Accuracy Chart (NR) die roll, not-
ing that rolls of 91-95 and 96-00 do not
represent moving in reverse (these results
represent a ‘short’ landing). Note any ter -
rain in the hexes in and between the origi-
nal and final hexes (taking into account the
hexes a glider does NOT travel through on
a short landing—ONLY apply the landing
hex) and add the cumulative DRM found
under the Glider Crash Landing Table. On
a modified roll of ‘0’, a crash occurs.
12.17.33 Casualties—When a glider
‘crashes’, roll a die as the base number of
Casualties. Divide by 4 (divide by 2 for a
Horsa glider), rounding down fractions to
obtain the number for C# to apply to per-
sonnel units the Glider carried. Weapons
carried by any Personnel unit ELIMINATED
are also eliminated.
12.17.34 Water Crash—A glider and its oc-
cupants landing in a non-fordable water hex
are eliminated.
12.17.35 Off-Board Crash—Any glider that
lands ‘off-board’ is treated normally and may
crash in its final landing hex. Treat ALL ‘off-
board’ hexes as Open Ground and apply
crash casualties normally. Surviving units
may enter from off-map on the following turn
within THREE hexes of the last on-map hex
of the glide path that took the glider off-
map.
12.17.36 Opportunity Fire—Enemy units
may conduct normal Opportunity Fire against
gliders and the units they carry in any hex
along the Glide Path, including the original
placement hex. A glider moving along its
Glide Path is always considered to be +10
levels higher than the highest level terrain
in the hex. If a glider is ‘wrecked’ it is still
placed in its final hex, representing a glider
‘wreck’, and has flame marker placed on it
to represent a burning glider if a burning
wreck results from enemy fire. All passen-
gers in a burning wreck glider are elimi-
nated.
12.17.37 Morale Checks—Personnel car -
ried inside a glider (including once landed,
but prior to exiting via Infiltration), no mo-
rale check is taken following casualties.
12.17.38 Exiting—After landing, place Per-
sonnel units on TOP of the glider counter
carrying them. All Personnel must de-plane
during the immediately following Infiltration
phase. They may Infiltrate into the glider
hex or an otherwise eligible adjacent hex
(e.g., across a cliff is not an eligible adja-
cent hex to enter). Treat glider passengers
as if in a separate location (in the same
manner as a blockhouse) of the hex for any
enemy units in the same hex; Infiltration
must occur before Melee can take place,
i.e., the units are not considered to be in
the same location until AFTER Infiltration
occurs (i.e., enemy units are free to move
out if Melee hasn’t occurred already [i.e.,
an enemy unit has entered their location]).
12.17.39 Landed Gliders —Treat landed
gliders in the same manner as non-burning
or burning wrecks for the purposes of LOS.
Once Personnel have exited a glider, it may
NOT be re-entered during play.
13.0 SPECIAL TROOP TYPES
13.1 OVERVIEW
In some scenarios an SSR will state that all
or a portion of a side’s OOB is made up of
special troop types. Elite troops receive a
beneficial DRM to their MV without the need
of an SSR.
13.1.1 Elite Troops —Personnel with a
printed Morale of EIGHT or greater add ONE
to their Melee Value against vehicles.
13.1.2 Combat Engineers—Personnel des-
ignated by SSR as ‘Combat Engineers’ add
1 to their Melee Value against vehicles (no
matter their current morale). They also use
Satchel Charges with a 2R column shift.
13.1.3 Gurkhas—SSR may des-
ignate all or some portion of a
British OOB as Gurkhas.
Gurkhas double their Melee
Value against Personnel.
13.1.4 Leaders—An NCO provides +1 mo-
rale/1R/-1 HPT DRM. Officers provide +2
morale/2R/-2 HPT DRM. The HPT DRM is
only used for HPT attacks for L and M weap-
ons (using the HPT as well as tables A2 and
A3) in a stack or Firegroup that includes
the directing leader. Leaders do NOT modify
their attacks when firing ALONE, only as
part of a Firegroup. Only ONE leader may
benefit a specific attack and the listed DRM
is provided even if the leader is wounded.
Leaders always check morale first and may
also be used as crews or to supplement re-
duced crews.
13.1.41 Leader Movement Bonus —One
non-wounded leader may provide a ONE
Movement Point bonus to THEIR OWN
MOVEMENT and other Personnel moving
in the same stack or platoon. This one ad-
ditional MP is added for all non-Crawling
movement, even if the leader is marked as
Winded. All 1 SP Personnel units are treated
as ‘leaders’ for the purpose of adding 1 MP
to THEIR OWN movement allowance (i.e.,
BAR Gunners may use 5 MP when using
Assault Movement; 8 MP when running).
45
13.2 Japanese Personnel
The soldiers of the Japanese Empire brought
a unique military code, known as ‘Bushido’,
to the battlefields of Asia and the Pacific.
The rules below depict these unique com-
batants without resorting to caricature. Play-
ers will note the morale of Japanese Per -
sonnel does NOT reduce as they receive
casualties/flip or when leaders become
wounded.
13.2.1 Morale Effects—Japanese Person-
nel are immune to the effects of Casualties
on morale checks and do NOT reduce their
printed Morale value when marked with a
Casualties marker. They are still forced to
check morale when casualties result on the
Casualty Table, however, no DRM is applied
for the ‘#’ portion of a ‘C#’ result. Japanese
Personnel ignore Morale Table modifiers to
morale checks (Exception: They still check
morale when Overrun, see 13.2.2).
13.2.2 Overruns—When attacked by Over-
runs, Japanese Personnel apply a -2 mo-
rale modifier.
13.2.3 Japanese Off-Board Artillery —
When provided Off-Board artillery support
by SSR, unless stated otherwise an FFE only
attacks the hex it is in.
13.2.4 Surrender —Japanese Personnel
never Surrender. In any case that the rules
call for a unit to Surrender, treat them as
BROKEN instead (even if already Broken,
i.e., there is no additional effect).
13.2.41 Already Broken Units —Broken
Japanese Personnel remain Broken upon
failing another morale check or when adja-
cent to enemy units.
13.2.42 Broken Units and Melee—Japa-
nese Personnel units are NOT eliminated
when enemy units enter their location. Bro-
ken Japanese Personnel may DEFEND in
Melee as if they are NOT marked as Bro-
ken. They may not Infiltrate.
13.2.5 Japanese Leaders—Japanese Offic-
ers are provided a 1|1|* value and are
treated as Commissars (Exception: They
MAY form Firegroups and affect fire) for
morale and rally purposes. Japanese NCOs
are provided a 1|1|9 value (as are FOs)
and are treated normally unless stated oth-
erwise.
13.2.51 Morale Checks and Rallying —
Japanese leaders automatically Rally.
13.2.6 Banzai Charge—Japanese Person-
nel may declare a ‘Banzai Charge’, a special
form of Platoon Movement that creates
‘Overrun’ attacks immediate Melee by Japa-
nese Personnel. A Banzai Charge may be
made when at least SIX Stacking Points of
non Leader Personnel are eligible to use
Platoon Movement, even after movement
has already begun by the Platoon. Normal
Platoon Movement rules apply except where
stated otherwise below.
13.2.61 Running Targets—Japanese Per-
sonnel conducting a Banzai Charge are con-
sidered to be using Running movement (and
may do so even if already marked as
Winded). Treat Personnel making a Banzai
Charge as if using Running movement for
the remainder of the turn (i.e., even AFTER
the Platoon has completed its move).
13.2.62 Overrun Morale Check—All enemy
Personnel units ADJACENT to Banzai Charg-
ing units eligible (e.g., not across a Cliff
hexside) to enter their location make an IM-
MEDIATE morale check as if being Over -
run (i.e., apply a +4 DRM per Banzai Charge
to a maximum of +8 and mark such units
with an Overrun marker). Units that fail are
marked as Broken. Movement by the units
in the Banzai Charge platoon then contin-
ues. Reminder: Entry of the location of a
Broken enemy unit ELIMINATES it immedi-
ately.
13.2.63 Banzai Halt and Immediate Me-
lee—Personnel using a Banzai Charge may
enter enemy locations (i.e., they do NOT have
to wait until the Infiltration Phase) but each
entering unit/stack must immediately STOP
once the first enemy location has been en-
tered. Other Banzai Charging units of the
Platoon may continue moving in keeping with
Platoon Movement rules until they have ei-
ther expended any remaining Movement
Points the owning player wishes to use OR
entered an enemy location. Once ALL units
of the Banzai Charge Platoon have completed
their movement, and all enemy Opportunity
Fire has been conducted, play is halted and
Melee is conducted in hexes containing units
of both sides.
13.2.7 Japanese Tank Hunters—A special
form of ‘Opportunity Fire’ Melee (represent-
ing Japanese Tank Hunters, described by
the US Army in Intelligence Bulletin Vol. III,
No 5. [January 1945]) may be conducted
against same hex or adjacent enemy VE-
HICLES by Japanese Personnel units of
TWO Stacking Points or greater. Movement
(including entering a Japanese Personnel
hex to conduct an Overrun but BEFORE
the effects are considered applied, i.e., be-
fore a morale check is taken) AND fire while
in the same or adjacent hex (and otherwise
eligible for entry, e.g., not across a Cliff
hexside) is considered a ‘trigger’ for this form
of attack.
13.2.71 Attack Resolution and Attacker
Casualties—For each Tank Hunter attack
made, the attacking Personnel unit absorbs
a ‘C1’ result and immediately attacks the
same hex/adjacent enemy vehicle in Melee
as if the equivalent of a 1|1|9 NCO marked
with Courage is making the attack. How-
ever, the Tank Hunter is removed from play
immediately after resolving the attack us-
ing the Melee Table. Players may wish to
place an un-used Japanese 1|1|9 (marked
with a medal marker) in the attacked hex
as a reference. For each MP or ROF used
in an eligible hex for Tank Hunter attack,
ONE such attack may be made by a Per -
sonnel unit.
13.3 USMC Personnel
The United States Marine Corps faced
unique challenges on the battlefields of the
Pacific Theater of Operations, at all times
squaring off against a determined, even sui-
cidal foe that needed to be killed before re-
linquishing contested ground.
USMC squads are all 9|6|9 (and 7|6|7
reduced squads). Their Officers (and FOs)
are 1|1|9 leaders and NCOs are 1|1|8s.
USMC crews receive a value of 2|3|9.
13.3.1 Morale Table Effects—USMC Per -
sonnel receive a morale modifier of +2 for
each 3 Stacking Point Personnel unit and
+1 for EACH non Leader 2 SP Personnel
unit. They are not penalized for Surrendered
units and suffer a -2 modifier for Overruns.
13.3.2 Weapons Use—Any USMC Person-
nel unit (or combination of units) totaling 2
Stacking Points or more may serve as the
crew of a HEAVY weapon without penalty.
There is NO REDUCTION made to the
printed GF for non Leader/non Crew USMC
Personnel using Light or Medium weapons.
13.4 Volkssturm/Conscript Personnel
In the last days of the Third Reich old men
and boys were pressed into service with
little training. The troops of other nations
may also be specified by SSR to be ‘Con-
scripts’.
13.4.1 Penalties—Add a +2 HPT DRM for
any Volkssturm/Conscript Personnel unit
firing a weapon on ANY Hit Probability Table
(i.e., including M|MG, SCW and L|AT).
14.0 SPECIAL WEAPON AND CREW RULES
14.1 DUG-IN HEAVY WEAPONS —Heavy
weapons that begin a non-Desert scenario
set up in hexes eligible for the placement of
a Weapons Pit Emplacement are provided
one if NO Weapons Pits counters are pro-
vided in ANY portion of that side’s OOB.
The only units that may set up in these Weap-
ons Pits are the Heavy weapon and its man-
ning Crew. Weapons Pits provided as part
of a side’s OOB may have ANY unit set up
within.
14.2 WEAPON CREWS
14.2.1 Overview- Crews are
Personnel units and function
within all previously cited rules
in regards to stacking, gunfire,
movement, etc. Crews are used
to operate Medium and Heavy weapons but
may also operate Light weapons. To fire, a
Medium or Heavy weapon must be
‘manned’, i.e., set up with its crew (or other
Personnel unit later in the game if the origi-
nal crew has been eliminated or moved away)
or using the pick up and carry routine be-
fore it may be fired in the current turn.
14.2.2 OOB Crews—Before beginning play,
assign one Crew counter to EACH Medium
and Heavy weapon provided in the OOB for
that side.
14.2.3 Fire Options—A Crew may NOT fire
its printed Gunfire Factors or make a Gre-
nade Attack in the same turn it fires a Me-
dium or Heavy weapon. They may, however,
engage in Melee in the normal manner and
are subject to normal Personnel restrictions
when using Light weapons.
14.2.4 Crew Casualties —Crew counters
have two sides, full strength and reduced.
They flip to their reduced side upon taking
one Causalities result (i.e., on a ‘C1’) and
are eliminated after absorbing TWO Casu-
alties (i.e., immediately on a ‘C2’ or greater
result), or upon receiving another ‘C1’ if al-
ready flipped to their reduced side.
46
14.2.5 Reduced Crew Penalty—Any Heavy
or Medium weapon fired by a reduced Crew
fires with a reduction in its printed ROF.
The ROF of all H and M weapons is reduced
to 1, even if a BOT marker has been placed.
The –3 HPT DRM for BOT is still received.
14.2.6 Alternate crews—Two Leaders (or
any 1 SP Pesonnel units) may be used as
an alternate crew. They are treated as the
equivalent of a REDUCED Crew for ROF
purposes with the following exception: NON
leader Personnel adds +1 to any HPT hit
attempt for an M weapon and +2 for any H
weapon. Three Leaders (or FOs) or a Leader
AND a squad (full strenth or reduced) are
treated as the equivalent of a full-strength
Crew for ROF purposes. See 14.2.61 for
Leadership.
14.2.61 Leadership—Alternate crews that
consist of 3+ SP of Personnel and include
leaders may receive leadership benefits.
Examples: A reduced squad + NCO may use
full ROF and apply a 1R shift to its fire on
the casualty table. Two + one Officer firing
a M|MG may use full ROF and apply a 2R
shift to their fire on the Casualty Table.
14.2.7 Self Rally—As per 10.8.1 Broken/
Surrendered crews may attempt to Rally
without a leader present.
14.3 MACHINE-GUN DIRECT FIRE
14.3.1 Overview—There are two types of
Machine-guns used in the game: Light and
Medium 5/8" weapon units and those
mounted on vehicles.
14.3.2 Long Range Machine-Gun Fire—
Light and Medium Machine-guns may fire
beyond their printed range at HALF Gun-
fire Factors, to a maximum of DOUBLE their
normal range (Exception: Long Range fire
may not be applied when a MG uses an
HPT).
14.3.3 Anti-vehicle Machine-Gun fire—All
Light and Medium MGs may fire at vehicles
by using their GF directly on the Casualty
Table and comparing the result to the At-
tack results vs. Vehicles And H Weapons
Table. M|MG and vehicular MG may also
fire on the A2 MG HPT, using all appropri-
ate HPT DRM. After securing a hit, use the
K-KILL Table to obtain a result. When fir-
ing at AFV using the HPT, MG use their
PEN of ‘1’.
14.3.4 BOT Restriction —Machine-guns
never place BOT or have their ROF increased
for any reason.
14.4 SHAPED CHARGE L|AT WEAPONS
(SCW)
14.4.1 Overview—Shaped Charge Weapons
(SCW) are Light Anti Tank Weapons (L|AT)
that represent the American Bazooka, Brit-
ish PIAT and German Panzerfaust (Pf) (and
Panzerschreck (PsK) weapons. Apply a +3
HPT DRM for Personnel units firing SCW
while using Assault Movement.
14.4.11 Panzerfaust Removal—Remove a
Pf L|AT from play after it is fired once.
14.4.2 Anti Vehicular/H weapon Usage—
Fire at vehicles using the L|AT HPT (A3).
All normal HPT DRM apply. After a hit against
a vehicle is secured, SCW use the AP por-
tion of the K-KILL Table.
14.4.3 Anti Personnel/H Weapon Usage—
SCW may fire HE at Personnel in the same
manner as a H weapon—but ONLY against
Personnel in a building location, UNDER a
bunker, blockhouse, Cave Dugout, or BE-
HIND a Wall/High Wall hexside that pro-
vides cover (i.e., no fire allowed by SCW in
the case of denial of Wall cover), noting the
exception for targeting H weapons in
14.4.31. SCW DO NOT create rubble in
building locations nor remove Bunkers/
Sangars and their FRAG are always
HALVED vs. Personnel. SCW may cause
Flame results normally.
14.4.31 vs. H Weapon—Any hit against an
H weapon eliminates the weapon (and re-
solve HE results against any manning crew
or Personnel in the same location as per
14.4.3). An SCW may always fire at an H
weapon (in any terrain) and any manning
crew is attacked on the Casualty Table ONLY
if the weapon is hit. In the case of a weapon
in terrain eligible for SCW attack, the firing
player must specify that he is attacking the
H weapon INSTEAD and any hit obtained
ONLY affects the weapon and any manning
crew unless the target location may other-
wise be attacked (e.g., building location).
14.4.4 Firing Restrictions —Only a PIAT
L|AT may fire safely from inside a building
or under a bunker/cave. All SCW may fire
freely from rubble locations. Personnel be-
ing transported by vehicle may not fire any
form of L|AT. A PIAT may not fire at a tar-
get that is ADJACENT and +20 or more lev-
els lower than the PIAT hex. Non ATR L|AT
weapons do not place BOT markers.
14.4.41 Emergency Use—In the event the
owning player wishes to fire a SCW from a
location otherwise restricted in 14.4.4, he
may do so (Exception: PIAT +20 level re-
striction always applies). However, immedi-
ately following the HPT die roll, the oppos-
ing player must apply casualties in the form
of a C2 result to ANY Personnel unit(s) in
the same location (or in the same vehicle).
Casualty morale checks follow for all units
in the location. A SCW may only be fired in
this manner from a non-moving vehicle by
a unit in S|G|F cover.
14.4.5 Panzerfaust and Bazooka Range—
The range for Panzerfaust and Bazooka
weapons varies by year. In 1943-44, the
maximum range for Bazookas is 4 hexes; in
1945 it is 5. In 1943-44 the maximum range
for Panzerfausts is one hex; in 1945 it is
two.
14.5 ANTI-TANK RIFLES
14.5.1 Overview—Anti-tank rifles (ATR) are
Light weapons (Exception: The Italian
Solothurn M|ATR is a Medium weapon).
They may fire against Personnel directly on
the Casualty Table using their ‘1’ GF or
against vehicles on the HPT. In all cases
ATRs may not fire beyond the maximum
range listed on each ATR counter after the
‘#’ notation.
14.5.2 Casualty Table Use—An L|ATR may
fire using its ‘1’ GF directly on the Casualty
Table, including against vehicles and their
riders and passengers.
14.5.3 HPT Use—ROF, BOT, HPT DRM and
other Direct Fire rules apply to ATRs using
the HPT. Use the ‘D’ row (Exception: The
20|B ATR uses the ‘B’ row) on the HPT for
ATRs. ALL L|AT weapons use a +3 Assault
Fire HPT DRM.
14.5.4 Anti Vehicle Attacks—After obtain-
ing a hit, use the PEN of ‘1’ listed for ATRs
on the Gun Penetration Values table (Play
Aid #5) for each nationality. The line excep-
tion to this is the Italian Solothurn 20|B
ATR. It may only fire out to the maximum
range listed on the counter, but uses the
20|B listing on the Italian Gun Penetration
Values table.
14.5.5 Anti Personnel Attacks—Any Per-
sonnel riding on a TANK are attacked by
the same die roll used for the K-KILL Table
roll, but using the ‘1’ column on the Casu-
alty Table (unlike AP from H weapons, which
use the ‘4’ GF column) and using Assault
cover. Passengers in S cover in vehicles are
also attacked by 1 GF following a hit. No
separate FRAG attack is made against pas-
sengers in G and F cover following an ATR
hit; use the K-KILL Table against the ve-
hicle and apply any wreck results to the
passengers normally.
14.6 ON BOARD MORTARS AND HOWIT-
ZERS
14.6.1 Overview —Mortars are are either
Light or Medium weapons (may also be
mounted on vehicles, usually half-tracks)
that use Indirect Fire. Mortars may never
use Assault Fire. Medium and Heavy weap-
ons denoted as Howitzers (M|HOW and
H|HOW) may fire using Spotted Indirect Fire
as may mortars.
14.6.2 CA—Light and Medium Mortars have
a 360-degree field-of-fire. Mortars mounted
in vehicles use the VCA to fire. Howitzers
are treated in the same manner as other
guns for Covered Arc purposes.
14.6.3 Mortar Attacks—Mortar fire by on-
board units is considered Indirect Fire, but
it is conducted during the Fire & Movement
Segment. Mortars use the HPT and place
BOT markers. When attacking vehicles re-
fer to Table C2 after making a roll on the
Casualty Table following each HIT obtained
on the HPT. See 14.6.7 for the use of Spot-
ted fire by mortars and howitzers.
14.6.4 Fire and BOT Restrictions—Mor -
tars (and Howitzers using Spotted fire) may
not fire from inside Buildings (except from
roof or roofless locations), bunkers, block-
houses, from water hexes, or, unless ve-
hicular -mounted, by Personnel transported
by vehicles. BOT markers placed by mor -
tars may never be moved to ‘follow’ a tar -
get.
14.6.5 Minimum and Maximum Range—
Mortars have a minimum and maximum
range as indicated on their counter in the
format minimum-maximum following the “#”.
Howitzers all use a minimum range of TEN
for Indirect Fire if no minimum range is
printed on the counter. Unless a maxmimum
range (e.g., Japanese Type 92 has a maxi-
mum range of 75 hexes) there is no maxi-
mum range limit in game terms for Howit-
zers. Mortars may not fire at targets be-
yond their maximum range or less than their
minimum. Howitzers ignore their MINIMUM
47
range when using DIRECT fire.
14.6.6 Mortar Fire From Full Cover—If an
LOS otherwise would exist, mortars may be
fired from FULL cover position in an Em-
placement, without the need for another unit
to serve the function of a Spotter. Firing a
mortar in this manner does not ‘reduce’ the
FULL cover protection of the firing unit in
any way.
14.6.7 On Board SPOTTED Indirect Fire—
On Board Mortars and howitzers (H|HOW)
as well as vehicle-mounted ‘C’ and ‘D’ guns
of 75mm+ may fire without an LOS to their
target by using a ‘Spotter’, a Personnel unit
functioning in a similar manner to an FO.
Any adjacent NON Broken/Surrendered Per-
sonnel unit may act as a Spotter. A Person-
nel unit may only act as a Spotter for one or
more mortars/HOW in ONE hex (weapons
in multiple locations of a hex are allowed,
e.g., mortars on top of AND under a Hedge-
hog).
When spotting for multiple weapons, each
weapon may attack a different hex while
using the same Spotter. To indicate it is not
eligible to move, mark the Spotter with an
‘F’ marker when spotting (or make a side
note if the Personnel unit is hidden; spot-
ting does not in itself reveal the unit). A
Personnel unit acting as a Spotter is con-
sidered to have fired one L weapon (no
matter how many weapons are spotted for)
for the purposes of restricting their ability
to use other weapons. Use the 12.12.2 rou-
tine in the same manner as OBA for SPOT -
TED Indirect Fire (i.e., place CFF/FFE
markers and roll on the Accuracy Diagram)
with the following exceptions: a) On Board
Indirect Fire ONLY affects the hex the FFE
lands in; b) No battery contact roll is re-
quired.
14.6.71 Indirect Fire Segment Only for
Spotted Fire—All Weapons firing using On
Board SPOTTED Indirect Fire must fire
during Step #3 of the INDIRECT FIRE SEG-
MENT (i.e., the same step as Off-map Indi-
rect Fire).
14.6.72 CFF/FFE Removal—If the firing
unit becomes Broken/Surrendered/Sup-
pressed remove any CFF/FFE immediately
(i..e, NOT during the End of Turn Segment).
14.7 FLAMETHROWERS
14.7.1 Overview—Flamethrowers refer to
both infantry weapons and vehicular -
mounted versions. FT use the same proce-
dure as small arms fire against Personnel
but may NEVER be included in a Firegroup,
and use their own procedure against ve-
hicles.
14.7.2 Fire restrictions—A Flamethrower
may never combine its fire with any other
unit or be used in a Firegroup. Leaders do
not provide any shifts to FT attacks nor is
an FT halved during Assault Fire use.
14.7.3 Cover State exception—Fire from
an FT ignores any Cover State produced by
the terrain in the target hex or hexside, in-
cluding any cover state column shift af-
forded by vehicles and wrecks. Only
SMOKE cover is applied, and then ONLY
when attacking NON-vehicle targets.
14.7.4 Range—The range of a Flamethrower
is stated as 30|1 with ‘1’ serving as the
range. The normal ‘#’ is also used to denote
range.
14.7.5 Flame and Fuel—Roll 2 dice when
attacking with an FT. Use the colored die
for the attack. If the target unit is any ter -
rain eligible for Flame placement (Building;
Woods, etc.), place a Flame marker in the
attacked hex following a result of C6 or
higher (on a subsequent die roll of 1-3 as
per Table FR). On a white die roll of 9-0,
the Flamethrower is ‘out of fuel’ and the
Weapon is removed from play AFTER the
attack is resolved. If the FT is a vehicle’s
MA, mark the vehicle with an F-KILL marker,
unless the vehicle is also equipped with
another MA, for example a Gun, whereas
the vehicle may continue to operate nor -
mally with its other weapons. A side note is
suggested to keep track.
14.7.6 Sd 251-16—This vehicle has
Flamethrowers mounted on both its left and
right sides. Treat each as a separate
Flamethrower that may only fire at target
hexes adjacent to the vehicles left or right
FLANK aspect. Each Flamethrower may run
out of fuel separately. The vehicle is not
removed from play for being F-KILLed un-
less both Flamethrowers are out of fuel.
Make a side note of the side out of fuel when
placing one F-KILL marker on a Sd 251-16.
14.8 SEMI-AUTOMATIC GUNS
14.8.1 Overview—Some small caliber Guns
(e.g., Pzkw IIf turreted MA) have a high rate-
of-fire and may directly attack on the Casu-
alty Table in the same way as a MG used
without rolling for a hit on the HPT. Known
as ‘Semi-Automatic Fire’, this form of fire
consumes all available ROF of the weapon
for that turn. Apply any column shifts for
pivoting normally.
14.8.2 Procedure—For any H|AA Gun of
40mm or less and ANY Gun of 20mm or
less (including 20|B ATRs), multiply the
normal FRAG Factors for that gun by its
ROF to obtain a GF equivalent. This GF value
can be used against any target directly on
the Casualty Table, and is treated in the
same manner as Small Arms fire (e.g., use
Table C6 against vehicles and H weapons).
14.8.3 Range—Semi-Automatic Guns may
fire out to a range equal to half the Gun
size. Example: A 37mm AA Gun may fire up
to 18 hexes away.
14.9 SPIKING WEAPONS —Any type of
Weapon unit may be ‘spiked,’ or rendered
useless, by any Personnel unit that carries
or picks it up. The weapon may be spiked
instead of fired by any unit that could oth-
erwise fire it. Remove Spiked Light and
Medium weapons from the map. Place an
F-KILL marker on spiked Heavy weapons.
14.10 ALTERNATE AP AMMUNITION
14.10.1 Ammunition Types—During World
War II new forms of Armor Piercing (AP)
ammunition was created in an effort to deal
with the thicker plates armoring new tank
models. In game terms, these alternate
ammunition types are listed on each AFV
Card or for each gun on the Gun & Mortar
Ammunition Table (Play Aid 5 for each na-
tionality). Treat each form of alternate AP
ammunition as a form of ‘AP’—they use the
AP portion of the K-KILL Table.
14.10.2 Dates of Availability—During the
war, the Axis produced a limited supply of
Armor -Piercing Composite Rigid (APCR) and
High Explosive Anti-Tank (HEAT) ammuni-
tion, which had markedly superior penetra-
tion capabilities. Note the dates appended
to Play Aid #5 for each nationality in the
format month/year. The listed ammunition
type may not be used in scenarios set BE-
FORE the listed date.
14.10.3 Special Ammunition Penetra-
tion —When firing APCR, HEAT, or APDS
ammunition, use the appropriate entry (e.g.
APDS) on the Gun Penetration Table for those
ammunition types.
14.10.4 Determine number available—To
determine the number of ‘rounds’ for each
ammunition type available during a scenario,
add the number of ‘APCR,’ ‘HEAT’ and APDS
capable units in the Order Of Battle and
use one third (round fractions down) of this
total as the base number for that ammuni-
tion type. Note the modifier on the table if
the opponent’s order of battle includes cer-
tain tanks, such as the Grant and Tiger.
The base number, plus the total from the
Alternate Ammunition Availability Table
(found on Play Aid #5 for each nationality
that has weapons eligible for alternate am-
munition types) roll equals the number of
each type of APCR, HEAT, and/or APDS
shots available for the scenario.
14.10.5 Assign Special Ammunition—The
owning player must specify the identity of
the AFVs or Guns ‘carrying’ the alternate
rounds resulting from the calculation above.
Make a side note of the ID letter of the unit’s
allotted APCR, HEAT or APDS ammunition
and quantity available for each. Only the
noted units may use this ammunition. Each
‘round’ is equal to one hit attempt die roll on
the HPT.
14.11 TIME-FUZED HE AMMUNITION—
When firing the 88mm Flak using Direct
HE, or when an SSR specifies a ‘Variable
Timed Fuse’, airbursts are produced in ter-
rain that does not normally produce air -
bursts (but does NOT produce airbursts in
hexes/locations specifically negated, e.g.,
buildings). There is no additional effect in
hexes that already provide airbursts (no HPT
DRM is created).
14.12 CANISTER AMMUNITION
Canister ammunition is listed on the Gun &
Mortar Ammo Table under the ‘C’ column.
Canister is fired in the same manner as a
Gun using Semi-Automatic Fire with the
exception that it may fire at any TWO adja-
cent hexes (or two locations within one hex)
within the LOS and covered arc (CA) of the
firing weapon and HALVE the HE/GF
equivalent for each hex attacked. Apply piv-
oting normally as column shifts when using
Canister ammunition.
14.13 SPECIAL WEAPONS
14.13.1 Demolitions —Certain weapons
allow units to destroy terrain, emplacements
or other special targets during play. Satchel
Charges may be used to attack combat tar-
gets, emplacements, and terrain. Bulldoz-
ers and Bangalore Torpedoes never attack
enemy troops.
14.13.11 Dozer —Bulldozers (or Dozers)
come in three varieties: unarmed (and
unarmored) types with a white movement
icon; armored types with a yellow icon; and
tanks equipped with dozer blades. All three
have a special form of Assault movement
that may be used for ‘Dozing’. The dozing
value is printed in this format Cross Coun-
try | Assault Dozing MP. All Dozers per -
form Dozing tasks the same way.
48
14.13.12 Dozing—Dozers affect certain ter-
rain, emplacements and remove non-burn-
ing wrecks from play. They ‘doze’ moving
normally to enter the hex in question. They
then may spend their ONE Dozing MP AF-
TER already entering the hex, in order to
conduct a Dozing activity. Dozing triggers
Opportunity Fire and the dozing results only
apply AFTER any fire is completed against
the Dozing vehicle. Although not considered
firing, Dozing requires a roll on the ‘50’ col-
umn of the Casualty Table to attempt an
affect on the terrain, emplacement or wreck.
After rolling on the Casualty Table, refer to
the Demolition Table (DT) for results. If the
C# is high enough, the terrain, emplace-
ment or wreck is affected. Otherwise, there
is no effect. Upon obtaining a result, ONE
Bunker, Beach Obstacle, Roadblock, Wreck
or Wire counter in the hex (or along one of
its hexsides in the case of a Roadblock) is
removed from play. Mark a Bocage, Hedge
or Wall (including High Wall) hexside with a
Minefield Lane counter to signify all forms
of units may now cross the hexside (LOS is
still treated normally). Replace an AT Trench
or Hedgehog with a Foxhole counter.
14.13.13 Bangalore Torpedo (BT)—Banga-
lore Torpedoes are special 1/2" Light weap-
ons that may only be used once and then
are removed from play. Normally used by
Engineer units, Bangalore Torpedoes are
used to remove Roadblocks, Wire and Mines
from the map. A BT attacks on the ‘40’ col-
umn of the Casualty Table and refer to the
Demolition Table for results.
15.0 SPECIAL VEHICLE RULES
15.1 AFV TYPES
AFVs have gray movement point back-
grounds, and are differentiated by move-
ment type, armor, open- or closed-top, and
turret.
15.1.1 Tanks
A Tank is a fully armored (gray movement
icon and AFV Card provided), turreted, fully
tracked AFV. Tanks may be open-topped
(OT) or close-topped (CT).
15.1.2 Armored Cars (AC)
Armored Cars are turreted or non-turreted,
wheeled vehicles and are sometimes suffi-
ciently armored to be considered AFV (gray
movement icon and AFV Card provided).
They are treated as AFV or APC or truck
normally based on their movement icon and
may move in reverse at the reduced cost
for wheeled vehicles.
15.1.3 Self-Propelled Guns (SPG)
A Self-Propelled Gun is a fully armored, tur-
ret-less, fully tracked AFV, either open- or
close-topped. An SPG may only fire its main
armament at targets within its VCA.
15.1.4 Open Topped vehicles
OT vehicles have a white outline behind the
vehicle art on the counter (e.g., German Sd
251-1). An OT vehicle is more vulnerable to
Indirect Fire, Grenades, Melee and Person-
nel Fire due to the exposed nature of the
crew compartment. The crews of OT ve-
hicles may be attacked by GF and Grenades,
using the Casualty Table (followed by the
Suppression Table) in an effort to Suppress
them or force Bail Out (see 15.1.41). Sup-
pression (and any Bail Out roll required by
suppressing an already Suppressed OT ve-
hicle) is the only additional result possible.
15.1.41 Suppression and Bail Out—Sup-
pressed OT vehicles may not fire. If an al-
ready Suppressed OT vehicle receives a
NEW Suppression result, make a roll on the
Bail Out Table using the M-KILL row.
15.2 VEHICLE WEAPONS
Most vehicles have multiple weapons, con-
sisting usually of a Main Armament (MA) and
machine-guns. Some vehicles have multiple
MA, a FT, or some combination thereof. A
vehicle may use all of its weapons once per
Fire & Movement Segment during different
impulses OR all during the SAME Impulse.
When marking a vehicle with an ‘F’ marker,
note if any of the vehicle’s various weapons
are still available to fire. All of a vehicle’s
weapons are unusable if it suffers an F-
KILL result (Exception: TURRET - and SPON-
SON-mounted weapons are F-KILLed sepa-
rately).
15.2.1 Main Armament (MA)
A Gun Size printed in the lower left corner
of a vehicle counter indicates the vehicle’s
MA. In the absence of such a weapon, treat
any MG marked with a circle around the
MG value as that vehicle’s MA. No other
vehicles have an MA (thus they are not forced
to exit if any other vehicle armament is F-
KILLed). MA can be mounted in three ways:
Turret, Hull, or Sponson, or a combination
of turret and hull or sponson.
15.2.11 Turret-Mounted MA —Turret-
mounted MA are indicated by a solid or
dashed circle around a vehicle’s Gun Size
(e.g., 75|B with a circle around it). These
Guns rotate with the turret, and thus can
change covered arc independent of the ve-
hicle.
15.2.12 Hull-Mounted MA—Hull-mounted
MA are indicated by a vehicle’s Gun Size
not being circled. Hull-mounted Weapons
use the same covered arc as the vehicle
(VCA). The vehicle must pivot to fire these
weapons at a target not already within its
VCA.
15.2.13 Sponson-Mounted MA—Sponson-
mounted MA are indicated by a superscript
‘s’ appended to the Gun Size (e.g., Grant/
Lee, M11/39). Sponson- and turret-
mounted weapons may fire at different tar-
gets. Each Gun acquires its target separately
for BOT purposes.
15.2.131 Limited Traverse —Sponson-
mounted weapons fire in the same manner
as SPG but pay a +1 HPT DRM for targets
within their VCA but in any hexes on the
POR T side of center.
15.2.132 F-KILL Exception—Weapons on
a Sponson AFV are destroyed separately.
An F-KILL resulting from a Turret hit F-Kills
turret-mounted weapons. An F-KILL from
any other front hull hit F-Kills Sponson and
hull-mounted weapons.
15.2.2 Machine-guns
Vehicles have the following types of machine-
guns. All are considered M|MG, except the
L|MG with which Carriers are armed.
15.2.21 Coaxial (CMG) —Mounted in the
turret, the CMG shares the turret’s Cov-
ered Arc (also referred to as ‘TCA’).
15.2.22 Bow (BMG)—Mounted in the front
Hull, the BMG shares the vehicle’s covered
arc.
15.2.23 Anti-Aircraft (AAMG)— Mounted
on top of the vehicle in an external mount,
the AAMG may fire at any target within range
regardless of the turret or vehicle covered
arcs. It is capable of fire only if the vehicle
is NOT Suppressed.
15.2.24 MG Format on counter—Machine-
guns are listed in the following format: CMG
| BMG | AAMG. Some vehicles have only
two MG and use the format CMG | BMG.
Others have multiple MG of a specific type
listed as ‘x2’ (two times) or ‘S+P’ (starboard
[right] and port [left] side) or limited cov-
ered arc (e.g., ‘P’ for port side only). The
absence of a particular MG vehicle mount
is indicated by a ‘-’.
15.2.25 MG Range—CMG and AAMG, as
well as BMG mounted on APC, have a nor-
mal range of ‘10’ hexes. Other BMG have a
normal range of ‘6’ hexes. All types may fire
out to double their normal range using Long
Range Fire (see 12.5.52).
15.2.3 Rear Facing
Some vehicles have weapons that face to
the rear. Rear -facing guns have a super -
script ‘R’ appended to the Gun Size (e.g.,
Portees); rear -facing MGs have an ‘R’ su-
perscript appended to the MG value (e.g.,
Italian AB 40 APC). These weapons are con-
sidered to face to the rear VCA (or rear tur-
ret covered arc [TCA]).
15.3 TURRETS
15.3.1 Turrets and 360-degree H
weapons have fast (power) OR
slow (hand-crank) rotation capa-
bilities.
15.3.11 Fast Traverse—Have a solid black
circle around the Gun Size (e.g., Crusader
II; Pz IVh; Bofors H|AA).
15.3.12 Slow Traverse —Have a dashed
black circle around the Gun Size (e.g., Pzkw
IIf; Pz IVj).
15.3.2 Turret Covered Arc (TCA)
Instead of turning a turreted vehicle’s VCA,
a turreted vehicle may pivot its turret to
fire turret-mounted weapons in a new TCA.
15.3.3 Turret Marker
Place a turret marker on the AFV to indi-
cate its TCA whenever the TCA and VCA
are not identical. Any hit on the turret as-
pect strikes the front, side, or rear of the
turret according to the turret marker fac-
ing.
15.3.4 One Man Turret—Some AFV Cards
note the vehicle has a “One man turret” or
other information restricting turret-mounted
weapons, usually stating they may not fire
more than ONE turreted armament during
the same segment.
15.3.5 Turret Rotation—An AFV may ro-
tate its turret while moving, and as part of
firing. Place a turret marker on the vehicle
accordingly.
15.3.51 Turret Rotation While Moving—
An AFV may rotate its turret one hexspine
per movement point that it spends during a
Movement Impulse. It may expend MP to
rotate its turret without leaving its hex.
Turning a turret without leaving a hex is an
Opportunity Fire ‘trigger,’ but one hexspine
change in turret facing occurs before the
vehicle may be fired on.
15.3.52 Turret Rotation While Firing—
During a direct or indirect fire impulse or
when using opportunity fire, an AFV may
rotate its turret to any hexspine prior to fir-
ing. Turret rotation adds HPT DRM. Rotat-
ing one hexspine incurs a DRM of +1 for
Fast traverse and +2 for Slow traverse. Each
hexspine of rotation past the first incurs an
additional +1 DRM for both turret types.
Each DRM for turret rotation also provides
a one column shift LEFT for any of the
vehicle’s turret-mounted weapons that fire
49
directly on the Casualty Table.
Example, a +2 DRM for turret rotation gener-
ates two LEFT shifts on the Casualty Table
when firing a CMG during the same impulse
a turret pivoted.
15.4 HULL-DEFILADE
Vehicles positioned behind or in certain
types of terrain and emplacements receive
(or may roll to receive) partial cover that
makes the lower part of the vehicle invul-
nerable to direct fire. This is called Hull-
Defilade (H-D).
15.4.1 Automatic Hull-Defilade terrain and
Emplacements
Vehicles are automatically in Hull-Defilade
if incoming direct fire crosses a wall or
bocage hexside of its hex, or a crest-line
from a lower elevation hex if on a Hill or
Embankment, or higher elevation hex if in
a Wadi or Deir. Non-small vehicles in Weap-
ons Pits also receive H-D status (Very Small
target size vehicles in Weapons Pits are con-
sidered in FULL cover).
15.4.2 Die Roll Hull-Defilade Terrain
Scrub, UP positions on Hillocks, and Rock-
Strewn Terrain MAY provide Hull-Defilade,
but acquiring H-D status will require a die
roll, which may be made following a sepa-
rate H-D expenditure of 1 MP while mov-
ing. Place a Hull Defilade marker on vehicles
that roll successfully. Only one vehicle per
hex may obtain H-D status via the die roll
method. When H-D status is obtained VIA
A DIE ROLL, the vehicle is H-D only through
its FRONT VCA and if the vehicle leaves the
hex or changes its VCA, the H-D marker is
immediately removed. If the vehicle pivots
only and does not leave the hex, a new roll
may be made. Changing TURRET covered
arc does not remove the H-D marker.
15.4.21 H-D Weapon Use
Vehicles in H-D terrain positions or marked
as H-D may not fire Bow-mounted weap-
ons. Sponson-mounted weapons may fire.
15.4.3 Flank HPT DRM
Do not apply the -1 Flank HPT DRM when
firing on a turreted H-D vehicle. Apply the -
1 Flank HPT DRM when firing on a H-D
non-turreted vehicle.
15.4.4 Vulnerable Vehicle Aspects
When firing at a H-D vehicle, only hits on
certain aspects actually hit the vehicle. Ig-
nore hits against all other aspects.
a) Non-sponson, turreted vehicle: Turret
hits only;
b) Non-turreted vehicle: UH hits only;
c) Sponson AFV: UH and turret hits only;
Note: Usually hit location is not rolled for
APCs or armed trucks. When these vehicle
types are H-D, use the Hit Location Table
to determine if the round has struck a vul-
nerable aspect.
15.4.41 Vehicle Size DRM for Hit Loca-
tion—When firing at a H-D vehicle, vehicle
size is used as a DRM on the Hit Location
Table. Large vehicles receive a -1 DRM;
Small a +1; and Very Small a +2.
15.4.42 BOT DRM for Hit Location—For
H-D targets marked with BOT, a -3 DRM
applies on the Hit Location Table (in addi-
tion to applying the -3 HPT DRM). Note: BOT
markers are placed on H-D vehicles only
when a hit strikes a vulnerable aspect.
15.5 PRE 1943 RUSSIAN VEHICLE MA
15.5.1 Rationale: This rule simulates the
relative inexperience of Russian tank com-
manders prior to 1943. The following rule
15.5.2 applies in ALL scenarios set before
January 1, 1943 (i.e., no SSR is required).
15.5.2 HPT DRM—A +2 HPT DRM is ap-
plied when a Russian vehicle fires on the
Hit Probability Table. No shifts are applied
on the Casualty Table due to this HPT DRM
nor is non MA fire affected. Non vehicle (e.g.,
H weapons) HPT use is not affected.
Example: A Suppressed Russian tank in a
September 1941 scenario needs to roll a FIVE
or less to obtain a hit at a range of TWO hexes.
15.6 ELITE TANK COMMANDERS
In some scenarios, SSR will specify that one
or more AFVs have an ‘Elite Tank Com-
mander’. Simply make a side note of the ID
of the AFV.
15.6.1 HPT DRM—Apply a -1 on HPT DRM,
Immobilization checks, and Hull-Defilade
checks, and apply a +1 on Suppression die
rolls for the AFV. Elite tank Commanders
may move from one AFV to another. Pre 1943
ELITE Russian tanks IGNORE the +2 HPT
DRM specified in 15.5.
15.6.2 Initiative Modifier—If only one side
in a scenario has a non M/K-KILLed Elite
Tank Commander, that side has a -1 modi-
fier to all of its Initiative die rolls if both
OOBs contain vehicles only.
15.6.3 Bail Out Modifier—If the Elite tank
is K-KILLed, F-KILLed or M-KILLed, add 1
to the die roll for all Bail-Out checks for the
remaining AFVs for that side for the rest of
the game (making bailing out more likely)
UNLESS one or more Elite Tank remain for
that side.
15.6.4 Commander Relocation—If the Elite
tank commander spends an entire Fire &
Movement Segment with another AFV in the
same hex, without either moving, the Com-
mander may be placed in the new AFV. Make
a secret side note to this effect.
15.6.5 Gun Duel Initiation—An Elite Tank
Commander may initiate a Gun Duel with-
out a BOT marker required on the enemy
target.
15.7 APC UNITS
APC are lightly armored, usually Open-
Topped Transport vehicles. APC have yel-
low movement icons on their counters and
all receive an AF of 0. Half-Tracks and Car -
riers are the most common types of APC.
15.7.1 Inherent Crew—APCs contain inher-
ent Crews in the same manner as AFVs—
they never take counter form (Exception:
Carriers) as per the rules for Bail Out (i.e.,
they may Bail Out; see 12.5.16).
15.7.2 APC as targets—APCs may be at-
tacked by using the Casualty Table (see
Tables C2 and C6) and on the HPT followed
by the K-KILL Table for each hit obtained.
15.7.3 APC Passengers—Personnel units
being transported in APC whose counters
include a ‘G’ or ‘F’ notation are in Good Cover
and (if an ‘F’ notation is present) may drop
into Full Cover, marked with a FC marker.
If the vehicle counter does not contain a ‘G’
or an ‘F,’ treat the cover state as Stationary.
15.7.4 APC Firegroups—All APCs and their
Passengers may form firegroups with other
APC and Personnel, following the standard
Firegroup rules.
15.7.5 Half-Tracks-Half-Tracks are usually
APC with a yellow movement point icon in
the shape of an ‘oval plus small circle’. Some
are unarmored white icon vehicles.
15.7.51 Half-Track MG—Many Half-Track
APCs such as the 251/1 are equipped with
one BMG. Some have AAMG or BMG that
may only fire from a REAR VCA, and are
marked with an ‘R’ superscript. The ‘stan-
dard’ BMG has a front field-of-fire and fires
like an AFV BMG.
15.7.52 Half-Track APC Passenger Fire—
Personnel units transported in a Half-Track
may fire their printed Gunfire Factors and
any ONE carried L|MG while in Good Cover.
This L|MG is fired through the rear and
side facings of the Half-Track only, but Per-
sonnel Gunfire Factors may be fired through
the front facing too. If the Half-Track uses
Assault movement, passenger fire is halved.
Passengers in a Half-Track may not fire if
the vehicle uses Cross-Country movement.
15.7.6 Carriers—The Carrier is a small fully
tracked lightly armored APC usually used
by British and Commonwealth forces. It
carries an inherent Crew. Unlike other ve-
hicle Crews, a Carrier’s Crew may exit nor-
mally and take counter form as a 2|3|8
Crew counter.
15.7.61 Weapon Mounts—Carrier weaponry
functions in the same manner as the main
armament and machine-guns of AFVs. Ex-
ception: The Carrier machine-gun functions
in the same manner as a British L|MG, in-
cluding when removed (e.g., 3 GF; 6 range),
with one exception. When mounted in a
carrier this BMG only has a ROF of ONE.
Carrier weapons may only fire through their
VCA. All other ATR and BMG rules apply to
Carrier armament normally.
15.7.62 C r e w / We a p o n R e m o v a l —A
weapon may be removed from a Carrier by
its inherent crew, which must also exit.
Removal of any weapon and unloading of
the crew is done using normal loading and
unloading procedures. If the Carrier is K-
KILLed, all weapons are destroyed. A side
note must be maintained as to which weap-
ons are removed from Carriers—or mark
with F-KILL and Bail Out markers (noting
these do not count as Victory Points for the
opponent). A Carrier may no longer fire or
Overrun if its Personnel crew unloads but
it may still move. Any Carrier machine-gun
removed enters play as a Bren L|MG
counter. A British Boys L|ATR and/or Bren
L|MG may be removed from a Carrier B by
its crew. A Bailed Out result does NOT place
a crew in play nor are any weapons removed.
15.8 PORTEES
Portees are gun armed trucks (i.e., -1 AF)
with a Gun mounted on the bed (most in a
REAR Covered Arc). Trucks mounting AT
guns in Portee may not tow H weapons nor
carry any passengers except its inherent
Crew. AT guns mounted in Portees have
their guns facing to the rear two hexsides
50
(as indicated by the ‘R’ superscript on the
gun value on the counter) unless marked
with a Turret traverse circle.
15.8.1 Crew
Portees carry an ‘inherent’ Crew, treated in
the same manner as an AFV Crew—as per
the rules for Bail Out (i.e., they may Bail
Out; see 12.5.16). A Portees’ Crew receives
Stationary Cover. AT Guns and Crews in
Portee on K-KILLed Trucks are destroyed.
15.8.2 Unloading
An AT Gun may be Unloaded from a Portee
in a two turn Unloading procedure during
which the Gun, Truck, and Crew may not
move or fire. A Crew or larger unit is re-
quired to Unload the Gun. If the Portee re-
ceives an attack by Gunfire or FRAG Fac-
tors, the Unloading process must halt. Make
a side note after the first turn of Unloading.
Replace the Portee counter with the appro-
priate Gun, a Crew and a LT Tr vehicle
counter once unloaded. Note: The ‘37’
Portee is armed with a captured German
PaK 36.
15.9 Watercraft
Watercraft transport Personnel, weapons
and vehicles in Stationary cover. The val-
ues on watercraft counters are in the fol-
lowing format: Cover State | Stacking Points
they may carry in WATER hexes. Watercraft
are carried by Personnel in the same man-
ner as M weapons (as denoted by the value
on the counters as ‘M|WC’), including fire-
power reduction for carrying units, and thus
never move on their own. They may only be
carried in APCs providing G or F cover or in
Trucks, as if they are M weapons.
15.9.1 Personnel Usage
Loading—A watercraft may be placed in a
water hex from an adjacent non-water hex
by a carrying Personnel unit ONLY if using
Assault movement, and the carrying unit
may be stacked (using its remaining MP)
ON TOP OF the watercraft to signify it is
riding IN it in the water hex. Any Personnel
unit(s) moving with the carrying unit as a
Platoon may also enter the watercraft at this
time. Adjacent Personnel units may ONLY
use Infiltration to enter a watercraft. Once
placed in its FIRST water hex, a watercraft
may be moved no further during that Fire
and Movement Segment (Exception: Raft).
Unloading—A watercraft must be adjacent
to a non-water hex in order to unload. If the
watercraft moved during the turn, then Per-
sonnel on board may only unload via Infil-
tration. If the watercraft did not move dur-
ing the turn and is adjacent to a non-water
hex, then units may use Crawling or As-
sault movement as well as Infiltration to
unload.
15.9.2 Vehicle Usage
The only watercraft that may transport a
vehicle is a ‘Raft (L)’. If using Assault move-
ment, ONE vehicle may be placed ON TOP
OF an ‘L’ Raft in an adjacent water hex or
may exit one to an adjacent non-water hex.
Personnel may never carry a watercraft until
the vehicle on the raft has exited. A vehicle
uses ALL Stacking Points of a watercraft
(i.e., no other unit may be placed on it with
the exception of any H weapon towed or
passengers and their L and M weapons car-
ried in or on the vehicle).
HPT Attack Vs. Personnel/H Weapon/AFV
15.9.3 Carrying Heavy Weapons
Rafts are treated in the same manner as
normal transport (Exception: They are en-
tered FROM and exited TO adjacent, non-
Vs.
water hexes by pushing; large target size H
weapons can only be TOWED on/off a wa-
tercraft). One Heavy weapon and its crew
➊ Count range in hexes to the target hex
may be carried in the same manner as a ➋ Determine the HPN by cross referencing the range and the appropriate row A-D of the
vehicle on a Raft (L). HPT
15.9.4 Water Movement ➌ Make a die roll and apply all HPT DRM, found under the HPT:
Once in water hexes, watercraft use the MP
➀ A roll ≤ the modified HPN = HIT
printed on the WC movement icon (waves
over a white background) to move in WA-
➁ Die roll > modified HPN = MISS (no effect)
TER hexes only and do NOT need Person-
➍ Resolve each HIT against the following TARGET TYPES:
nel on them in order to move. Rafts carry- ➀ L|ATR and Gun Vs. H Weapon
ing at least a 2 SP personnel counter may à Firing weapon is L|ATR make a roll on Table C4 and apply results
also move one hex during Infiltration. (Ex- à All other weapons HIT = Elimination
ception: When carrying a vehicle or H
➁ L|ATR and Gun Vs. AFV
weapon, this Infiltration movement is ne-
gated.).
à Refer to the HIT LOCATION TABLE then compare PEN (provided on the Gun
15.9.5 Target Status Tables provided for each side or on the AFV Card for each AFV) and AF (found on
When firing at Personnel in watercraft while the AFV Card for each aspect/facing) at the targeted range and roll on the appro-
in WATER hexes, treat them as in Station- priate DIFF column of the K-KILL Table; a die roll must be made that is less than
ary cover and apply Casualties normally. or equal to the listed number on the table:
However, NO morale check is taken follow-
3 POSS K-KILL = refer to the POSS K-KILL Results Matrix to determine if a
ing a ‘C’ result when in a water hex. Water-
craft may not be ‘sunk’, only their passen-
roll on the M- or F-KILL Table is called for; no roll results in a K-KILL (replace
gers are attacked.
with NON burning wreck marker)
15.9.6 Rafts and S-Boats 3 K-KILL = Replace w/ wreck marker
The only difference between ‘Raft’, ‘Raft (L)’ 3 BURN = Replace w/burning wreck
and ‘S-Boat’ counters in game terms is their ➂ L|MTR Vs. AFV or H weapon
speed and Stacking Points limits, including
à Locate the Gun size and the HE column and make a roll on the Casualty Table
the ability of ‘L’ rafts to transport vehicles.
(no column shift is made for Airbursts against AFVs)
All are considered Watercraft.
15.9.7 Amphibious Vehicles—Amphibious
3 ‘-’ result = No Effect
vehicles carry two propulsion systems - one 3 C1-C11 result = Refer result to Table C2
for land and one for water. Unlike water - ➃ L|MTR Vs. Personnel
craft, Personnel never carry amphibious à Locate the Gun size and the HE column on the Casualty Table and refer back
vehicles.
to STEP ➍ on COMBAT RESULTS DIAGRAM 1 (applying one right column shift
15.9.7.1 Water Entry and Exit—Amphibi-
for Airbursts in applicable terrain [see the Terrain Chart])
ous vehicles are denoted by having a back-
side WATER movement icon. They may en-
amphibious vehicle in a water hex, treat it
ter a water hex using Assault movement but
as if it is in Hull Defilade, without reference
must stop upon reaching the first water hex
to its facing. It is also considered a moving
entered. Flip the vehicle counter over to its
target at ALL times.
water movement side upon entering. Once
15.9.7.3 LVT4—The American
flipped, the vehicle may enter water hexes
LVT4 is a fully tracked am-
at the cost of 1 MP each but may NOT use
phibious APC. It is armed with
water MP to enter a non-water hex. Once
a 10 GF MG on each of the
adjacent to a non-water hex, the vehicle may
port and starboard sides.
exit, using Assault movement, and is flipped
These may never fire at tar -
back to its ‘land’ movement side.
gets directly in the front or rear of the ve-
15.9.7.2 Target Status—When targeting an hicle.

A 2|3|8 crew carrying (or ‘manning’) a British 2 in L|MTR in hex N2 decides to

fire at the German leader and squad in the woods hex Q4. Before any effect can
be obtained by the mortar, a ‘hit’ must first be obtained using the HIT PROB-
ABILITY TABLE. The range from firing unit to target hex is THREE hexes (do not
count the firing hex when calculating range). At this range a die roll of ‘6’ or less
will be needed, obtained by noting the ‘7’ in the 3-8 Range column and applying
the +1 drm for the target being in a woods hex. On a die roll of 1-6 a hit is
obtained. The attack is now resolved using the Casualty Table, starting with the
‘6’ column, which also happens to contain the ‘50’ FRAG row, appropriate for
this size mortar. However, since the target hex is woods, AIR BURST effects
apply, providing a ONE RIGHT shift. A die is rolled on the ‘8’ column, with a die
roll of ‘1-2’ resulting in a C3, a die roll of ‘3-4’ a C2, and a roll of ‘5-6’ resulting
in a C1. On a roll of 7+, there is no effect. However, a BOT marker is placed for
ALL hits obtained, even if no effect results on the Casualty Table. In the event
the 1|1|8 + 6|5|6 were to fire (ignoring the mortar attack for the moment), the
attack would be calculated as follows: [6 column] + [2R shift to the 10 column
from the 1|1|8] + [1L shift due to the hedge hexside N2/O3] = Use the 8
column for this attack.

51
Squad ‘8’ and its carried MG 34 are in hex H2 of ‘Hill 12’. This location provides an LOS height advantage that allows the unit to see over the hedges
running alongside the road that runs from K2-K6 in the
example. The German player decides to use one firing
impulse to fire at the British Personnel in hex M5,
combining his machine-gun and 6|5|6 squad for
an attack using ‘10’ GF (eleven minus one for
carrying the L weapon). This attack starts
out on the ‘10’ column of the Casualty
Table, then must apply a 1L shift due
to the woods in the target hex.
Thus, the attack is made on the
‘8’ column. For the purpose
of this example the German
player is assumed to have
rolled an ‘8’, and there is no
effect. Mark hex H2 with ONE
‘F’ marker and the impulse
goes over to the British
player, who decides to re-
turn the fire from M5. In his
case, however, the 8|4|9 is
beyond its normal range of
FOUR hexes. Thus, it attacks
at HALF its printed GF (out to
a maximum range of 8
hexes). The British fire ap-
plies a 1L shift for the HILL in
the target hex, AND a 1R shift
for the NCO directing the fire,
for a cumulative zero shift.
The British attack takes place
on the ‘4’ column of the Casualty Table. Again, let’s assume ineffective fire for the sake of this example. After the British fire the impulse returns to the
German player, who may now use the second ROF shot from the MG 34 to fire at the 2|3|8 in hex K5 (or it may fire at M5 again). The 6|5|6 itself may
not fire again this turn.

The example
GF Vs. Personnel Attack at left illus-
trates the
principles of
a Crossfire.
Vs. Two con-
secutive
Gunfire or
Grenade At-
➊ Tally the number of GF by all firing Personnel and L weapons; deduct ONE GF tack impulses
for each carried L weapon and TWO for each M weapon (i.e., HPT at-
tacks never
➋ Refer to the Terrain Chart for the COVER provided by the target hex and apply create a Crossfire) across opposing hexsides
any shifts for Obscuring terrain ALONG the LOS like ‘A’ create a Crossfire. Hexside combina-
➌ Cross reference the COVER provided on the Terrain Chart with the Cover State tions like ‘B’ and ‘C’ do NOT create a Crossfire.
Effects Table and apply cumulative column shifts
➍ Make a roll on the Casualty Table:
➀ ‘-’ result = No Effect
➁ C1-C11 result = Apply CASUALTIES from the attack to Personnel units in
the target hex The example at left illustrates Orchard
➎ Check morale for all surviving Personnel units using the C# result from the LOS principles. Unit ‘A’ cannot see ‘B’
Casualty Table as a morale modifier and applying any other DRM from the Mo- due to the Blind Hex created by hex P3,
rale Table which contains more than FOUR Or-
chard symbols. Unit ‘A’ can see ‘C’ and
‘D’ since the LOS is along a road into
F both hexes. Unit ‘B’ does NOT have to
apply a DRM/shift for Obscuring terrain
through ‘C’s hex due to the Orchard
Road effect. Unit ‘E’ does have to add a
A B C D +1/1L for ‘B’s hex when firing at ‘F’, even
if it did NOT touch any Orchard symbols,
since its LOS is NOT along a road and
there are greater than FOUR symbols in
E the hex.

52

K the Woods in hex N6. Assuming that hex N7 was
G as it could see over the Level +10 LOS obstacle
V tack. ‘V’ still receives the +1/1L cover for the
C M
P U
B S
F I
A H
a) Unit ‘A’ in hex L7 has an LOS to ‘B’ in hex L4.
It does NOT have an LOS to ‘C’ in hex L3.
Explanation: A Hillock on a Hill creates a con-
tour, getting rid of the ‘pancake’ effect and al-
lowing for LOS across the Hillock contour
hexside. The intervening Woods in hex L4
blocks LOS to L3.
b) Unit ‘D’ in hex Q4 has an LOS to ‘E’ in hex S7,
and has to pay +1|1L for the Crops hex in R5
and +1|1L for the Crops hexside S6-R6, for a
total of +2|2L.
Explanation: Crops are Obscuring terrain and
add +1/1L per hexside along an LOS. If an LOS
B
A D
C 1
vening Woods in hex N6. If hex N7 were a level
+20 Hill instead, it would still not be able to see
hex N5, as N5 would be a blind hex created by
a level +20 hill, a unit would have LOS to hex N4,
represented by the Woods in N6.
e) Unit ‘J’, which is ‘Up’ in the ‘Partial’ Hillock in hex
Q R7 has an LOS to unit ‘V’ in O3, ‘L’ in R4 and ‘M’ in
T3, with NO Obscuring Crops applied to its at-
Hedge hexside in O4/P3. ‘J’ has no LOS to ‘K’ in
N1 due to LOS being blocked by Orchards in O2.
Explanation: The LOS for ‘J’ is in a +5 Hillock
hex. This +5 level position allows it to see over
ALL the intervening level +5 terrain (Crops). The
D Orchard terrain in hex O2 blocks LOS to N1
since the ENTIRE hex is treated as Orchard due
L to 4+ art symbols.
f) Unit ‘N’ in hex P7 has an LOS to ‘O’ in hex T7.
Explanation: The Hillock in hex R7 is consid-
ered a ‘Partial’ Hillock, and it does NOT block
LOS in ANY way. If this were instead a Desert
R map, then hex R7 would be considered a ‘Full’
Hillock, and would block the LOS. Crops along
the LOS will Obscure it.
T g) Unit ‘P’ in hex M4 has no LOS to ‘Q’ in hex P2.
Explanation: The N3-O3 Hedge hexside blocks
LOS on the same level. LOS that runs directly
along level +5 hexside terrain can only be traced
to the hex just behind that hexside terrain. Thus,
E an LOS exists from hex M4 to hex O3, but not
beyond to P2.
N J O h) Unit ‘F’ in hex L5 has no LOS to ‘R’ in hex P5.
Explanation: Since there are four or more Or-
chard art depictions in hex O5, the ENTIRE hex
is considered Orchard terrain and a Blind Hex
is created to fire from a higher level, even though
the LOS does not actually touch the Orchard art.
i) Unit ‘S’ in hex N4 has an LOS to ‘R’ in hex P5. It
is exactly ALONG a hexside with Obscuring ter- does NOT have an LOS to ‘T’ in hex Q6.
rain in EACH hex, only ONE Obscuring hex is Explanation: The same level Hedge hexsides of
applied to the LOS (the highest, in the case of ‘S’ and ‘R’ are in the actual hexes of the firing and
Smoke and a +1/1L hex along the same hexside). target units. In the case of the blocked LOS to ‘T’
c) Unit ‘F’ in hex L5 has an LOS to unit ‘G’ in hex in Q6, the intervening O5-P5 Hedge hexside
O2. blocks LOS as it is not in the firing or target
Explanation: ‘F’, on a Level +10 Hill, can see units’ hex.
over ALL the intervening level +5 terrain (Crops j) Unit ‘U’ in hex O4 has no LOS to ‘H’ in hex N7.
and Hedge) for a clear, unobstructed shot at hex Explanation: The intervening Woods in hex N6
‘G’ in hex O2. blocks LOS. If the building in hex O4 had a
d) Unit ‘H’ in hex N7 has no LOS to hex ‘I’ in hex Level +10 location, LOS would still be blocked
N5. due to the creation of a Blind Hex in N7 by the
Explanation: LOS is blocked due to the inter- Woods in N6.
k) Unit I in hex N5 has an LOS to unit R in P5. The
Orchard terrain in O5 acts as Obscuring terrain,
since firing and target unit are both on the same
level. If ‘I’ fires on ‘R’, +1/1L cover is applied.
Explanation: The Hedge in hexside O6 is Ob-
scuring terrain, as is the Orchard in O5. How-
ever, only ONE instance of Obscuring terrain is
used when firing along a hexside. If there was a
Smoke marker in O5, the total cover ‘R’ would
receive is +5/5L (i.e., +1/1L + +4/4L = cumula-
tive +5/5L).
The example at left illusrates Cave Dugout LOS principles. Cave ‘A’
can establish LOSs across ALL six hexsides of its hex. However, it
cannot see a unit IN hex M10. Cave ‘B’ can see across three
hexesides, but cannot see into hex L9, nor may it see M9, L10, or
M10. It does have an LOS into hex K11, since the LOS is traced
exactly across any portion of a hexside to lower terrain and an LOS
can be traced to K11 without touching higher hill terrain art (it is a
‘downhill’ shot). Squad ‘1’ in P11 can see units stacked under ‘A’,
‘C’ and ‘D’ but NOT ‘B’. Squad ‘1’ could also NOT see units under
a Cave Dugout marker in N9.
53

APPENDIX A. CHARTS AND TABLES
IA....................................Accuracy Diagram
NR......................................Aerial Attack Diagrams
DA........AFV AF (Armor Factors) vs. Aircraft Attacks
E...............................................AFV Bail Out Table
AFV.......................................................AFV Cards
AA..........Alternate Ammunition Availability Table
C5.......................................Anti-Aircraft Fire Table
C7......................................APC/Truck AF Table
TP...............Attack vs. Transported Personnel Table
BT....................................................Building Table
F2................................................Casualty Table
F1...............................Cover State Effects Table
DT..............................................Demolition Table
EC........................................Emplacements Chart
D1..................................................F-KILL Table
C3........Flamethrower vs. Vehicles and H Weapons
CC.....................................Glider Crash Casualties
GC............................................Glider Crash Table
GA.................................Grenade Attack Table
GM............................Gun & Mortar Ammo Table
BP................................Gun Penetration Table
C4..............................................H Weapon De-
struction Table HPT Hits by Weapons ≤ 20mm
HE.........................................HE Penetration Table
B.............................................Hit Location Table
A1.........................................Hit Probability Table
I...........................................Immobilization Table
IS...............................Indirect Fire Vs Vehicle Shifts
C2.................................Indirect HE | FFE | Air -
craft Bomb Attacks Vs Vehicles And H Weapons Table
G................................Indirect Fire Affects Table
C8................................................Interceptor Table
C1....................................................K-KILL Table
L...........................LOS Blind Hex Creation Table
ME.......................................................Melee Table
A2.....................................MG Hit Probability Table
D2...................................................M-KILL Table
M......................................................Morale Table
CB.....................Off-Board Counter-Battery Matrix
OA..................................OOB Addition Table
P................................Personnel Movement Table
FR.........................Rubble | Flame | Removal Table
A3...................................SCW Hit Probability Table
C6.....Small Arms vs. Vehicles and H Weapons Table
S......................................Spotting Ranges Table
D3..........................................Suppression Table
TS.........................................Target Size HPT DRM
TC.................................................Terrain Chart
T...................................Tow/Carry Personnel Table
U.................................................Floorpan Hits
V.........................................Victory Point Table
APPENDIX B. ACRONYMS
AA.....................................................Anti-Aircraft
AAMG........................Anti-Aircraft Machine Gun
AC…………………………………..Armored
AF…………………………………….Armor Factor
Car
AFV.................................Armored Fighting Vehicle
AP..................................................Armor Piercing
APC.............................Armored Personnel Carrier
APCR ..................Armor Piercing Composite Rigid
APDS..................Armor Piercing Discarding Sabot
ATR...............................................Anti-Tank Rifle
B...................................................Blocking
BAR..............................Browning Automatic Rifle
BMG..........................................Bow Machine Gun
BOT..............................................Burst On Target
BW......................Battlefield Walkaround Document
C..................................................Casualties; Clear
CA.......................................................Covered Arc
CFF......................................................Call For Fire
CH..................................................Critical Hit
CMG.....................................Coaxial Machine Gun
CoT..................................................Cost of Terrain
DRM...........................................Die Roll Modifier
e.................................................ENTIRE hex terrain
F-KILL..........................................Firepower KILL
FFE..................................................Fire For Effect
FO...............................................Forward Observer
FOW.....................................................Fog Of War
FRAG................................Fragmentation Factors
F........................................................Full Cover
FT..................................................Flamethrower
G...........................................................Good Cover
GF..................................................Gunfire Factors
H-D.....................................................Hull Defilade
H|AT.................................Heavy Anti-Tank Gun
HE...................................................High Explosive
HEAT............................High Explosive Anti-Tank
HOW .......................................................Howitzer
HPN...................................Hit Probability Number
HPT.......................................Hit Probability Table
HT.....................................................Halftrack
I......................................................................Improved
K-KILL.....................................Catastrophic KILL
LD...............................................Linear Depression
LH.........................................................Lower Hull
LOS....................................................Line Of Sight
L|AT................................Light Anti-Tank Weapon
L|ATR...................................Light Anti-Tank Rifle
L|FT......................................Light Flamethrower
L|MG........................................Light Machine Gun
L|MTR...............................................Light Mortar
M..............................................................Masonry
M|AT................................Medium Anti-Tank Gun
M|ATR................................Medium Anti-Tank Rifle
M-KILL..........................................Mobility KILL
E
K D
I
G F
H
a) Unit ‘A’ in hex Q6 applies the +1/1L Obscur-
ing Crops terrain in R5 when tracing an LOS to
‘C’ in S5.
Explanation: The LOS drops in even incre-
ments of +10 PER HEX. ‘A” is in Level +30
terrain; the next hex along the LOS, R5, drops
to +20, and the target hex, S5, is Level +10
terrain. The same effect applies between ‘A”
and ‘I’, as well as ‘A” and ‘D’.
b) Unit ‘A” has an LOS to ‘G’ in hex N7.
Explanation: Because of the effects of Con-
tinuous Slope, this LOS is treated as a SAME
LEVEL LOS. Thus, the Orchard terrain in O7
is treated as OBSCURING terrain.
c) Movement by ‘F’ to hex S7 represents Pre-
cipitous Terrain (8.13.6).
Explanation: Combine the Hillock hexside with
the Hill in S7 for a level change of +15.
54
MA..............................................Main Armament
MC…………………………….Morale Check
MG....................................................Machine Gun
M|MG...................................Medium Machine Gun
M|MTR..........................................Medium Mortar
NCO............................Non-Commissioned Officer
O.........................................................Obscuring
OBA……………………………Off-Board Artillery
OOB.................................................Order of Battle
OT.....................................................Open Topped
PaK......................................Panzer Abwehr Kanone
Pf…………………………………..Panzerfaust
PIAT……………….Projector Infantry Anti Tank
PsK..............................................Panzerschreck
(superscript)
R ..............................Rear CA
ROF......................................................Rate Of Fire
(superscript)
S ........................................Sponson
S...................................................Stationary Cover
SCW..................................Shaped Charged Weapon
SPG............................................Self Propelled Gun
SSR......................................Scenario Special Rules
TCA.........................................Turret Covered Arc
TD.................................................Tank Destroyer
TR................................................................Tracks
TUR....................................................................Turret
UH.........................................................Upper Hull
VCA.......................................Vehicle Covered Arc
VP……………..........................……….Victory Points
...............Amphibious vehicle/Watercraft icon
...........................Fully-tracked vehicle icon
...........................Half-tracked vehicle icon
........................Wheeled vehicle icon
B
C
A
d) Unit ‘A’ has an LOS to ‘E’ and ‘B’.
Explanation: No Blind Hex is created by the
same Hill the firing unit is on, creating an LOS
to ‘E’. The effects of Continuous Slope makes
the Orchard in S5 Obscuring terrain.
e) Unit ‘A’ has no LOS to ‘K’ in hex N4.
Explanation: Continuous Slopes create SAME
LEVEL LOS; the Hedge on hexside O5/P5
blocks same level LOS beyond O5.
f) Unit ‘C’ has no LOS to ‘E’; unit ‘D’ does.
Explanation: The ‘pancake effect’ of Hills re-
quires a contour hexside in order to see to
another level. The Hillock hexside in R4 acts
as a contour hexside for this purpose.
g) ‘A’ has no LOS to ‘H’ or ‘F’.
Explanation: Blocking terrain (Woods in N7)
always creates Blind Hexes. The Woods in R6
rise to Level +30, the same height as ‘A’.

APPENDIX C. OPTIONAL RULES
The rules below are presented for use upon the
mutual agreement of both players.
C1.0 No Hand Grenades—Before making a Gre-
nade Attack (including grenade variants, e.g.,
Gammon Bombs), a unit must FIRST roll for
Grenade availability. A die roll less than or equal
to its PRINTED morale must be made to have
grenades available. A unit that fails a Grenade
Attack availability roll is NOT considered to have
made an attack (i.e., it may Infiltrate).
C2.0 Hidden Movement—Any unit that is hid-
den may move from a hex/location to an adja-
cent/same hex location using Crawling Move-
ment and remain hidden if no enemy unit (or ‘C’
marker) is in the newly entered hex/location.
Make a side note of this form of movement.
C3.0 Bayonet Charge—When using Personnel
Platoon Movement, a leader may declare a Bayo-
net Charge at any point when it and at least
one other non-leader personnel unit is other -
wise still able to move. A special Bayonet Charge
Morale Check is made by the leader, with a +4
DRM (making it harder to pass). If the leader
passes the check, it and all other units cur -
rently moving as part of the Platoon are eligible
to make a ‘Bayonet Charge’.
C3.1 Bayonet Charge Movement—Treat all per-
sonnel as if temporarily marked with a Courage
marker (i.e., ignore morale checks) and treat ALL
units as if Running, even if previously marked
as Winded. Personnel executing a Bayonet
Charge may IMMEDIATELY enter enemy PER-
SONNEL hexes.
Once all units taking part in the Bayonet Charge
cease moving, Melee may be conducted normally
with the following exceptions: The Bayonet
Charging units do NOT take melee morale checks.
At the end of the Movement Segment remove all
temporary Courage markers from Bayonet Charg-
ing units. They are treated normally thereafter,
including marking all units that took part in a
Bayonet Charge with a Winded marker.
C3.2 Target Panic—A friendly personnel unit(s)
adjacent to an enemy personnel conducting a
Bayonet Charge may ‘panic’ at the approach of
the enemy IF the total enemy units making the
charge in the LOS of the friendly unit(s) exceeds
their Stacking Point value by DOUBLE or more.
Play is immediately halted in the same manner
as Opportunity Fire and an immediate Panic mo-
rale check is made by so-affected friendly unit(s).
Any unit(s) that fails is immediately marked as
Broken and may IMMEDIATELY move as a Bro-
ken unit normally BEFORE the enemy Bayonet
Charge can continue.
C4.0 Night Vulnerability—Any personnel unit
with a PRINTED morale level of 7 or less must
pass a morale check in order to move at night
(Exception: Unless stacked with a NON Broken
leader or entering from off map). Units that fail
this morale check are marked as moved but oth-
erwise suffer no additional consequences.
C5.0 Blowing Bridges—A Satchel Charge may
be used to blow a bridge hex (exception: NOT the
Arnhem Bridge). The attack must be announced
against the bridge ONLY and is otherwise
handled normally. On a C6 or greater result place
a Rubble marker in the hex. The rubble is con-
sidered to be down in whatever terrain the bridge
formerly crossed, at the level of the terrain (usu-
ally -10), and no longer affects LOS at the previ-
ous level.
C6.0 Crashing a Roadblock—Any non-small
(or very small) AFV/APC may attempt to crash
through (eliminate) a roadblock. The vehicle
must be using Assault Movement and must roll
immediately upon entering a hex that shares a
Roadblock hexside, applying die roll results fr9om
the following table:
ROADBLOCK CRASHING TABLE
DR Result
Roadblock removed; vehicle enters
1-2
adjacent hex
Roadblock removed; vehicle enters
3-4 adjacent hex marked with M-KILL
Roadblock NOT removed; vehicle marked
5-6 with M-KILL in current hex
Roadblock NOT removed; vehicle replaced
7-8 with non-Burning wreck in current hex
Roadblock NOT removed; vehicle replaced
9-0 with Burning wreck in current hex
C7.0 Path Through Crops—Any tracked (includ-
ing half-tracks) vehicle that enters a Crops hex
places a LANE marker in the hex. Any Crops hex
marked with a Lane marker is treated as Open
Ground for LOS (only) purposes.
C8.0 Bocage Spider Hole—Any Hedgehog or
Foxhole that begins play adjacent to a Bocage
hexside also serves as a passage to the other side
of any connected Bocage hexside for personnel
units moving from UNDER the Emplacement. The
cost to enter the adjacent hex is treated nor-
mally IGNORING the Bocage hexside (i.e., pay
ONLY for the other terrain in the adjacent hex).
C9.0 High Timber—A Forest hex may be de-
fined to be Level +30 or higher.
C10.0 Gun Jamming—Any time a weapon of
any kind (including H weapons and vehicle MGs
but excluding personnel printed Gunfire Factors
and Grenades) fires, roll an extra die to represent
the possibility of ‘jamming’. Original DOUBLES
results in a weapon ‘jam’. Place an F-KILL marker
on a jammed weapon, including on infantry
weapons.
C10.1 Clearing Jammed/F-KILLed Weapons—
The breech of any ‘jammed’ (including weapons
F-KILLed normally) weapon may attempt to be
‘cleared’. Only weapons currently manned/car -
ried by non-Broken/Surrendered units and those
of NON Suppressed vehicles may roll. A die roll of
‘1’ during the End of Turn Segment clears the
weapon (i.e., removes the F-KILL marker).
C10.2 Jammed Turret—Any turreted vehicle
hit by an HE/AP round in the turret may result
in a ‘jam’. A subsequent die roll is made and on
a roll of ‘1’ the turret is considered jammed. It
may no longer change turret covered arc.Once
jammed, a turret may not be ‘freed up’ during
play. When this rule is used during an ATS cam-
paign, all jammed turrets are automatically freed
up at the end of a scenario.
C11.0 AFV Crew Survival—Any AFV crew that
Bails Out is placed on the board in the AFVs hex
in the form of a Reduced-side crew of that na-
tionality. When first placed in play, treat it as if
using Running Movement (including the place-
ment of a Winded marker). It is treated normally
as a crew for all other purposes.
C12.0 Closed Transport—The personnel car -
ried in any half-track or truck may be removed
from the map and a side note made of the units
being carried.
C13.0 Re-grouping—Players may ‘re-group’
Reduced Squads/crews/Tank Hunter
Teams of the SAME value to create full-
strength squads and remove Casualties
markers. As long as ALL Casualties are ac-
counted for the owning player may freely
flip/remove units from play.
C14.0 On Board Artillery—An FO may direct
the Indirect Fire of any on-board mortar or Heavy
crew-served weapon instead of off-board artil-
lery.
C15.0 Alley Fire—Any unit moving BETWEEN
two terrain types that have other terrain that is
in the LOS of the firing unit (e.g., two buildings
that are not connected, i.e., have open ground
between them) may be fired on using the Casu-
alty Table and uses the OTHER terrain instead
IF the entire hexside between the terrain is in
55
the LOS of the firing unit. This fire is HALVED
on the Casualty Table and HPT attacks may NOT
use Alley Fire.
C 1 6 . 0 I n e x p e r i e n c e d G u n a n d Ve h i c l e
Crews—Any crew designated as ‘inexperienced’
adds a +2 HPN DRM to all HPT hit attempts.
C17.0 Supplemental Armor Plating—Crews in
the field occasionally added to their AFV’s armor
with bogie wheels, logs, and concrete. Any AFV
with Supplemental Armor adds +1 to its Front
UH and LH Armor Factors.
C18.0 No Quarter—‘No Quarter’ may be declared
to be in effect at any time (by voluntary player
declaration, just call out, “no quarter!”) Once in
effect, Surrendered units of both sides may be
fired on.
C19.0 Ramming—Vehicles may ram one an-
other in an attempt to M-KILL the opposing ve-
hicle ONLY if the targeted vehicle is NOT already
moving or marked as Moved. A ramming attempt
may be announced from an adjacent hex by a
vehicle of the same size or one that is a larger
(i.e., a small vehicle may not ram a normal sized
or large vehicle) target size. The ramming vehicle
must be using Assault Movement. An immediate
die roll is made upon entry. On a roll of ‘1’, the
target vehicle ONLY is M-KILLed. One a ‘9-0’ ONLY
the ramming vehicle is M-KILLed. On a ‘2’, BOTH
vehicles are M-KILLed. Any M-KILLed vehicle re-
mains in its current facing.
C20.0 Command Detonated Explosives—Hid-
den mines may be set up in any hex and may be
automatically detonated by a pre-designated
(make a side note) non-Broken/Surrendered Per-
sonnel unit that passes a morale check when it
wishes to immediately detonate the minefield
(usually when an enemy unit enters). Treat this
usage as Opportunity Fire/Fire impulse for the
‘triggering’ unit as if it used a L weapon.
C21.0 Enemy Turned the Road Signs—Any
time a vehicle comes to a road hex with a ‘fork’ in
it a die roll is immediately made. On a roll of ‘1’
the vehicle is considered ‘lost’ and the opposing
player may choose the road hex (Exception: Can-
not enter a just-exited hex) it next enters. The
vehicle, and any others in a platoon or convoy it
is moving as part of, must continue down this
road until coming to another fork (at which time
the same routine is repeated) or its Movement
Points for that turn are expended. Any friendly
vehicle entering the SAME fork during that Move-
ment Segment applies a ‘-2’ DRM (making it easier
to get lost) after at least one vehicle has become
lost that turn.
C22.0 Command Control—Unless ADJACENT
to a non-Broken/Surrendered friendly leader at
the time it wishes to move, no Personnel unit
may use Running or Assault Movement (it may
Crawl) during the Movement Segment unless it
passes a morale check.
C23.0 Snipers—Any leader provided in a sce-
nario may instead be designated as a ‘sniper’,
using its morale as its RANGE and Gunfire MUL-
TIPLIER also (e.g., a 1|1|8 may fire 8 Gunfire
Factors to a Range of ‘8’, or 4 Gunfire Factors out
to 16 hexes. A Sniper may ONLY fire on leader
counters, and may set up hidden. Otherwise,
treat sniper fire against leaders normally (i.e.,
use the Casualty Table; apply terrain column
shifts).
C24.0 Looting—Any personnel unit that newly
enters a building location rolls one die. On a die
roll of ‘0’, it is ‘looting’ the interior and immedi-
ately ceases its movement impulse.
C25.0 Fanatic Resistance Nest —Any one
building may be declared a ‘Fanatic Resistance
Nest’ by a player that sets up on board if Victory
Conditions call for one side or the other to con-
trol one or more buildings or building hexes to
win. Treat all non-Broken/Surrendered person-
nel in any ONE secretly recorded building (in-
cluding all hexes and locations of a multi-hex
building) as if they are marked with Courage
markers until at least ONE enemy unit (includ-
ing vehicles) enters any building location of that
building.
C26.0 Random ROF—A weapon with a ROF of
greater than one may only fire again if its attack
resulted in a die roll equal to DOUBLE its ROF or
less (e.g., a ‘2’ ROF M|MG may only use its sec-
ond ROF if its first attack resulted in a die roll of
‘4’ or less).
C27.0 Camouflage Smocks—During scenarios
set in 1944-45 all German squads with a
PRINTED morale level of 8+ receive a one column
shift LEFT or +1 HPN DRM when fired on in Woods
or Brush hexes.
C28.0 Mulligan Roll—The player that receives
the first ROLLED FOR Initiative also receives a
‘mulligan’, i.e., the opportunity to re-roll any ONE
die roll. Once a mulligan is used, it is ‘passed’ to
the opponent for him to use once, and so on.
C29.0 Hasty Mines—Add a +1 DRM (making it
easier to roll greater than, i.e., pass through)
mines that are Hasty Mines.
C30.0 Ditches—All non-Paved road (not Paths)
hexes (i.e., not gray) are considered to have
‘ditches’ on either side. Treat these hexes as if a
Foxhole counter is within ONLY when a person-
nel unit wishes to ENTER the ‘Ditch’ by placing it
under a Foxhole marker (which is removed from
play when no unit is in the ditch).
C31.0 Wide Boulevards—Any paved road hex
(i.e., gray) that is adjacent to at least FOUR other
paved road hexes is considered a ‘wide boule-
vard’. An ADDITIONAL one RIGHT column shift
(but NOT an additional -1 HPN DRM) is applied
to any personnel in such hexes when fired on
using the Casualty Table, INCLUDING resolving
HE (including artillery and aircraft bombs)
against the personnel.
C32.0 Concrete Trenches —Treat Anti-Tank
Ditch and Hedgehogs with a +3 FULL Cover ben-
efit.
C33.0 Pre-Game Massive Bombardment—This
is along the lines of the bombing of St. Lo, not to
be over -used. The attacking player places a CFF
in any hex on the map. Roll for accuracy nor -
mally. Every hex within FIFTEEN hexes of the
resulting FFE is attacked by 200+ HE (otherwise
treated normally as OBA).
C34.0 Civilians on the Battlefield—Any battle-
field still containing its civilian population is
treated as follows. Buildings may only be entered
in their ground level. No vehicle may enter a build-
ing location (it may use the street outside). If one
side is entering all of its personnel from off-board,
no building may be entered unless an enemy per-
sonnel unit was in the building hex and in the
LOS of a friendly unit first.
C35.0 Flooded Terrain—Treat ALL of the low-
est non-Ravine/River/Stream terrain level on the
map as ‘mud’ or ‘flooded’ terrain. Roads still cross
such terrain, but are considered Embankments
in those hexes. In the case of Mud, treat all such
hexes as Swamp. Otherwise, treat them as ford-
able pond hexes. Players may instead (or addi-
tionally) treat all Woods or Crops hexes as mud
or flooded. When either of these exists, ALL Ra-
vines are treated as Creek terrain instead.
C36.0 FO Hides—All FOs set up on map may
automatically set up hidden in any eligible ter -
rain.
C37.0 GR-6 Sound Locator Device— New
sound locator devices were used on Okinawa.
Sound Locator teams were rushed from Fort
Benning at the last minute to join the invasion.
If the American player is provided the GR-6 Loca-
tor device by SSR, locating enemy batteries takes
place on a die roll of 1-4 and the American player
need not assign a friendly battery to neutralize a
Japanese battery. All other Counter Batter rules
apply normally. Once located, the American
player may neutralize ONE Japanese battery us-
ing the GR-6 Locater, treating the American bat-
tery as a 149+ GUN on the OFF-BOARD
COUNTER BATTERY MATRIX.
C38.0 U.S.M.C. M1A1 75mm PACK ARTIL-
LERY—The American M1A1 H|HOW game piece
may be moved in the same manner as a MEDIUM
weapon using the following rules.
C38.1 Dismantling/Moving/Firing—If other-
wise eligible to use Direct Fire, the gun may be
readied for movement (i.e., NOT fired during the
same turn). The crew is considered to be ‘dis-
mantling’ and ‘packing’ the weapon for move-
ment. Mark the weapon with both F-KILL and
No Fire markers instead of an ‘F’ marker. Once in
this state the H weapon may be moved as if it is
an M weapon. It may ALSO fire, but is treated as
if it has a ROF of ONE and may NOT double its
ROF following the placement of a BOT marker.
When so-marked, the gun is treated as an H
weapon for ALL other purposes and may be re-
verted to its normal state in the same manner
(i.e., use of a Direct Fire opportunity; may fire
normally the NEXT turn) as used for ‘disman-
tling’ the gun. ONLY American and British Per -
sonnel may dismantle an M1A1 H|HOW.
C39 Sherman Wooden Supplemental Armor—
Marine tank regiments utilized wooden supple-
mental armor to help reduce the effectiveness of
Japanese close combat techniques. These wood
casings proved marginally effective. In any sce-
nario providing one or more M4A1/M4A2/POA
tanks, the American player may mark ONE THIRD
of his tanks as equipped with wood supplemen-
tal armor. Tanks with supplemental armor must
be revealed as soon as an enemy unit estab-
lishes a LOS. When tanks with supplemental
armor are attacked in Close Assault (regardless
of facing), deduct ONE from the Melee Value of
the attacking unit(s). Wooden supplemental ar -
mor has no other effect on play.
C40 Random Casualties—The owning player
does NOT distribute Personnel casualties as he
sees fit. Instead, when two or more Personnel
units are eligible for casualties and a C2+ re-
sults, a die is rolled for each. The unit(s) with the
highest roll incur ALL casualties until eliminated,
then the next highest rolling unit receives the
remaining casualties and so on. Apply the cur -
rent Stacking Point value of a unit as a die roll
modifier (e.g., an NCO receives a modifier of +1; a
reduced squad +2). In the event of a tie, BOTH
units must have at least a C1 applied, owner’s
choice for the unit to then absorb all remaining
casualties until eliminated.
a) The 1|1|9 leader leading the MG 42 + 8|5|9 in
hex O4 may provide its 2R shifts to ALL three
Casualty Table ROF ‘shots’ by the MG 42, us-
ing three separate impulses OR unlike an H
weapon, all in one impulse. After the first ROF
is used, the M|MG must set its covered arc
due to being in a building location (see 12.6.33).
b) If the MG 42 fires on the Russian 1|1|8, it
may ONLY fire on the 8|2|8 and/or 6|4|8 during
the same turn. The 8|5|9 COULD fire on the
enemy 4|3|6 using its PRINTED GF, but the ‘8’
will be reduced to a ‘6’ due to the carried M
weapon (see 12.5.51). The leader MAY ALSO
apply its 2R leadership to the squad’s attack
(see 12.5.441).
56
INDEX
A
360 mounts..........................3.5.8, 12.5.142, 15.3.1
AA, Anti-Aircraft Fire............................12.16.6, 12.4
AAMG, Anti-Aircraft MG.................15.2.23, 12.5.173
Accidental Attack...........................................12.6.7
Accuracy Diagram...........................12.12.2, 12.12.3
Acronyms...........................................................2.2
Adding Height (to the level of a hex).....................6.2.4
Aerial Accuracy Chart....................12.16.41, 12.16.3
Aerosols..............................................................6.5
AFV Bail Out Table (E)...........................12.5.16, 7.1,
....................................9.7.91, 12.5.14, 12.5.15
AFV Cards.................................3.6, 3.5.51, 12.5.23
AFV K-Kill Table (C1)....................................12.5.13
AFV Platoon Movement......................11.4.7, 11.3.24
AFV Smoke Candles.........................................6.4.9
AFV/APC Assault Fire.....................................12.8.2
AirB, Airbursts....................................7.1, 12.5.654
Aircraft and spotting..........................6.3.31, 12.16.2
Aircraft attacks................................................12.16
Aircraft Bombing Attacks.............................12.16.81
Aircraft Cannon........................................12.16.822
Aircraft Counter Battery Fire..........................12.16.9
Aircraft Interceptors......................................12.16.5
Aircraft MG...............................................12.16.821
Aircraft Strafing Attack.......................12.16.82
Alternate AP ammunition..................................14.10
Alternate crews...............................................14.2.6
Ammunition limitations......................................3.5.9
Amphibious vehicles.......................................15.9.7
Anti-Aircraft Fire (AA)..........................12.16.6, 12.4
Anti-Aircraft MG (AAMG)...............15.2.23,
................................................12.5.173, 12.4
Anti-tank rifles, ATR...........................................14.5
Anti-tank trench..................................................9.2
Anti-vehicle MG fire........................................14.3.3
AP/HE DIFF................................................12.5.131
APC as targets...................15.7.2, 12.5.1322, 3.5.52
APCR..........................................................14.10
APDS..........................................................14.10
Armor Factor (AF).......12.5.132, 3.5.5, 3.6, 7.6.1,
........................................................................12.5.23
Armored Cars (AC)..............................15.1.2, 3.5.51
Armored Fighting Vehicles (AFV).....15.1, 3.5.51, 3.5
Armored Personnel Carriers (APC)..........15.7, 3.5.52
Artillery................................................3.5.10, 12.12
Artillery Ammunition Supply.......................12.12.31
Artillery Procedure.......................................12.12.2
Assault Fire, Restrictions...............................11.3.32
Assault Fire, ROF............................12.8.21, 12.8.12
Assault Fire, Personnel.....................12.8.1, 12.5.53
Assault Fire, Vehicles......................................12.8.2
Assault Movement, Personnel.........11.3.12, 12.5.632
Assault Movement, Vehicles.............................11.4.1
AT minefields.................................................9.7.41
Attack Routines......................12.5, 12.12.2, 12.11.1
Automatic morale results................................10.3.2
Automatic unload............................................11.5.9
B
B-SM-I.................................6.4.1, 6.3.41, 8.3.1522
Bail Out............................12.5.16, 15.7.62, 15.7.1
Bamboo .................................................. 8.32.23
Bangalore Torpedoes ............................ 14.13.13
Banzai Charge .......................................... 1 3 . 2 . 6
BAR Gunner ............................................. 3 . 5 . 3 6
Barrage ............................................ … 1 2 . 1 2 . 6 2
Barrage limit ....................................... . 1 2 . 1 2 . 6 3
Battery contact .................................... . . . 1 2 . 1 2 . 3
Battery limits ...................................... . . . 1 2 . 1 3 . 1
Bazooka .......................................... .14.4, 14.4.5
Black dot AF ......................................... 12.5.132
Blind hexes .................................... ………6.2.61
Blockhouse .................................................. 9 . 3
Blocking Terrain ......................... 7.1, 6.2.3, 6.2.6
Bocage ............................................. .8.1, 6.8.11
Bomb dust .............................................. 6 . 5 . 2 6

Bomb load .......................... .12.16.81, 12.16.53
Bombing attacks ................................. 12.16.811
BOT and Gun Duels ................................ 1 2 . 9 . 1
BOT, Burst On Target ............. 12.5.1122, 15.4.42
Bow MG (BMG) ..................................... 1 5 . 2 . 2 2
Bridges .................................................. 8 . 3 1 . 5
Broken units ...................... ...............10.5, 11.5.4
Brush ......................................................... . 8 . 2
Buildings as targets ........................ .8.3.8, 6.3.41
Building colors ....................................... . 8 . 3 . 1 1
Building Cover ............................... 8.3.11, 8.3.4
Building destruction, collapse ......... 8.3.9, 8.3.93
Building LOS ............................................ 8 . 3 . 2
Buildings...............................................8.3
Buildings with roads ............................... 8 . 2 0 . 6
Bunker ............................................... . . . . . . . . . 9 . 4
Burst On Target (BOT) ............ 12.5.1122, 15.4.42
C Eligible to move ................................ 11.2, 4.4.21
C2 (table) ............................................. . 1 2 . 1 0 . 3
Call For Fire, CFF ....................... 3.5.101, 12.12
Canister ammunition ................................. 1 4 . 1 2
Cannon (aircraft) ................................. 1 2 . 1 6 . 8 2
Capturing weapons, vehicles ......... 10.9, 12.15.43
Carried weapons ................. ……11.3.3, 12.5.51
Carriers, Bren .............................. .15.7.6, 15.2.2
Casualties, personnel ......... ……12.5.9, 12.5.74
Casualties, crew ....................................... 1 4 . 2 . 4
Casualties, indirect fire ......................... … 1 2 . 4 . 3
Casualty Effects ...................................... 12.5.92
Casualty Morale check .................. .12.5.95, 10.3
Casualty Table (F2) ................................... 1 2 . 5 . 7
Cease Fire.......... ............ . … … … … . 1 2 . 1 6 . 8 3
Cellars ................................................... 8.3.12b
Checking morale ....................................... ...10.3
Clear terrain ............................................... . . . 7 . 1
Clearing roadblocks .............................. ......9.8.4
Cliffs ........................................................ 8 . 1 3 . 5
Close Assault ...................... ..12.15, 12.1, 12.4.5
Close Assault attacker/defender ........ ....12.15.33
Close Assault segment ................................ 4 . 4 . 3
Coaxial MG (CMG) ............................... … 1 5 . 2 . 2 1
Collateral Fire (C) ................................. . 1 2 . 5 . 1 0
Combat ....................................................... . 1 2 . 0
Combat engineers.….13.1.2, 12.15.221, 12.15.451
Combat Tables (additional) .......................... 12.10
Commissars…………3.5.34, 5.3.1, 10.3.3, 12.5.653
Concentration ............................. .6.4.4, 12.12.61
Conscripts .......................................... .........13.4
Contact ............................................... . . . 1 2 . 1 2 . 3
Continued Movement........................11.4.5, 4.4.41,
.................................................11.4.63, 12.14.7
Continuing overruns ......................... … 1 2 . 1 4 . 7 1
Continuous Slope ....................................... 7 . 2 4
Control ..................................................... 3 . 4 . 5 3
Convoy movement ..................................... 1 1 . 4 . 6
Counter battery fire ..................... .12.13, 12.16.9
Counters ........................ .. ...................... . . . 3 . 5
Courage ...................................................... 1 0 . 4
Cover state.........................12.5.6, 7.1, 6.3.4, 11.5.1
Cover state, different ............................. . 1 2 . 5 . 9 4
Cover state, same .................................. . 1 2 . 5 . 9 3
Cover & movement ...................... 11.3.1, 12.5.63
Covered Arc (CA) ............ 11.4.2, 12.6.3, 12.16.63
Crawling movement ................. 11.3.11, 12.5.631
Creek ................................................. . . . 8 . 3 1 . 1 4
Crews ............................................. .14.2, 3.5.32
Critical Hit AP (CH) ............................... 12.5.114
Critical Hit HE (CH) ............................... 12.5.114
Crops ......................................................... . . . 8 . 4
Cross Country .......................................... 1 1 . 4 . 1
Crossfire ................................................ 10.10.1
Cushion ....................................... .12.5.655, 7.1
D
Deirs ............................................................ 8 . 6
Demolitions ........................................ 14.13.1-13
INDEX continued
Destroying emplacements......9.1.6, 14.13.1, 12.5.72 G
Dice ............................................................. 3 . 7
Game end ................................................... 4 . 1 . 4
Die Roll Modifiers, (DRM) ............................ 3 . 7 . 2
Game scale....................................................... 2.0
Direct Fire .......................................... 12.1, 12.5
Game Turn Record Track .......................... ...3.4.6
Direct Fire range and LOS ....................... 1 2 . 5 . 3
Gammon Bombs .................. 12.15.23, 12.15.21
Direct Fire Targets ...................... 12.5.22-12.5.24
GF Reduction............................................ 12.5.51
Dozers (Bulldozer) ........... .. .... 12.5.72, 14.13.1
Gliders ....................................................... 12.17
Dropping To Full Cover ....10.5.2, 11.5.4, 12.5.664
Good Cover.......................................... 7.1, 12.5.641
Dug-in heavy weapons ................................ 1 4 . 1
Graveyard ..................................................... 8 . 9
Dummies .......................................... 3.4.1, 6.7.5
Grenades, attacks ....................... .12.15.2, 12.3.4
Dummy minefields .................................... 9 . 7 . 1 0
Gun Duels .............................. .12.9, 12.6.21, 4.6
Dust ................................................. 6.4.5, 6.5.2
Guns ............................................ .12.2.2, 3.5.4
Dust height and LOS ..................... 6.5.26, 6 . 2 . 6 4
Guns vs. H Weapons ........................... . . . 1 2 . 5 . 2 4
E Guns vs. Personnel ............................. . . . 1 2 . 5 . 2 2
Guns vs. Vehicles ............................... . . . 1 2 . 5 . 2 3
Elephant Grass ......................................... ..8 .4 .6
Guns, pushing .................................... . . . 1 1 . 3 . 3 4
Eligibility.........…..4.3, 11.2, 12.5.41, 12.7.1, 12.9.1
Gurkhas ................................................... .13.1.3
Eligible attackers .............................. 12.3, 4.4.21 H
Eligible targets ............................................ 1 2 . 4
Half FRAG factors .................... .12.5.71, 12.5.661
Elimination of Surrendered units ..... ....... 10.8.42
Half-Tracks, HT .......................... ...15.7.5, 3.5.52
Elite tank commanders .... .15.6, 11.3.24, 12.5.171
Haze.............................................6.5.4
Elite troops ............................................... 1 3 . 1 . 1
H-D, APC vehicles ...................................... 7 . 7 . 1
Embankment ................................................ 8 . 7
H-D terrain............... 7.7, 7.1, 15.4.1, 15.4.2, 8.13.3
Emergency SCW use ............................... 14.4.41
H-D, Truck Type vehicles ........................... 7 . 7 . 1
Emplacements .................................... 3.5.12, 9.0
HEAT .......................................................... 14.10
Empty hexes ............................................. ..6 .8 .3
Heat shimmer ............................................. 6 . 5 . 4
End of Turn Segment .................................. 4 . 4 . 4
Heavy Payload .................................... . 1 2 . 5 . 7 3 2
Entering enemy hexes ..... ..11.1.3, 10.5.23, 10.7.3
Heavy Weapons ......................................... .3.5.43
Entire Hex Terrain ...................................... 7 . 2 3
Heavy Weapons as targets ......................... .12.5.8
Entry cost ....................... . ........................... 7 . 1
Heavy Weapons on Rafts ............................ .15.9.3
Exact LOS ................................................... 6 . 2 . 3
Heavy Weapons, Set Up ..................... 8.3.61, 14.1
Examining opponent’s stacks .......... …6.6.2, 6.6.3
Heavy Weapons, stacking ............ .. .5.2.1, 5.4.13
Exhausted Infantry .............................. . 1 1 . 3 . 1 3 2
Hedge ....................................................... … 8 . 1 0
Exit victory points ................................... ..3.4.52
Hedgehog ..................................................... 9 . 6
F Height................................3.1.11, 6.2.4, 6.2.62, 7.1
Height advantage ........................................ 6 . 3 . 5
F-Kill Table (D1) ............................... ……12.5.15
Hex ID .......................................................... 3 . 1
Facing..........................11.4.2, 12.5.132, 12.5.1321
Hex locations ............................................ 3 . 1 . 1 3
Factory ..................................................... 8 . 3 . 1 4
Hexside roads ........................................... 8 . 2 0 . 6
Fast Turret…15.3.52, 15.3.11, 3.5.8, 12.6.5
Hexside terrain ........................................... . . . 7 . 2
FFE dust .................................................. 6 . 5 . 2 6
Hidden minefield ........................ ...9.7.11, 9.7.71
Final defensive fire ............................... ..12.14.5
Hidden set up ............................................... 6 . 8
Fire & Movement Segment ..................... … . . 4 . 4 . 2
Hide ............................................................. 7 . 1
Fire For Effect, FFE ............. ……3.5.102, 12.12.2
High ammunition supply ..................... . 1 2 . 1 2 . 3 1
Firegroups................13.1.4, 12.5.4, 6.9.4, 13.2.5
High wall .................................................... . 8 . 1 1
Firegroups, APC ....................................... 1 5 . 7 . 4
Hillocks ...................................................... . 8 . 1 2
Flam notation ................................................ 7 . 1
Hills ........................................................... . 8 . 1 3
Flame marker.........14.7.5, 8.8, 6.4.5, 6.4.83, 8.3.10
Hill, same hill LOS ................................ . 8 . 1 3 . 2 1
Flamethrowers.................14.7, 12.2.1, 12.5.72,
Hit Location Table (B) .......................... . . . 1 2 . 5 . 1 2
..............................................12.10.4, 12.5.173
Hit Probability Table (A1 aka HPT)......12.5.11, 3.5.7
Flamethrower AFV ................... 14.7.6, 1 2 . 5 . 1 7 3
Hit Probability Table, using ................... . 1 2 . 5 . 2 1
Flank.................................11.4.2, 12.5.132, 15.4.3
House ................................................... 8 . 3 . 1 2 . 1
Flares ......................................................... 6 . 9 . 5
Howitzer spotter.......................................14.6.7
Flat-roofed buildings .................................. 8 . 3 . 7
HPN determination ............................ … 1 2 . 5 . 1 1 1
Flimsy Huts ........................................ 8 . 3 . 1 2 . 1 1
Hull mounted MA .................................. . 1 5 . 2 . 1 2
Floorpan armor hits ...................................... 7 . 6
Hull-Defilade (HD) ................................ .15.4, 7.7
FO spotting ........................................... 12.11.33
Hurl back, Satchel Charge ................ … 1 2 . 1 5 . 2 4
Fog of War, FOW ......................... 6.7, 3.4.1, 6.3.4
Forcing a minefield ..................................... 9 . 7 . 7 I
Fords ....................................................... 8 . 3 1 . 4
Illumination rounds.....................................6.9.71
Forest ..................................................... 8.32.21
Impulse........... ………4.1, 12.5.43, 12.6.1, 12.16.51
Forts ...................................................... ..8.3.15
Immobilization .................................. ….7.1, 7.3.3
Forward Observer (FO) ................ 12.11.3, 3.5.35
Improved Cover .................................. . 1 2 . 5 . 6 4 2
Foxhole ........................................................ 9 . 5
Indirect Fire ............................................. . 1 2 . 1 1
FRAG Factors................................12.5.71, 12.15.21
Indirect Fire Accuracy Diagram ......... ……12.12.2
Friendly map edge ...................................... 3 . 4 . 7
Indirect Fire attackers ............................... 1 2 . 3 . 2
Front…...............................11.4.2, 12.5.132
Indirect Fire casualties ........................... 12.11.2
Frozen in melee ................................ … 1 2 . 1 5 . 3 2
Indirect Fire, cover denied ............ 7.22, 12.11.23
Full Cover................... .... ...12.5.66, 12.5.644, 7.1
Indirect Fire segment .................................. 4 . 4 . 1
Full Cover, Indirect Fire .................... ...12.5.661
Indirect Fire targets .................................. 1 2 . 4 . 3
Full Cover, firing mortars from........14.6.71, 12.5.662
Indirect Fire vs. Buildings ........................ 8 . 3 . 4 1
Full Cover, Terrain ........................................ 7 . 1
Infiltration..........12.15.1, 4.4.3, 7.3.41, 11.1.3,
Full Hillock (desert only) ........................... 8 . 1 2 . 4
.....................................................11.5.5, 10.5-10.7
Inherent crew ........................................... 1 5 . 7 . 1
Initiative ....................................................... 4 . 2
57

Interceptor aircraft .................. 12.16.11, 12.16.5
Interior walls .......................................... 8 . 3 . 1 1 b
Intimidation .............................................. 1 0 . 2 . 3
J N
Japanese leaders ................ 13.2.5, 10.3.3, 13.2.6
Japanese Personnel .................................... 1 3 . 2
Japanese OBA .......................................... 1 3 . 2 . 3
Jungle .................................................... 8 . 3 2 . 2 2
Junkyard .................................................... 8 . 1 4
K
Khamsin ........................................... 6.5.1, 6.5.5
K-Kill Table (C1) ................................. . . . 1 2 . 5 . 1 3
L Observation Post (OP) Tanks ............. … . 1 2 . 1 1 . 4
L|AT, Light Anti Tank Weapons ............... … . 1 4 . 4
L|M Weapon Firepower Reduction ....... ….12.5.51
L|M weapons .................................. 3.5.4, 11.3.3
Large building ...................................... 8 . 3 . 1 2 . 3
Large target ................................... .3.5.7, 15.4.41
Leaders ...................................... ...13.1.4, 3.5.33
Leader Bonus ............................. 11.3.25, 13.1.4
Leaders and Firegroups .......................... 1 2 . 5 . 4
Leaders as FOs ..................................... 12.11.35
Leaving Full Cover...........................12.5.6644
Level markers ............................................. 8 . 3 . 3
Levels ............................................. 3.1.11, 6.2.4
Level +5 terrain ................................. ……6.2.621
Light Anti Tank Weapons (L|AT) .................. 1 4 . 4
Light infantry weapons .................. 3.5.41, 11.3.3
Limited intelligence ................................... … 6 . 6
Line barrage ......................................... 12.12.63
Line of Sight, LOS ................................. .6.2, 3.1
LOS Blind Hex Creation Table (L)....................6.2.62
Linear depression ....................................... . 7 . 3
Loading ................................................ . 1 1 . 5 . 3 1
Locating enemy batteries ....................... 12.13.21
Locations ........................................ 3.1.13, 6.2.5
Long range fire ...................................... . 1 2 . 5 . 5 2
Long range MG fire .................................. 1 4 . 3 . 2
LOS, obstructed ...................... 6.2.64, 12.11.332
Low ammunition supply ........................ 12.12.31
M Passengers as targets ................................ 1 1 . 5 . 7
M-Kill Table (D2) .............................. ……12.5.14
Machine Guns, vehicle .............................. 1 5 . 2 . 2
Machine-guns, MG ...................................... 1 4 . 3
Main armament (MA) ..................... 15.2.1, 12.2.2
Map entry and exit ...................................... 3 . 4 . 4
Maps ............................................................ 3 . 1
Markers ........................................ 3.5.11, 5.3.21
Masonry Cover ...................................... 12.5.643
Medium infantry weapons ............. 3.5.42, 11.3.3
Melee.................................12.15, 10.4.2, 10.5.24
Melee and passengers/riders .............. . 1 2 . 1 5 . 4 6
Melee vs. Vehicle Morale Check.....12.15.44, 13.2.62
Melee stacking .............................................. 5 . 1
Melee vs. personnel ............................ ….12.15.3
Melee vs. vehicles ....................... 12.15.4, 10.4.2
Melee value .................................... … 1 2 . 1 5 . 4 5 1
MG, terrain based CA restrictions ........ ….12.6.33
MG Hit Probability Table (A2) ............ ……12.10.1
MG strafing, aircraft ............................ . 1 2 . 1 6 . 8 2
Minefield ...................................................... 9 . 7
Minefield clearance ................................... 9 . 7 . 1 3
Minefield lanes ........................................... 9 . 7 . 8
Mines on roads ......................................... 8 . 2 0 . 5
Mines, searching for ................................. 9 . 7 . 1 2
Morale overview .......................................... 1 0 . 1
Morale check ...................... .10.3, 10.2.4, 10.8.4
Morale modifiers ......................... 10.2.1, 10.2.21
Mortar spotter.......14.6.7, 14.6.71, 12.5.662, 12.3.2
Mortars................................. 14.6, 12.3.2, 12.5.662
Movement overview ..................................... 1 1 . 1
Movement class ........................................ . 3 . 5 . 6
Multiple firing units .................................. 4 . 4 . 2 4
INDEX continued
Multiple targets ..................................... 12.5.741 Re-Manning Bailed Out AFV .................. 12.5.161
Multiple terrain effects ...................... … … … . . 7 . 4 Rear ....................................... ..11.4.2, 12.5.132
Multiple vehicle weapons .................. 15.2, 12.9.3 Rear -facing weapons ..................... 15.2.3, 11.4.2
Reciprocity (LOS) ........................................ 6 . 2 . 2
Reduced crew penalty ............................... 1 4 . 2 . 5
Registration ............................................ 12.12.1
Napalm ........................... …12.16.1, 12.16.812
Removing suppression .......................... 12.5.176
Neutralize enemy batteries ...... 12.13.22, 3.5.104
Revealing hidden emplacements ................ …6.8.4
Night rules ................................................... 6 . 9
Revealing hidden units ............................... 6 . 8 . 3
Notes Row ............................................. . 1 2 . 5 . 7 2
Reverse Movement .................................... 1 1 . 4 . 3
O
Rice Paddies ............................................... 8 . 4 . 5
Riders .................................................. … … 1 1 . 5
OBA Attack Routine ............................... . 1 2 . 1 2 . 2
River ...................................................... 8.31.13
Obscuring Terrain ...................... .6.2.12, 7.1, 7.4
Roadblock .................................................. . . 9 . 8
Observation Limits ...................................... 6 . 3 . 3
Roads ......................................................... 8 . 2 0
Obstructed LOS ...................... .6.2.64, 12.11.332
Rock-strewn terrain .................................... 8 . 2 1
Rockets, strike and strafe .................. . 1 2 . 1 6 . 8 2 4
Off-Board Artillery..................................12.12
Rolling Barrage ..................................... 12.12.64
Off-Board Artillery Types .................... . . . 1 2 . 1 2 . 6
Roofless factory ....................................... 8.3.144
Off-Board Forward Observer ............... 12.11.321
Rooftop ....................................................... 8 . 3 . 7
OOB, Order of Battle ................................... 3 . 4 . 1
Rounding dice rolls ..................................... 3 . 7 . 1
Open ground .............................................. . 8 . 1 5
Rubble ....................................................... . 8 . 2 2
Open-Topped Vehicles (OT) ........... 15.1.4, 3.5.54
Rubble creation .................. 8.3.9, 8.22.5, 8.3.10
Opportunity Fire ............................... . 1 2 . 7 , 4.5
Running...................11.3.13, 12.5.633, 12.5.67
Optional rules ............................................... 4 . 7
Orchards .................................................... . 8 . 1 6 S
Orchard Roads ........................ ........... ... 8.16.21
S-Boat .................................................... 1 5 . 9 . 6
Overlays ................................................. .3.2, 7.5
Same hex vehicle facing .................. . 1 2 . 5 . 1 3 2 1
Overrun .......................... 12.14, 11.4.72, 12.3.3
Same hex fire (range 0)..12.5.1321, 12.16.81, 12.5.3
Overrun attackers ................................. . . . 1 2 . 3 . 3
Sand dunes .............................................. . 8 . 2 3
Overrun personnel .............................. . 1 2 . 1 4 . 6 1
Sangar ...................................................... . . 9 . 9
Overrun resolution .............................. . . . 1 2 . 1 4 . 6
Satchel Charges .................. …12.15.22, 12.5.72
Overrun targets ..................................... . . . 1 2 . 4 . 4
Satchel Charges against vehicles ..... . 1 2 . 1 5 . 4 5 1
Overrun weapons ................................ . 1 2 . 1 4 . 6 2
Satchel Charges, Hurl Back .......... … . 1 2 . 1 5 . 2 4
Overrunning Track Damage ............. …12.14.621
Scenario Cards ......................................... . . 3 . 4
Overstacking penalties .................................. 5 . 4
Scenario Special Rules (SSR) ................... . 3 . 4 . 8
P Scrub ..................................................... 8 . 2 4
SCW Hit Probability Table (A3) .......... … 1 2 . 1 0 . 2
Palm Groves ............................................... 8 . 1 7
Searching for mines ................................ 9 . 7 . 1 2
Panzerfaust, Pf .................................. 14.4, 14.4.5
Segments .......................................... . 4 . 4 , 4 . 1 . 1
Partial Hillock ........................................... 8 . 1 2 . 3
Self-propelled guns (SPGs) ................... . 1 5 . 1 . 3
Partial Terrain ............................................ 7 . 2 3
Self-Rally ............................................ . 1 0 . 8 . 1
Pass ........................................................... .4.1.2
Semi-automatic guns ................................. 1 4 . 8
Passenger fire restrictions ........... 11.5.6, 15.7.52
Sequence of play overview ................... 4 . 1 , 4.4
Passengers fate ........................... 12.5.82, 11.5.8
Set Up area ............................................... 3 . 4 . 3
Set Up order ............................................. 3 . 4 . 2
Passengers in/on APC/AFV.11.5.71, 11.5.73, 15.7.3
Set Up, Heavy Weapons ... .3.5.43, 3.4.11, 5.2.1
Passengers in melee ............................. 12.15.46
Shallow water ....................................... 8 . 3 1 . 4 1
Paths ...................................................... 8.20.41
Shaped charge weapons (SCW) ............... … 1 4 . 4
Penetration number ................ 12.5.131, 12.5.23
Shellholes ................................................ 8 . 2 5
Personnel ................................................... 3 . 5 . 3
Slow turret/traverse ........ 15.3.12, 3.5.8, 12.6.5
Personnel assault fire ................. .12.8.1, 12.5.53
Small arms ............................................. 1 2 . 2 . 1
Personnel movement ................................... 1 1 . 3
Small target .............................................. 3 . 5 . 7
Personnel units and steps ....................... 12.5.91
Smoke ...................................................... . . 6 . 4
Personnel stacking ............................... 5.3.1, 5.4
Smoke and LOS ............................ 6.4.5, 6.2.71
Personnel vs. vehicles/H weapons ........ … 1 2 . 5 . 8
Smoke Candles ......................................... 6 . 4 . 9
PIAT ........................................................... 1 4 . 4
Smoke duration ........................................ 6 . 4 . 6
Pick up and carry ................................... 11.3.33
Smoke effects ........................................... 6 . 4 . 5
Pinned down units ...................................... 1 0 . 6
Smoke grenades ........................... 6.4.7, 4.4.25
Pivoting ........................................ 11.4.4, 12.6.4
Smoke removal ....................................... 6 . 4 . 6 2
Platoon movement ................................... . 1 1 . 3 . 2
Smoke, OBA ............................................. 6 . 4 . 4
Platoon movement, AFV/APC ................. … 1 1 . 4 . 7
Smoke, on-map weapons ........................... 6 . 4 . 3
Platoon movement, Personnel and vehicles…11.3.24
Soft sand .................................................. 8 . 2 6
Pond .................................................... . 8 . 3 1 . 1 2
Solitaire play suggestions .......................... 6 . 8 . 5
Poorly Armored Vehicle Facings .......... ….12.5.132
Special troop types overview ................... . . 1 3 . 1
Portees ....................................................... 1 5 . 8
Special vehicle rules ................................. 1 5 . 0
Pre 1943 Russian MA ......................... .........15.5
Special weapon and crew rules ............... … 1 4 . 0
Precipitous Terrain (Hill) ......................... . 8 . 1 3 . 6
Speed of play .......................................... . 4 . 1 . 5
R Spiking weapons ...................................... 1 4 . 9
Sponsons ............................................. 1 5 . 2 . 1 3
Rafts ............................................. 15.9.6, 15.9.3
Sponsons in Gun Duels .......................... 1 2 . 9 . 3
Railcars ...................................................... 8 . 1 8
Spotter aircraft ................................ . . . 1 2 . 1 6 . 1 0
Railroad .............................................. .8.20, 8.27
Spotting, On Board Indirect Fire...................14.6.7
Rallying .......................................... …10.8, 4.4.4
Spotting Range .......................................... . . 6 . 3
Rally, order of ......................................... 1 0 . 8 . 3
Spotting Ranges Table ............................. . 6 . 3 . 4
Rate of Fire, ROF ............. …12.6.2, 4.4.24, 12.3.1
Squads ................................... .3.5.31, 12.5.911
Ravine ........................................................ 8 . 1 9
Stacking overview ..................................... . . 5 . 1
Razor-Back Ridge ..................................... 8 . 1 3 . 7
Stairwell, Stairwell building ............ . . . 8 . 3 . 1 2 . 4
58
 GAME PIECE SAMPLES

EMPLACEMENTS TANKS (TURRETED AFV) TRANSPORT

Weapon Pit Bunker AT Trench AFV AFV AFV Light Truck Carrier Staff Car

SELF PROPELLED GUNS (NON TURRETED AFV)

Sangar Hedgehog Cave Dugout Sidecar Wheeled Half Track

Motorcycles APC APC
SPG AFV SPG AFV Open
Topped SPG ARMED NON TRANSPORT TRUCK TYPE VEHICLES
GUNS

Roadblock Blockhouse

360-degree 360-degree Armed Truck

Gun w/slow AA Gun w/ Heavy Portee Portee
traverse ‘8’ AA value Howitzer
OTHER ARMED VEHICLES
Minefield Mines AT Mine Wire
Lane

MARKERS

Heavy AA w/ AT Gun Medium Gun-armed Armored Flamethrowing

no AA value Howitzer Half Track Car w/AA SPG
AIRCRAFT
Collateral Courage Turret Suppressed PERSONNEL
Fire Marker Medal Marker Marker

FO BAR Commissar Stuka DFS 230 Sturmovik

Burning Wreck Flame Full Cover Gunner Glider
Wreck Marker Marker
LIGHT AND MEDIUM WEAPONS

German German Wounded

Smoke ‘1’ Melee Moved Fired Officer NCO NCO
Side Up Marker Marker Marker
Light Medium Light
Mortar Mortar ATR

Reduced Gurkha Squad

Squad NCO
Satchel
Charge Level +10 Pontoon
marker Bridge Satchel Light MG Medium MG
Charge

Japanese USMC Crew

Officer NCO

Flamethrower Bazooka Panzerfaust

Fire For FOW Tank FOW Gun
Effect

59
 INDEX continued
Stationary ........................................... 1 2 . 5 . 6 3 1
Steeple ................................................. . 8 . 3 . 1 3
Step losses ........................................... 1 2 . 5 . 9 1
Sun glare ................................................ . 6 . 5 . 3
Sunken roads/lanes/railroads ................ … 8 . 2 7
SUP | FOW on Spotting Table ............... . . . 6 . 3 . 4
Suppression ....................................... . 1 2 . 5 . 1 7
Suppression effects ............................ 1 2 . 5 . 1 7 3
Surrender ................................................. 1 0 . 7
Swamp ..................................................... 8 . 2 8
T an awesome Arab-Israeli Wars1948-1956
Tanks ..................................................... 1 5 . 1 . 1
Target size ................................................ 3 . 5 . 7
Terms, acronyms........................................... 2.2
Terrain based CA restrictions .......... … . 1 2 . 6 . 3 3
Terrain Chart ................................................ 7 . 1
Terrain rules ................................................ 7 . 0
Terrain types ................................................ 8 . 0
Time-fuzed HE ammunition ..................... …14.11
Topography .......................................... 6.1, 3.1.1
Tower ................................................... .8.3.12.2
Towing ....................................................... . 1 1 . 5
Tracked vehicle .......................................... 3 . 5 . 6
Tracks ........................................................ . 8 . 2 0
Transporting ............................................... . 1 1 . 5
Trucks as targets..............12.5.8, 3.5.53, 12.5.1322
Tunnel Infiltration ..................................... 9 . 6 . 6 3
Turns ..................................................... 4.1, 4.4
Turret Covered Arc, (TCA) ............. 15.3.2, 11.4.2
Turret marker ........................................... 1 5 . 3 . 3
Turret mounted armament ....................... 15.2.11
Turrets ............................................... 15.3, 3.5.8
U
Under, emplacements....... ........9.1.2, 5.3.22, 6.6.2
Under, bridge ......................................... 8.31.52
Unloading ............................................... 11.5.32
USMC Personnel ......................................... . 1 3 . 3
V Annen, Rob Fabbro, Kevin Grimsley, Florian Altendorfner, Randolph Boyd, Charles
Variable turn rules ...................................... . . . 4 . 7
Vehicle Covered Arc, VCA .......................... 1 1 . 4 . 2
Vehicle dust .............................................. 6 . 5 . 2 1
Vehicle movement ....................................... 1 1 . 4
Vehicle stacking .......................................... . . . 5 . 2
Vehicle weapons ......................................... 1 5 . 2
Vehicles ...................................................... 3 . 5 . 5
Vehicles and wrecks, LOS effects ............... …6.2.7
Very small target ......................................... 3 . 5 . 7
Victory conditions ....................................... 3 . 4 . 5
Victory points ..................... 3.4.51, 10.9.7, 3.4.52
Volksstur m...........................................13.4
W Croton Falls, NY 10519 or drop us a line by E-mail to Maureen@Criticalhit.com.
Wadi ........................................................... 8 . 2 9
Wading ................................................... 8.31.41
Walls .......................................................... 8 . 3 0
Water obstacles ........................................... 8 . 3 1
Watercraft. .................................................. 1 5 . 9
Weapons ................................................... . 3 . 5 . 4
Weapons pit (and provision)..........9.10, 3.4.11, 14.1
Weather ........................................................ 6 . 5
Wheeled vehicle ......................................... 3 . 5 . 6
White Phosphorus ...................................... 6 . 4 . 8
Winded Personnel ................................ 11.3.131
Wire ........................................................... 9 . 1 1
Woods ........................................................ 8 . 3 2
Wrecks and LOS……………………………….6.2.7, 6.4.5
A BRAND NEW ATS MAGAZINE AWAITS YOU!
Advanced Tobruk has evolved into an acclaimed and extensive new tactical-
level game system known as ‘ATS’. What’s more, the system has attracted a
following in the form of involved enthusiasts that continue to leave their mark on
the system via their feedback at the CH Message Board, a FREE online commu-
nity created especially for their use. And YOURS!
We’ve also created a print magazine for ATS hobbyists—each issue crammed
with relevant game-related articles, variants and scenarios. And that means NEW
DIE CUT COUNTERS in every issue! The second issue of ATS Briefing includes
variant, complete with new die cut counters
depicting various Israeli, Arab Army of Salva-
tion, Moslem Brotherhood and Egyptian per-
sonnel and their weapons and AFVs. What’s
more, a collection of compelling scenarios de-
picting battles from the 1948 War of Indepen-
dence, early 1950’s action in the Arava, and
armored thrusts from the Sinai War of 1956
come in this jam-packed new issue.
The best place to keep up with the latest ATS
action is at our website, www.Criticalhit.com.
Be sure to sign up for the CH Message Board
at www.Criticalhit.com/Invision. The message
board has already attracted twenty thousand
posts and 1000+ members...and counting.
DESIGN CREDITS
Game and System Design: Raymond J. Tapio.
Development: Drew Dorman, Lieutenant Colonel Mark Johnson, George Anderson,
Jack Westman, Marc Adda, Kurt Martin, Hans Korting, Jim Jensen, Al Berke, Donald
Carlucci, Mark Porterfield, Mike Nagel, P. J. Norton, Brian Laethem, Pedro Ramis,
Charlie Willmer, Dave Lamb, Jim Thompson, Bob Davis, Michael Stephan, Robert Z.
Gunn, Jr., Terry M. Simo, Danny Secary, John D. DiPonio, David Clark, Christophe
Myers, Joseph Kelly, Lyonel Reinhardt, Karl Bodenheimer, Dave Cooke, Kim Meints,
James Shelton, John Hovey, Ellis Simpson, David Love, C. Donald Sebolt, John
Carroll, Dave Cheever, Dan Garrett, Dean Halley, Guy Handley, Oliver McClintock ,
Tony Nash, Paul Smith, Roger Symonds, and Tim Weber.
This game is dedicated to the life work of Harold E. ‘Hal’ Hock and the innovations
he brought to tactical-level gaming.
Special Mention: Lorrin Bird, author of World War II Ballistics: Armor and Gunnery;
George Bradford, Publisher of AFV News and creator of the AFV views used in the
game.
©1976, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Critical Hit, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
REPLACEMENT PAR TS COST: For a replacement parts price list, send a self-ad-
dressed stamped envelope to: Parts Department, Critical Hit, Inc., PO Box 279,
Our design department will be happy to take the time to answer queries through
the contact page at our website www.Criticalhit.com.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Much time and effort went into the research effort upon which the Advanced Tobruk
System was based. Without kindly assistance from personnel from the following
organizations, however, nowhere near the required amount of data could have been
assembled. For this reason, the publisher is highly in debt to:
The U.S. ALMC Library, Ft. Lee, Virginia
The Ballistic Research Laboratories, Aberdeen, MD.
The U.S. Airforce Academy Library
The West Point Library
The Morris Swett Technical Library, Ft. Sill, Oklahoma
Donovan Research Library, Ft. Benning, Georgia
The Armor School Library, Ft. Knox, KY
The Library of Congress
The National Archives and
Center of Military History, United States Army
Bird Library at Syracuse University
without whose assistance ADVANCED TOBRUK could never have been designed
60